LabPro Operator's Guide-9020-7569 PDF

Operator’s Guide
Simple Solutions Are A Click Away.
Portions of the WalkAway Operating System are copyrighted by Mentor Graphics Corporation
(For further information contact your MicroScan Support Representative)
©1987-2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation. All rights reserved.

Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor
is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement provided with the Software
pursuant to DFARS 227.7202-3(a) or as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 as applicable.
MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION, 8005 SW BOECKMAN ROAD, WILSONVILLE, OR
97070-7777
9020-7569, Rev. A
No part of this work covered by the copyrights herein may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any
means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical; including photocopying, recording, typing, or information storage
and retrieval systems—without written permission of the publisher.
Windows, Excel, and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Zip is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.
Prompt is a trademark of 3M Company.
Beckman Coulter, the stylized logo, and MicroScan, autoSCAN, WalkAway, MICroSTREP plus, RENOK,
Synergies plus, and the LabPro logo are trademarks of Beckman Coulter.
* Japan Only: Synergies plus may be interchangeable with rapID/S plus in the LabPro software and
LabPro Operator’s Guide.
Screen illustrations within this manual are representational only and may not exactly match the software.
Beckman Coulter has validated the provided instructions, reagents, instrument, software and customizable
features for this system to optimize product performance and meet product specifications. User-defined
modifications are not supported by Beckman Coulter as they may affect performance of the system and
test results. It is the responsibility of the user to validate any modifications made to these instructions,
instruments, reagents or software provided by Beckman Coulter.
9020-7569, Rev. A
01/2015
Made in Germany
Made in USA
Beckman Coulter, Inc. Beckman Coulter Eurocenter S.A.
250 S. Kraemer Blvd. 22 rue Juste-Olivier
Brea, CA 92821 USA Case Postale 1044
www.beckmancoulter.com CH-1260 Nyon 1, Switzerland
TEL: +41 (0) 22 365 36 11
© 2015 Beckman Coulter, Inc. All rights reserved.
Spec: 9900-3929
ii  9020-7569, Rev. A
Warranty statement
The system is covered by and subject to the provisions of the warranty included in your contractual agreement
for the system or its reagents.
The customer is responsible for routine preventative maintenance procedures. Repairs arising from the failure
to perform these maintenance procedures at the indicated time intervals are made at the discretion of
Beckman Coulter, and at the customer’s expense.
9020-7569, Rev. A Warranty statement  iii

Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols
Instrument Safety Labels
The following labels are affixed to Beckman Coulter instruments to alert you to safety considerations.
Symbol Description
Attention When used alone, the attention label indicates specific instruction affecting
safety in this guide involving the marked areas of the instrument. When used
with another symbol, the attention label points out another instrument warning
label defined in this guide. You should understand that warning before going
into the labeled area of the instrument.
Potential biohazard Indicates an area of the instrument that could have been in contact with
biohazardous materials. Do not handle the contents or touch the area unless
you are properly protected. Refer to your applicable laboratory procedures.
Pinch hazard Indicates an area of the instrument where you can be exposed to moving parts.
Be careful around these parts when performing diagnostic operations, and
when performing maintenance operations with the top cover raised.
Burn hazard Indicates a heated area of the instrument that could burn you. Be sure to power
off the instrument and let these areas cool before touching them or performing
diagnostic and maintenance operations around them.
Static sensitive Indicates potential damage to electronic boards from electrostatic discharge.
Do not touch Indicates an area that may cause physical harm to the user or damage to the
instrument. View as a potential hazard.
Electrical hazard Indicates an area of the instrument that contains high voltage. Do not touch
unless a procedure specifically instructs you to do so.
iv  Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols 9020-7569, Rev. A

Key Symbols
The following table describes symbols that may appear on Beckman Coulter instruments and in consumables
product labeling.
Symbols Key
Manufactured by
Authorized Representative
In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Device
Batch Code
"Use By" date in year-month-day format
Temperature Limitation
CE Mark
Catalogue Number
Consult Instructions for Use
Antimicrobial Agent Abbr.

Identification Substrate Abbr.
Contains sufficient for <n> tests
Full / Maximum filling level
Half full
Empty
Gas lift spring lock / unlock
Biohazard
Static sensitive
Pinch hazard
Do not touch
Attention
9020-7569, Rev. A Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols  v

Hot surface
Electrical hazard
Electrical Disposal
Equipment is subject to European Directive on
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC. This symbol indicates separate
collection and return required.
vi  Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols 9020-7569, Rev. A

Contents
Getting Started ______________________________________________________ 1-1

Find Information in Related Documentation ................................................................... 1-1
Document Conventions.................................................................................................... 1-1
Installation Policy ............................................................................................................ 1-2
Customer Support ............................................................................................................ 1-3
Working with LabPro ................................................................................................................... 1-3
Terms Used in Instructions .............................................................................................. 1-4
Access the Command Center ........................................................................................... 1-4
Access LabPro Functions................................................................................................. 1-5
Work with Tables............................................................................................................. 1-5
Enter Times ...................................................................................................................... 1-5
Enter Dates ....................................................................................................................... 1-6
Operating and Maintaining a WalkAway Instrument _______________________ 2-1

How the WalkAway Instrument Processes Panels .......................................................... 2-1
Operating the WalkAway Instrument ........................................................................................... 2-2
Access Doors ................................................................................................................... 2-4
Observe Safety Precautions ............................................................................................. 2-4
Start Up the WalkAway Instrument ................................................................................. 2-5
Shut Down the WalkAway Instrument ............................................................................ 2-5
Maintaining the WalkAway Instrument........................................................................................ 2-6
Printing the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report .......................................................................... 2-7
Maintaining the Proper Environment............................................................................................ 2-8
Monitor the Temperature. ................................................................................................ 2-8
Maintain the Water Level ................................................................................................ 2-8
Requesting Access to the Instrument for Maintenance ................................................................. 2-9
Maintaining the Reagent Dispense System................................................................................. 2-10
Check Reagent Levels ................................................................................................... 2-10
Add Reagents ................................................................................................................. 2-11
Check the Reagent Dispense Pressure ........................................................................... 2-12
Purge the Reagent Dispense Lines ................................................................................. 2-12
Check the Reagent Dispense Lines and Cleaning Dispense Tips .................................. 2-13
Clean the Reagent Waste Funnel ................................................................................... 2-13
Replace the Reagent Waste Bag .................................................................................... 2-14
9020-7569, Rev. A Contents  vii

Maintaining the Oil Dispense System ........................................................................................ 2-14
Check the Oil Dispense Line and Oil Syringe............................................................... 2-14
Check the Oil Level ....................................................................................................... 2-15
Add Oil .......................................................................................................................... 2-15
Purge the Oil Line ......................................................................................................... 2-16
Maintaining the Reference Disk and Shields ............................................................................. 2-17
Remove the Front Tower ............................................................................................... 2-17
Clean the Reference Disk .............................................................................................. 2-18
Clean the Fluorometer Shield ........................................................................................ 2-19
Check and Clean the Photodiode Shield ....................................................................... 2-20
Check and Clean the Diffuser Plate............................................................................... 2-21
Checking and Cleaning the Air Intake Filter .............................................................................. 2-22
Troubleshooting WalkAway Instrument Problems .................................................................... 2-23
QC Diagnostic Troubleshooting for the WalkAway Instrument ................................... 2-23
WalkAway Instrument Display Messages..................................................................... 2-25
General WalkAway Instrument Problems ..................................................................... 2-31
LabPro Error Conditions for the WalkAway Instrument .............................................. 2-33
Operating and Maintaining the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ____________________ 3-1

How the autoSCAN-4 Instrument Processes Panels ....................................................... 3-1
Operating the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ........................................................................................ 3-2
Exercise Safety and Caution............................................................................................ 3-2
Start Up the autoSCAN-4 Instrument.............................................................................. 3-4
Shut Down the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ......................................................................... 3-4
Run QC Diagnostics ........................................................................................................ 3-4
Calibrate the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ............................................................................ 3-5
Maintaining the autoSCAN-4 Instrument .................................................................................... 3-6
Clean the Diffuser Plate .................................................................................................. 3-6
Clean the Photodiode Shield ........................................................................................... 3-8
Check the Fan .................................................................................................................. 3-9
Replace the Fuse .............................................................................................................. 3-9
Remove the Lamp ......................................................................................................... 3-10
Install a New Lamp ....................................................................................................... 3-11
Troubleshooting autoSCAN-4 Instrument Problems ................................................................. 3-12
QC Diagnostics Troubleshooting for the autoSCAN-4 Instrument............................... 3-12
General autoSCAN-4 Instrument Problems .................................................................. 3-14
LabPro Messages and Problems for the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ................................ 3-16
Customizing LabPro _________________________________________________ 4-1

Configuring WalkAway and autoSCAN-4 Instruments ............................................................... 4-1
Set or Change the WalkAway Instrument Configuration ................................................ 4-1
Assign the autoSCAN-4 Serial Port ................................................................................ 4-2
Setting the Active Specimen Range ............................................................................................. 4-3
Transferring Panel Files, Selecting Panel Processing Options, and Creating QC Batteries ......... 4-3
Select and Transfer MicroScan Panels ............................................................................ 4-3
Select Panel Processing Features..................................................................................... 4-4
Create ID and MIC Test Batteries for QC Panels ........................................................... 4-5
Automating Database Backups and Report Printing .................................................................... 4-5
Customize the Scheduled Backup. .................................................................................. 4-5
Configure LabPro to Automatically Print Selected Reports ........................................... 4-6
viii  Contents 9020-7569, Rev. A

Customizing Codes and Groups.................................................................................................... 4-7
Add, Edit, Delete, and Print Codes and Descriptions ...................................................... 4-7
Add, Edit, and Delete Group Codes, Descriptions, and Members................................... 4-8
Defining Orders ............................................................................................................................ 4-9
Defining Queries and Drug Test Suppression Rules .................................................................. 4-10
Edit, Copy, and Delete Queries and User-Defined Rules .............................................. 4-13
Troubleshoot Drug Test Suppression Rules .................................................................. 4-14
Print Rules and Queries ................................................................................................. 4-14
Creating Custom Reports ............................................................................................................ 4-15
Copy or Edit a Custom Report ....................................................................................... 4-15
Add a New Custom Report ............................................................................................ 4-17
Add and Delete Custom Report Sections....................................................................... 4-18
Resize, Move, and Align Sections on Custom Reports ................................................. 4-19
Select Custom Report Format and Section Options....................................................... 4-22
Select a Custom Report Section Style ........................................................................... 4-25
View or Print a Sample Custom Report ......................................................................... 4-26
Safeguarding Customization and Configuration Settings ........................................................... 4-26
Print Epidemiology Segmentation Settings ................................................................... 4-27
Using the LabPro Interface ____________________________________________ 5-1

About the Interface Monitor ............................................................................................ 5-1
Interface Icons in the Taskbar .......................................................................................... 5-2
Interface Transmission Workflow ................................................................................... 5-3
Configuring LabPro to Automatically Send and Receive Data Transmissions ............................ 5-3
Enable and Disable Auto-Monitor ................................................................................... 5-4
Configure Auto-Request .................................................................................................. 5-4
Configure Auto-Transmit ................................................................................................ 5-5
Manually Requesting LIS Data or Transmitting Results .............................................................. 5-5
Manually Sending a Request for Data to an LIS ............................................................. 5-5
Manually Transmitting Results to the LIS ....................................................................... 5-6
Stop a Transmission ......................................................................................................... 5-7
Viewing Transmission Details ...................................................................................................... 5-7
View the Automatic Transmit/Request Configuration and Filter Rules .......................... 5-7
View the Interface Queue ................................................................................................ 5-8
Using the Interface Log ................................................................................................................ 5-8
View and Print the Interface Log ..................................................................................... 5-8
Configure Auto-Delete .................................................................................................... 5-9
Suppress Code Not Found Errors on the Interface Log ................................................... 5-9
Troubleshooting Interface Issues ................................................................................................ 5-10
Find Information for Configuring the Interface ............................................................. 5-10
Determine the Correct Date and Time Format............................................................... 5-11
Convert Cross-Reference Tables ................................................................................... 5-12
Resolve Transmission and Backup Conflicts ................................................................ 5-13
Merge Interface Data ..................................................................................................... 5-13
Resolving Data Transmission Problems ..................................................................................... 5-14
Responding to Interface Log Errors and Warning Messages...................................................... 5-18
9020-7569, Rev. A Contents  ix

Working with Patient Orders __________________________________________ 6-1
Entering Patient Orders ................................................................................................................ 6-2
Use Worklists .................................................................................................................. 6-2
Add Patient Orders .......................................................................................................... 6-3
Changing Patient Orders .............................................................................................................. 6-6
Edit a Patient Order ......................................................................................................... 6-6
Delete a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test Group ............................................ 6-9
Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, or Isolate .............................................................. 6-9
Edit a Patient ID ............................................................................................................ 6-10
Reusing Specimen Numbers....................................................................................................... 6-11
Processing Panels __________________________________________________ 7-1

Processing Panels in a WalkAway Instrument ............................................................................. 7-1
Access the WalkAway Monitor....................................................................................... 7-3
Print Bar Code Labels ..................................................................................................... 7-3
Reprint Bar Code Labels ................................................................................................. 7-4
Affix Bar Code Labels to MicroScan Panels .................................................................. 7-4
Identify Panels to the Instrument if the Bar Code Printer Malfunctions ......................... 7-5
Request Access to the WalkAway Instrument ................................................................ 7-5
Load Panels into the WalkAway Instrument ................................................................... 7-6
Resolve Bar Code Read Errors ........................................................................................ 7-7
Resolve Unread Panels .................................................................................................... 7-8
Monitor Instrument and Panel Status ............................................................................ 7-10
Use the Load Status Tab ................................................................................................ 7-12
Unload Panels from the WalkAway Instrument ............................................................ 7-12
Resolve WalkAway Panel Processing Exceptions ........................................................ 7-13
Processing Panels in an autoSCAN-4 Instrument ...................................................................... 7-16
Read a Panel in the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ................................................................ 7-17
Responding to autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages .......................................................... 7-20
Entering Results Manually ......................................................................................................... 7-22
Entering Offline Test Results ..................................................................................................... 7-23
Resolving Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages .................................................... 7-23
Common Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages ......................................... 7-24
Uncommon Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages ..................................... 7-32
Working with Summarized Panel Results________________________________ 8-1

Viewing Patient Panel Results...................................................................................................... 8-1
Editing Patient Panel Data ............................................................................................................ 8-5
Add Alert Resolution Comments and View the Isolate Alert History ............................ 8-8
Process Unwanted Panel Results ..................................................................................... 8-9
Review Results for Panels with Critical Alert Messages .............................................. 8-11
Complete a Synergies plus Panel .................................................................................. 8-12
Printing Reports ____________________________________________________ 9-1

Printing Instrument Data and Panel Reports ................................................................................ 9-1
Print Reports from the WalkAway Monitor .................................................................... 9-2
Print Reports from the Results Summary and Edit Dialog Box ...................................... 9-2
Printing Patient, Lab, and Query Summary Reports .................................................................... 9-3
x  Contents 9020-7569, Rev. A

Printing Epidemiology Reports..................................................................................................... 9-5
Export Selected Data to a File ......................................................................................... 9-7
Create an Export Configuration ....................................................................................... 9-8
Merge LabPro Databases to Produce a Consolidated Epidemiology Report ................... 9-9
Working with Stored Data ____________________________________________ 10-1

Retrieving Stored Specimens ...................................................................................................... 10-1
Find Stored Specimen Results Using the Patient’s Name ............................................. 10-2
Reviewing and Editing Stored Specimen Data ........................................................................... 10-3
Review Stored Specimen Data....................................................................................... 10-3
Edit Stored Isolate Details ............................................................................................. 10-5
Edit Stored Isolate Antimicrobic Results ....................................................................... 10-5
Use the Panel Editor to Change Stored Panel Results ................................................... 10-6
Edit Specimen Test Results ........................................................................................... 10-8
Edit Patient and Specimen Demographics ..................................................................... 10-8
Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test Group......................................... 10-9
Performing Quality Control ___________________________________________ 11-1

Entering and Editing QC Orders ................................................................................................. 11-2
Add a New QC Order .................................................................................................... 11-2
Add QC Organism Strains to an Existing QC Order ..................................................... 11-3
Edit or Deleting a QC Order .......................................................................................... 11-4
Viewing QC Panel Results.......................................................................................................... 11-4
Retrieving Stored QC Results ..................................................................................................... 11-5
Reviewing and Editing Stored QC Data ..................................................................................... 11-6
Review Stored QC Data ................................................................................................. 11-6
Edit Stored QC Data ...................................................................................................... 11-7
Printing QC Reports.................................................................................................................... 11-8
Update Reagent Lot Numbers ........................................................................................ 11-9
Backing Up and Optimizing the Database_______________________________ 12-1

Performing a Manual Backup of the LabPro Database............................................................... 12-1
Working with Scheduled Backup ............................................................................................... 12-2
Resolve Scheduled Database Backup Failures .............................................................. 12-3
Optimize LabPro Databases ........................................................................................... 12-4
Appendix A: WalkAway Instrument Components and Specifications _________ A-1

Optical Systems .............................................................................................................. A-1
Fluorometric System ....................................................................................................... A-1
Colorimetric System ....................................................................................................... A-2
Panel Positioning Assemblies ......................................................................................... A-2
Bar Code Reader ............................................................................................................. A-3
Reagent and Oil Dispense Systems................................................................................. A-3
Panel Preparation System ............................................................................................... A-3
Humidifier and Heater Assembly ................................................................................... A-3
Internal Computer ........................................................................................................... A-4
WalkAway Instrument Technical Specifications ............................................................ A-4
9020-7569, Rev. A Contents  xi

Appendix B: autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications _______ B-1
Colorimetric Optical System ........................................................................................... B-1
Other Components ........................................................................................................... B-1
Electronics ....................................................................................................................... B-2
autoSCAN-4 Instrument Technical Specifications.......................................................... B-3
Appendix C: Instrument Certifications __________________________________ C-1

General Code Compliance Information........................................................................... C-1
Appendix D: Instrument Decontamination _______________________________ D-1
Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File ____________________________ E-1

Prepare the Water Blank Panels ...................................................................................... E-1
Perform Water Blank Calibration.................................................................................... E-1
Back Up and Restore the Water Blank File..................................................................... E-3
Appendix F: ESBL Screen and Confirmation Test_________________________ F-1

Software Rules ............................................................................................................................. F-2
ESBL Screen ................................................................................................................... F-2
ESBL Confirmation ......................................................................................................... F-3
ESBL Scenarios ............................................................................................................................ F-4
EBL? indicates a suspected ESBL .................................................................................. F-4
ESBL indicates a confirmed ESBL ................................................................................. F-4
Index _______________________________________________________________ I-1
xii  Contents 9020-7569, Rev. A

Getting Started
The LabPro Operator’s Guide provides general instruction and reference material for using the LabPro
System. It contains the primary procedures for processing panels, printing and transmitting test results,
retrieving patient data, performing quality control, and maintaining the LabPro database. Instrument
specifications, basic component descriptions, operating instructions, and maintenance procedures are also
provided for both the WalkAway and autoSCAN-4 instruments. General customization, configuration,
and administrative procedures are included in this guide. Installation procedures are provided with the
LabPro software. For additional information, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative or Distributor.
Find Information in Related Documentation

LabPro provides quick access to the procedures in this guide. You can also refer to the following material for
more information.
 The LabPro Alert EX System Guide explains how to customize special alert rules—including critical alert
messages—to identify atypical results and/or change ID/AST results.
 The LabPro Interface Implementation Guide provides LabPro interface hardware requirements,
configuration procedures, and specifications for writing a reciprocal program to connect an LIS to
LabPro. The LabPro Interface Implementation Guide and the Microbiologics Information Manual are
available on the Beckman Coulter website.
You can also use the CLSI Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing and the
appropriate MicroScan Panel Procedural Manuals for further reference. Information about the Extended
Spectrum -Lactamase screen is provided in Appendix F of this guide.
Document Conventions
This guide uses the following general text conventions:
This format Indicates
bold type Information that you type, specific keys on the keyboard, and commands or buttons
that you click—for example:
Type ICU and press Enter.
From the Data menu, click Save.
Instrument buttons, the Windows Close button, and buttons inside text boxes—for
example, Lookup and Calendar buttons—are not presented in bold type.
9020-7569, Rev. A Getting Started  1-1

This format Indicates
italic type Computer messages displayed in windows and dialog boxes—for example:
When the message Print QC Diagnostics Report? appears, click OK.
Emphasized words and references to outside source material—for example:
Do not touch the lamp surface.
For details, see the Adult Therapy Guide.
The following table identifies how this guide uses notes, cautions, and warnings
Title/Symbol Identifies
Note An important feature or special information. A note may apply only in special cases.
Important An important note in procedures that provides additional information necessary to
complete the task.
Tip A helpful tip to apply a technique to your needs.
CAUTION Critical information you must follow to prevent data loss or damage.
Critical information you must follow to prevent physical harm to you or to hardware
components—for example:
Before removing any component, turn off and unplug the instrument to prevent
WARNING
electrical shock.
Installation Policy
An authorized field service engineer (FSE) will remove the instrument from the package, install the
equipment, and check the WalkAway and/or autoSCAN-4 instrument and the LabPro computing system.
To maintain full warranty, a qualified FSE must be present in the event that laboratory personnel attempt to
remove any component from its shipping container.
If you need to move, uninstall, or ship a WalkAway or autoSCAN-4 instrument, contact your field service
engineer for instructions.
For a description of the warranty policy, see “Limited Warranty.” For instructions on installing LabPro
software updates, see the installation procedures included with the update kit.
1-2  Getting Started 9020-7569, Rev. A

Customer Support
If a problem occurs with an instrument or the LabPro computing system and you need to call the Customer
Care Center or contact your Beckman Coulter Representative or Distributor, please have the following
information available:
 autoSCAN-4 or WalkAway instrument serial number. To find the autoSCAN-4 instrument serial number,
on the Command Center: click Utilities, double-click Configuration, autoSCAN-4, and then Port
Assignment. To find the WalkAway instrument serial number, click Utilities, double-click
Configuration, and then WalkAway.
 Software versions. To find software versions, on the Command Center, click Utilities and then double-
click System and Software Versions.
 Type of personal computer.
 The function you were performing when the problem occurred.
 Any error messages that appeared when the problem occurred.
 Account ID number.
If you are calling about a problem with data transmissions or the LabPro interface, please have the following
information available:
 The Windows version. To find the Windows version, click Start, point to Settings, click Control Panel,
and then double-click System. The version displays on the General tab.
 The vendor name of the other healthcare system—for example, Omega, Dianoema, Meditech, Misys, or
pharmLINK.
 The Interface Log.
Working with LabPro

This section provides information about key LabPro features to help you become familiar with LabPro. It is
assumed you have used Windows-based programs.
Note: MicroScan LabPro has been validated on a MicroScan-supplied system with the appropriate operating
system installed for each version of LabPro. LabPro is supplied as a key component of an in vitro medical
device system. The effect of running LabPro concurrently with off-the-shelf applications has not been
determined. This could result in decreased execution speed, lockups, or other unanticipated events. In
particular, non-Microsoft products, such as games, should be avoided.
Virus protection software has not been provided on the LabPro System. Therefore, the customer is
responsible for safeguarding the system and controlling the use of software files and applications from non-
MicroScan sources. The installation of virus protection software is not recommended at this time. Anti-virus
software running in real-time mode will likely impact LabPro operation.
Use of this product in a different configuration without a proper validation is outside MicroScan performance
characteristics.

Terms Used in Instructions
The following terms are used frequently in LabPro procedures.
Term Description
Select and clear As it applies to check boxes, click the check box to select or enable the option.
Click the check box again to clear or disable the option.
Box or text box
In boxes without a Lookup button you can type up to the maximum number of
characters allowed.
Lookup button
In boxes with a Lookup button, you can type a code from the associated table, or
click the Lookup button and select an item from the table. If desired, you can
position the pointer in the box and press F3 to access the table instead of clicking
the Lookup button.
Drop-down box
In boxes with an arrow, you can type an entry in the box or click the arrow to
display a list and select an item on the list.
Lookup box
Boxes with a Lookup label are used to quickly find an item in a long table. You
can click a column heading to sort the table by topic and begin typing in the
Lookup box to find a particular item in the selected column.
User-defined and User-defined refers to any customized code and description added to the LabPro
system-defined database. System-defined refers to any item supplied with the LabPro software.
Access the Command Center

The Command Center is the gateway to all LabPro functions.
1. On the Windows Desktop, do one of the following to display the Command Center:
 If a LabPro icon appears on the Desktop, double-click the icon.
 On the Windows taskbar, click Start, point to Programs, point to MicroScan LabPro, and then click
LabPro Command Center.
2. Verify that the time displayed on the right of the taskbar is correct. To adjust the time or date, double-
click the time display.

Access LabPro Functions
 On the Command Center, click the appropriate icon.
Note: The LabPro Convert CDOS Customization, Database Optimizer, Interface Conversion, Merge,
and Restore features are not accessible from the Command Center. To run these programs, on the
Windows taskbar, click Start, point to Programs, point to MicroScan LabPro, and then click an item on
the menu.
CAUTION
It is highly recommended that you contact the Customer Care Center prior to merging or restoring data.
Incorrect use of these features can compromise your database.
To exit the Command Center

1. Close all open LabPro windows and dialog boxes.
2. On the Command Center, click Exit LabPro System.
CAUTION
To prevent the possible loss of unsaved data, make sure you close all LabPro windows, exit from the
Command Center, and properly shut down Windows before turning off the LabPro computer.
Work with Tables

The text boxes with Lookup buttons that appear on various windows and dialog boxes are directly linked to
corresponding LabPro code tables. This procedure describes the basic functions that are available in most
tables. For details on adding and editing table items, see “Customizing Codes and Groups.”
1. In the text box, click the Lookup button or press F3 to display the associated table.
2. Double-click an item in the table to select it. If the table has a Select icon, you can press Ctrl, click
multiple items, and then click Select.
 To lookup an item, click a column heading to sort data by that topic. In the Lookup box, type the
beginning characters of the item you want to find in the selected column
Enter Times
Depending on customization, you must enter the time in a 12-hour or 24-hour format with or without
a delimiter to separate hours and minutes.
 In the Time box, type the time in the specified format.
If you use a 24-hour clock, LabPro displays AM or PM after the time. If you enter the time using a
12-hour clock and the default customization has not been changed, type an a or p after the time to display
AM or PM. For example, to enter 10:30 PM when the format is based on a 12-hour clock with a :
delimiter, type 10:30p. If the format is based on a 24-hour clock without delimiters, type 2230.
Tip: If the default customization setting has not been changed, you can type N to display the current time.

Enter Dates
Depending on customization, you must enter dates in a specific format. Date formats are variations in the
order of month, day, and year and may or may not include delimiters. If you use delimiters, you can type one
or two digits for each month and day and two or four digits for the year. For example, if the format is
MonthMonth, DayDay, YearYearYearYear with a / delimiter, you can type 01/01/2006 or 1/1/06 to enter
January 1, 2006. You can also use the Calendar button to select a date. Check with your LabPro
administrator to determine the date format used at your site.
To enter a date
 In the Date box, type the date in the specified format, or click the Calendar button and double-click a
date on the calendar to select that date. On the calendar, you can also do any of the following as needed:
To Click this
Display the previous or next month

Display the previous or next year
Display the current month and day
Tip: If the customization setting has not been changed, you can enter the current date by typing T
instead of today’s date. You can also type a dash (-) and a number to display a previous date—for
example, type -1 for yesterday’s date or -2 for the day before yesterday’s date.
To enter a date range

 In To and From date boxes, type dates in the specified format, or type any of the following relative date
codes to quickly select a common date range.
To specify Type this relative date code
Today T
Yesterday Y
The current month CM
The previous month PM
The current quarter CQ
A quarter in the current year Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4
The current year CY
The previous year PY
The last 12 months (“Rolling 12”) R12
You can also:

 Combine relative date codes if the date specified in the From box is the same or earlier than the date
specified in the To box. For example, type From 1Q To 2Q to specify data from the first and second
quarter of the current year.
 Type a - (minus) with a code to specify an earlier day, month, quarter, or year. For example, type T-2
for two days ago, CM-3 for 3 months ago, and so on.
 Specify a single date by typing the From date only.

Operating and Maintaining a
WalkAway Instrument
The main components of the WalkAway System are the WalkAway instrument, the LabPro computer, a report
printer, and a bar code printer. This chapter provides general information about the WalkAway SI instrument
with references to earlier WalkAway-40/96 instrument models. Included are operation and maintenance
procedures, QC diagnostics, and troubleshooting charts for resolving instrument problems. “Appendix A:
WalkAway Instrument Components and Specifications” contains instrument specifications and component
information. For information about the WalkAway plus instrument, see the WalkAway plus Addendum that
was shipped with your instrument.
How the WalkAway Instrument Processes Panels

Before panels can be processed in the WalkAway instrument, you must:
 Transmit a panel order from a laboratory information system (LIS) to LabPro, or enter the order directly
in LabPro.
 Affix a bar code label to each panel.
 Inoculate the panels with microorganisms from a clinical specimen. For inoculation and setup
instructions, see the appropriate MicroScan Panel Procedural Manual.
 If your WalkAway instrument is not a WalkAway SI model or an upgraded instrument, manually dispense
oil into underlined wells.
 Load the panels into the WalkAway instrument.
The WalkAway instrument processes panels in the following manner:
 If appropriate, the instrument dispenses oil into underlined panel wells.
 The instrument incubates the panels at 35° C for 2 to 42 hours, depending on the panel type, organism
type, and processing results.
 The instrument reads each panel between 20 minutes and 3 hours after loading, depending on the panel
type. This initial reading is used as a reference point to which the later readings are compared.
 At the scheduled time and depending on the panel type, the instrument dispenses reagents into the
appropriate biochemical wells and incubates the panels for an additional time period—approximately 5 to
20 minutes, depending on the panel type.
 For Dried Overnight and Rapid Chromogenic panels, the colorimetric system guides light from an
interference filter through optical fiber channels and then through the 96 wells of each panel. Light-
sensitive photodiodes detect the amount of light passed through each well and generate a corresponding
electronic signal for each well. The resident computer in the WalkAway instrument compares these signals
to stored control values and sends the data to LabPro for calculation and analysis.
9020-7569, Rev. A Operating and Maintaining a WalkAway Instrument  2-1

 For Rapid Fluorogenic panels, the fluorometric system reads the level of fluorescence in the 96 wells of
each panel. This system electrically quantifies the results and transmits the signals in the same manner as
the colorimetric system.
 Synergies plus panels combine fluorometric identification and colorimetric MIC testing to provide rapid
test results.
 To identify microorganisms, the WalkAway instrument measures a series of biochemicals designed for the
speciation of most medically significant bacteria. The panels contain identification media consisting of
substrates and/or growth inhibitors that, depending on the species of bacteria present, exhibit color
changes, increases in turbidity or changes in fluorescence after incubation.
 To identify minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) for a microorganism, the panel wells contain
specific concentrations of antimicrobics. The turbidity or fluorescence will be less or non-existent in wells
in which the antimicrobic has inhibited growth. The WalkAway instrument compares each test well
reading with a threshold value. This value is a fixed number representing a certain percentage of relative
absorbency or fluorescence that corresponds to clinically significant growth.
 As the WalkAway instrument processes panels, results are passed to LabPro for calculation and analysis.
You can monitor and edit these results and request various reports on the findings. LabPro also displays
any instrument errors, panel processing problems, or exceptions.
WARNING
The used panels are a biohazard. Dispose of used panels as indicated in the panel procedure manual. Use
your laboratory’s safe biohazard waste disposal procedures—including any personal protective
equipment—for contact with and disposal of these materials.
Operating the WalkAway Instrument

Operating the WalkAway instrument requires close coordination with LabPro. From initial instrument startup,
you must interact with the WalkAway instrument via LabPro to perform such functions as maintenance,
loading and unloading panels, and monitoring panel processing. For details on loading and unloading
procedures and panel processing, see Chapter 7.
Power Switch
The power switch is on the front of the instrument, below the front control panel. The indicator light turns
green when the power switch is on.
Status Display and Control Panel Buttons

The instrument status display provides information such as the time, temperature, dispense pressure, the tower
number that is accessible from the panel access door, and messages such as a specific jam.
2-2  Operating and Maintaining a WalkAway Instrument 9020-7569, Rev. A

The front control panel contains the following control panel buttons below the status display:
Tower Rotation Rotates the carousel to the next tower in a clockwise direction—for example,
Forward Tower 1, Tower 2, Tower 3.
Alarm Turnoff Turns off the instrument alarm.
Quick Access Unlocks the instrument doors for three minutes to load or unload panels. When
(WalkAway SI pressed again, it locks the doors.
only)
Tower Rotation Rotates the carousel to the previous tower in a counterclockwise direction—for
Reverse example, Tower 8, Tower 7, Tower 6.
For a list of control panel messages and corrective actions, see “WalkAway Instrument Display Messages.”

Access Doors
The WalkAway instrument has three controlled access doors:
 The panel access door provides access to the instrument towers for loading and unloading panels. The
door opening allows access to one tower at a time. You can load panels into the tower that faces the panel
access door. If you want to load panels into more than one tower, you can rotate the towers.
 The service hatch provides access to the interior of the WalkAway instrument for maintenance and
troubleshooting tasks.
 The reagent dispense door provides access to the reagent dispense head, waste funnel, waste bag.
WalkAway SI and upgraded WalkAway instruments also include an automated oil dispense system.
These doors are equipped with sensors and locks to avoid injury to the operator and prevent opening during
scheduled events occurring in the WalkAway instrument.
You must request access to the instrument via the Quick Access button on the control panel (WalkAway SI
instrument only) or via LabPro, depending on the function to be performed.
A fourth access door, the reagent bottle door, is not locked. When removing a reagent bottle, however, you
should request maintenance access to the instrument to ensure that the system is not pressurized.
Observe Safety Precautions

Follow these important precautions and warnings while operating the WalkAway instrument.
Before you Do this
Plug in the WalkAway instrument Make sure the instrument has been turned off.
main power cord and associated
Note: Always connect the WalkAway instrument and
equipment
associated equipment to a 3-wire grounded receptacle of
the same voltage and current rating specified on the data
plate on the back of the instrument.
Attempt to open the service hatch Make sure the top of the instrument is clear. Failure to do
so may cause damage to the instrument.
Attempt to close the service hatch Take hold of the service hatch door, using the recessed
handle on the lower-right side of the door. Keep your other
hand clear of the door. Close the door slowly.
Restart the WalkAway instrument Wait at least 10 to 15 seconds. Failure to do so may cause
after shut down startup errors.
Handle any electronic component Shut down the instrument and disconnect the power cord
in the WalkAway instrument from the wall to eliminate the risk of a severe shock and
to protect the system electronics.
Ground yourself by touching something metal in the
WalkAway instrument prior to handling electrical
components.

Before you Do this
Shut down the LabPro computer Exit the Command Center and Windows properly to
prevent data corruption.
Continue to work after a power If a power failure occurs, turn off the power switch on the
failure instrument and all LabPro components immediately. After
power is restored, start up the components. If the power
failed for an extended time, let the instrument warm up for
one hour before processing panels.
Start Up the WalkAway Instrument

When you turn on the WalkAway instrument, the instrument status display scrolls through several messages
regarding the loading and execution of WalkAway programs. After the messages appear, the status display
shows the time and temperature.
CAUTION
It is recommended that you let the instrument warm up for at least 1 hour before processing panels.
1. Press the power switch on the front panel of the WalkAway instrument. When power comes on, the power
indicator light turns green.
2. Turn on the LabPro computer and monitor.
 When the Windows Desktop appears, click the LabPro Command Center icon on the Desktop. The
Command Center appears.
3. Verify the time displayed on the right of the Windows taskbar is correct. To adjust the time or date,
double-click the time display.
4. Turn on the report printer. For paper loading instructions, see your printer manual.
5. Turn on the bar code printer. For label loading instructions, see your bar code printer manual.
6. Perform the necessary instrument maintenance.
Shut Down the WalkAway Instrument

1. Make sure the WalkAway instrument is not currently reading panels or adding reagents to panels. Listen
for the usual sounds that accompany these processes.
2. Press the power switch on the front of the instrument.
When the power goes off, the green indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
If you are shutting down the WalkAway instrument briefly, wait at least 10 to 15 seconds before starting
up the instrument again.

Maintaining the WalkAway Instrument
The following checklists organize WalkAway instrument maintenance into daily and periodic tasks. The
procedures for these tasks are provided in the remaining sections of this chapter.
Tip: The maintenance procedures in this guide are also available for quick reference in LabPro. On the
Command Center, click Help.
Daily Maintenance
1 Print WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report.
2 Check instrument temperature.
3 Check water reservoir and fill if necessary.
4 Check reagent levels and replace or refill bottles if necessary.
5 Check reagent-dispense pressure and purge dispense lines if necessary.

6 Check reagent-dispense lines and clean dispense tips.
7 Clean reagent waste funnel.
8 Check waste reservoir level and replace bag if necessary.
9* Check oil line.
10* Check oil level and replace or refill oil bottle if necessary.
11* Purge oil line if necessary.
12 Clean reference disk and fluorometer shield.
13 Check photodiode shield and diffuser plate and clean if necessary.
Periodic Maintenance
1 Clean photodiode shield at least weekly.
2 Clean diffuser plate at least weekly.
3 Check and clean air intake filter at least monthly.
CAUTION
If your WalkAway instrument has been idle for an extended period—for example, no panels were processed
over the weekend—you must purge the oil line* to ensure that oil is properly dispensed into the first panel.
*Note: The following table summarizes key feature differences between the WalkAway SI and earlier models.
If your WalkAway instrument is not a WalkAway SI or an upgraded model, tasks 9 through 11 and the
preceding CAUTION do not apply.
Instrument Quick Access? Oil Dispense? Panel Detection System?

WalkAway SI Yes Automatic Yes
Upgraded WalkAway No Automatic Yes
WalkAway No Manual No

Printing the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report
The WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report provides internal diagnostics checks, a maintenance checklist,
colorimetric and fluorometric calibration values, and environmental status. The internal diagnostic checks
reflect the most recently available status, some are real time, and others are not. All information concerning
the colorimeter, fluorometer, and the environmental status listed on the lower half of the report are based on
the last instrument calibration performed. The report provides a result—OK or Failed—for each diagnostic
test and underlines any out-of-control calibration or environmental values. The panel detection and panel
preparation systems are functioning properly when the status is Enabled and not functioning properly when
the status is Disabled.
Note: The WalkAway instrument automatically calibrates at start up and prior to reading panels if it has not
calibrated in the previous hour. Other events may initiate calibration, including an emergency halt or a
colorimetric or fluorometric system failure. You can also shut down and start up the instrument to calibrate
during maintenance or troubleshooting.
The calibration values should remain fairly stable from day to day (10%). Fluctuations could indicate a dirty
shield or diffuser plate or a component failure.
Tip: Print a WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report at least daily to document the instrument was working
properly before evaluating patient specimens. For documentation purposes, write in the corrective measure
you performed for each failed result.
1. If you are reprinting the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report after troubleshooting the instrument, turn off
the instrument and then turn it on again to force calibration. This action will update the information on the
report.
2. If you have two configured WalkAway instruments, make sure the appropriate instrument is selected in
the WalkAway box on the WalkAway Monitor. If necessary, click the WalkAway arrow, and then click
the instrument name to select it
3. On the WalkAway Monitor, click Print, QC Diagnostics Report, and then Print. To view the report,
click Print Preview.
Note: Printing the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report does not force calibration to occur. The report
shows only the instrument status from the previous calibration.
4. Review the report. If the report identifies any problems, perform the appropriate maintenance and
corrective actions, calibrate the instrument, and reprint the report.
 For corrective action instructions, see “Troubleshooting WalkAway Instrument Problems.”
 To calibrate the WalkAway instrument, shut down the instrument, wait at least 15 seconds, and then
start up the instrument.
 When the instrument is shut down, the WalkAway Monitor displays Check status and a
communication error. When the instrument is restarted, the instrument status is Busy and all other
WalkAway Monitor functions are unavailable until the instrument has finished scanning the towers
and calibrating.
Note: Only the WalkAway SI and upgraded WalkAway instruments include the panel detect system, panel
preparation system, and references to the oil dispense system in the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report.

Maintaining the Proper Environment
This section describes how to monitor and maintain the instrument temperature and water level in the
reservoir.
Monitor the Temperature.

The WalkAway instrument displays the internal temperature on the control panel; however, you must also
check the temperature on the thermometer located on the top left corner of the instrument. The temperature
must be 35° C ±1° C. The temperatures displayed on the control panel and the external thermometer must
agree within ±0.5° C. Check the temperature each day but do not check the temperature during the
instrument’s stabilization times. The stabilization times are the first two hours after starting up the instrument
or closing the service hatch and the first 30 minutes after closing the panel access door
1. Check the temperature reading on the instrument control panel and on the external thermometer.
2. Depending on the temperature results, do the following:
 If the temperature is too high, ensure the ambient temperature is less than 85° F (30° C). If the
temperature is still too high, call the Customer Care Center immediately.
 If the temperature is too low, make sure the panel access door is closed for at least 30 minutes and
then check the temperature again. If the temperature is still too low, call the Customer Care Center.
 If agreement between the internal and external temperature readings is not within ±0.5° C, call the
Customer Care Center
Maintain the Water Level

The water reservoir, located on the right side of the WalkAway SI instrument, is an integral component of the
humidifier assembly. The reservoir holds approximately three liters of sterile deionized or sterile distilled
water. An alarm sounds if the water level drops below 500 ml. Check the water level in the reservoir every
day.
1. Make sure the water level in the reservoir is at or above the minimum line. An alarm sounds if the water
volume drops below 500 ml.
Note: This illustration shows the reservoir funnel door on a WalkAway SI instrument. The funnel door on
earlier WalkAway models may be placed in a different location.

2. If the level is low, flip out the reservoir funnel door and fill with sterile deionized or sterile distilled water
to the stop-fill indicator line. Pour the water slowly to avoid exceeding the stop-fill line, which may cause
water to overflow the top of the reservoir.
WARNING
Do not use regular tap water or saline solution to fill the water reservoir.
Requesting Access to the Instrument for Maintenance

This section describes how to request access to the WalkAway instrument for maintenance. If the instrument is
performing time-critical activities, LabPro does not grant access immediately. You can wait for access or
cancel the request. When access is granted, the instrument doors—panel access door, service hatch, and
reagent dispense door—unlock.
Before performing daily maintenance on the instrument, print the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report to
identify any special maintenance requirements.
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the Maintenance tab.
 If you have two configured WalkAway instruments, make sure to request access for the appropriate
instrument. If necessary, on the WalkAway Monitor, click the WalkAway arrow, and then click the
instrument name to select it.
2. In the Access area, click the number of minutes required for access—1, 5, 15, or 30—and then click
Access.
 If access is not granted, the instrument doors do not unlock and the LED light at the right of the panel
access door remains amber. The Access area displays a message and counts down the number of
minutes and seconds that you must wait for access. After the time counts down to zero, the instrument
doors unlock. If you decide not to wait, click Cancel or try a shorter time interval.
 If access is granted, the instrument doors unlock and the LED light at the right of the panel access
door turns green. The Access area displays a message and counts down the number of minutes and
seconds available for access. The WalkAway Monitor instrument status displays the message
Accessed.
3. When access is granted and the instrument doors unlock, open the appropriate instrument doors on the
WalkAway instrument.
WARNING
If you open the panel access door and the LED status lights next to the tower slots are flashing at a
very fast rate, the door sensor may have failed to detect that the door is open. Close all instrument
doors, turn off the instrument, wait 30 seconds, and then turn on the instrument again. If the lights are
still flashing when the panel door is open, contact the Customer Care Center.

4. When finished with maintenance, close and lock the doors to terminate access.
To lock the instrument doors, you may either press the Quick Access button on the front control panel
(WalkAway SI model only) or, on the WalkAway Monitor, click Lock Door, regardless of the method that
you used to open the doors.
Important:
 If you do not terminate access to the WalkAway instrument before the allotted time expires, the
WalkAway Monitor Access area displays the message ACCESS OVERTIME. Quickly close any opened
instrument doors, and then press the Quick Access button or click Lock Door to terminate access.
 If you terminate access without closing all instrument doors, the WalkAway Monitor Access area displays
a message indicating which door must be closed. Quickly close the instrument door, and then press the
Quick Access button or click Lock Door to terminate access
Maintaining the Reagent Dispense System

The reagent dispense system consists of the reagent bottles, reagent bottle adapters, solenoids, dispense lines
and tips, waste funnel, and waste bag. It is recommended that all of the reagent dispense maintenance
procedures be performed in sequence every day. You do not have to request maintenance access to check
reagent levels.
WARNING
Always wear protective eyewear, gloves, and laboratory coat when handling reagents and the reagent
dispense system.
Clean up any reagent spills in accordance with the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and
local/state/federal waste guidelines.
Check Reagent Levels

1. Open the reagent bottle doors and locate the reagent bottles.
Depending on the panel types used in your laboratory, some of the ten reagent bottles may not be used.
Any unused bottles must remain in position to maintain sufficient dispense pressure.
2. Make sure each bottle used has at least ¾ inch of reagent. This should be enough reagent to last until the
next daily maintenance check.
 If a bottle has less than ¾ inch of reagent remaining, the reagent volume has dropped below the top of
the T-fitting, or any precipitate appears at the bottom of a bottle, replace or refill the bottle as
described in the following procedure.
 If a bottle is empty and the attached reagent line leading into the bottle contains air bubbles, refill or
replace the reagent bottle, and then manually purge the dispense line. For instructions on manually
purging the lines, see “Purge the Reagent Dispense Lines.”
 If the bottle has a sufficient amount of reagent, complete the remaining tasks for maintaining the
reagent dispense system.

Add Reagents
1. Make sure maintenance access is granted as described earlier in this chapter.
WARNING
Make sure the reagent-dispense pressure is 0.0 PSI. If the dispense system is pressurized, on the
WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, click Depressurize dispense system. If this button is not
available, click Pressurize dispense system, and then click Depressurize dispense system.
2. Open the reagent bottle door and unscrew—counterclockwise—the reagent bottle to be replaced or
refilled.
3. Refill or replace the reagent bottle.
Important: When refilling a bottle, do not fill above the shoulder of the bottle.
4. Clean any residue from the threaded area of the bottle and make sure the area is dry along the top edge.
CAUTION
Bottles installed with wet tops may unscrew partially and cause a loss of dispense pressure.
5. Clean the bottle adapter threads and O-ring using a wet (water) swab, and dry them thoroughly. Use care
not to bend the tubing.
O-ring
Adapter threads
6. Tighten the new bottle onto the adapter using the two-finger rule—that is, apply moderate pressure with
thumb and forefinger only.
WARNING
The reagent must be attached to the correctly labeled adapter. Do not over-tighten bottles. Over-
tightening reagent bottles can compress bottle seals and damage reagent manifolds.

7. Refill or replace any other bottles as required and ensure that all bottles are securely in place. To ensure
that there are no pressure leaks in the reagent dispense system, see “Check the Reagent Dispense
Pressure.”
Important: Reagent lot numbers appear on the QC Panel Report. If you replace or refill a reagent bottle
with reagent from a new lot number, update the lot number records as described in the following
procedure.
To update reagent lot numbers

1. On the WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, in the Reagents area, type the new lot number in the Lot
Number box to the right of the reagent name.
LabPro saves the lot number when the pointer leaves the box—for example, if you press Tab to enter
another reagent lot number.
2. Repeat this procedure for each new reagent lot number.
Check the Reagent Dispense Pressure

2. On the WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, click Pressurize dispense system.
3. Check the pressure in the Dispense Pressure area. The PSI must be within the 2.8 to 3.2 range. If the
PSI is outside this range, see Dispense pressure out of range in “WalkAway Instrument Display
Messages.”
Tip: If the dispense pressure is below this range, make sure all the reagent bottles are finger-tightened
and then recheck the pressure.
4. Continue to the next maintenance task.
 If you are finished with maintenance, press the Quick Access button or, on the WalkAway Monitor,
click Lock Door to terminate access.
Purge the Reagent Dispense Lines

Important: Remember that reagents need to be purged only if the reagent bottles have been allowed to run
dry and there are air bubbles in the dispense lines.
2. Make sure the reagent dispense system is pressurized. If not, click Pressurize dispense system, and
then confirm that the pressure is between 2.8 and 3.2 PSI. If the PSI is outside this range, see Dispense
pressure out of range in “WalkAway Instrument Display Messages.”
3. Select the appropriate reagents to purge.
4. Click Purge selected reagents.
5. When the purge process is complete, click Depressurize dispense system.
click Lock Door to terminate access

Check the Reagent Dispense Lines and Cleaning Dispense Tips
2. Open the reagent dispense door and remove the reagent dispense compartment cover.
3. Check the dispense lines and the base of the solenoids for leaks.
Note: At this time, you may want to replace the reagent dispense compartment cover if it does not hinder
your movements as you complete reagent dispense system maintenance.
4. Lift the dispense head from the waste funnel and examine the dispense head for crystallization.
5. Wash the plastic dispense tips on the dispense head using a squirt bottle filled with 95 percent ethyl
alcohol, an alcohol wipe, or a cotton-tipped applicator moistened with alcohol. Use an applicator stick to
loosen debris between the dispense tips and rinse well with alcohol.
6. When the dispense head is clean, inspect it to ensure that the reagent dispense tips extend approximately
1/8 inch beyond the dispense head. Push the lines through the dispense head to extend the dispense tips if
necessary.
7. Keep the reagent dispense door open and the dispense head removed from the waste funnel, and continue
to the next procedure for cleaning the reagent waste funnel.
Clean the Reagent Waste Funnel

1. After you have cleaned the dispense tips, examine the waste funnel for residue or crystallization.
2. Clean the waste funnel using 95 percent ethyl alcohol. Take care not to get alcohol into the alignment
hole. Remove the funnel for cleaning if necessary.
3. Reseat the dispense head firmly into the waste funnel, making sure the alignment pin is seated in the
alignment hole on top of the waste funnel.
4. Keep the reagent dispense door open and continue to the next procedure for replacing the reagent waste
bag.

Replace the Reagent Waste Bag
WARNING
Wear a laboratory coat, gloves, and protective eye wear to remove the reagent waste bag. Though not a
biologic hazard, the contents of this bag are caustic and must be disposed of according to local
regulations.
1. After you clean the waste funnel, examine the waste bag.
2. Dispose of the bag when the fluid level reaches the Max Fill line. Do not let it overfill.
3. Install a new reagent waste bag if necessary.
4. Keep the reagent dispense door open and continue to the next procedure for maintaining the oil dispense
system.
 If you are finished with maintenance, replace the reagent dispense compartment cover if applicable.
Close the reagent dispense door and press the Quick Access button or, on the WalkAway Monitor,
click Lock Door to lock the door and terminate access.
CAUTION
Before closing the reagent dispense door, make sure to replace the reagent dispense compartment
cover. Without this cover, excessive light will enter the instrument, interfering with the fluorometer.
Maintaining the Oil Dispense System

The oil dispense system consists of the oil bottle, bottle bracket, oil line, and oil syringe assembly. It is
recommended that the oil level and dispense line be checked daily. Refill or replace the oil bottle when the oil
level is at or below the oil indicator line.
Note: The WalkAway SI and upgraded WalkAway instruments contain the automated oil dispense system
described in this section. You must add oil to panels manually for earlier models of the WalkAway instrument.
Tip: You may perform maintenance tasks for the oil dispense system at the same time you check and clean
the reagent dispense system—you do not have to request separate maintenance access.
Check the Oil Dispense Line and Oil Syringe

2. Open the reagent dispense door and remove the reagent dispense compartment cover.
3. Check the oil line and the oil syringe assembly for leaks or air bubbles.
 If you observe any air bubbles after checking the oil level, purge the oil line as described later in this
section.
4. Replace the reagent dispense compartment cover, but keep the reagent dispense door open and continue to
the next procedure for checking the oil level.

CAUTION
Make sure to replace the reagent dispense compartment cover. Without this cover, excessive light will
enter the instrument, interfering with the fluorometer.
Check the Oil Level

1. After you check the oil line and oil syringe, examine the oil bottle.
2. Check the oil level on the bracket holding the oil bottle.
 If the oil level is above the oil indicator line, continue to the next maintenance task.
 If the oil level is at or below the indicator line, refill or replace the oil bottle and purge the oil line as
described later in this section.
Note: When the oil level is at the indicator line, approximately 50 ml of oil remains in the bottle.
If you are finished with maintenance, close the reagent dispense door and press the Quick Access button
or, on the WalkAway Monitor, click Lock Door to lock the door and terminate access.
Add Oil
WARNING
Clean up any oil spills with absorbent material and dispose of in accordance with the Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) and local/state/federal waste guidelines.

1. After you check the oil level and determine that more oil is needed, grasp the upper section of the quick-
disconnect mechanism on top of the oil bottle cap and turn counterclockwise to release. The oil line
remains attached to the upper section of the quick-disconnect mechanism.
2. Remove the oil bottle from the bracket.

3. Unscrew and remove the bottle cap assembly from the oil bottle. The straw remains attached to the cap.
4. Refill or replace the oil bottle.
 To refill the bottle, pour MicroScan oil into the bottle and replace the bottle cap assembly onto the
bottle.
 To replace the bottle, replace the cap of the new MicroScan oil bottle with the bottle cap assembly
from the old bottle.
Important: You must use MicroScan mineral oil (B1010-40A). Use of other types of mineral oil may
adversely affect the performance of your instrument and panels.
5. Replace the oil bottle into the bracket.
6. Lock the upper section of the quick-disconnect mechanism—with the attached tubing—to the lower
section on the bottle cap by turning clockwise until it snaps into place.
7. Continue to the next procedure for purging the oil line.
Purge the Oil Line

Follow this procedure after adding oil or if air bubbles appear in the oil line or oil syringe assembly.
CAUTION
If your WalkAway instrument has been idle for an extended period—for example, no panels were processed
over the weekend—you must purge the oil line to ensure that oil is properly dispensed into the first panel.

2. On the Maintenance tab, click Purge oil. While the instrument is purging the oil line—approximately 1½
minutes—LabPro displays the hourglass symbol.
click Lock Door to terminate access.

Maintaining the Reference Disk and Shields
The reference disk and shields are integral parts of the WalkAway instrument’s optical systems. These parts
require careful handling to ensure the instrument reads panels correctly.
It is recommended you perform the following tasks in sequence:
 Remove the front tower.
 Clean the reference disk and fluorometer shield daily.
 Check the photodiode shield and diffuser plate daily and clean weekly or as needed.
After you clean the fluorometer shield, you can check and clean the photodiode shield and diffuser plate
without requesting separate maintenance access.
Reference Disk
Fluorometer
Photodiode Shield
Diffuser Plate Fluorometer

Shield
Tip: If your lab does not process fluorogenic panels in the WalkAway instrument, you can disable the
fluorometer. Disabling the fluorometer eliminates the need to perform daily maintenance on the reference disk
and fluorometer shield.
Remove the Front Tower

Remove the front tower of the WalkAway instrument—that is, the tower facing the panel access door—to
provide adequate space for you to access the reference disk and shields.
WARNING
Before you open the service hatch, make sure the top of the instrument is clear. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the WalkAway instrument.

2. Open the service hatch.
3. Completely loosen the saw-tooth hold-down wheel securing the tower to the carousel.
4. Lift the front tower up and out of the instrument.
5. Close the service hatch, and continue to the next procedure to clean the reference disk.
Tip: If all the towers are not routinely used to process panels, you can permanently remove one tower to
facilitate cleaning the shields and reference disk. Then, after maintenance access is granted, press the
Tower Rotation Forward or Tower Rotation Reverse button on the front control panel to position the
empty carousel slot behind the panel access door.
Clean the Reference Disk

CAUTION
Cleaning the reference disk between readings may affect results. If possible, clean the reference disk after
the panels are completed or before the initial read.
1. After removing the front tower, make sure all instrument doors are closed.

2. On the WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, click Position instrument for reference cleaning. The
doors lock and the instrument positions the read head and grabber plate for easy access to the reference
disk.
3. When the doors unlock, open the service hatch and locate the reference disk. The reference disk is a glass
disk recessed into the grabber plate, toward the rear on the left side.
Reference disk
4. Clean only the top of the disk using a cotton-tipped applicator wrapped in lens paper and dipped in lens
cleaner. Lightly rub the surface of the disk in a circular motion.
5. Immediately dry the disk surface using a dry cotton-tipped applicator wrapped in lens paper.
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol to clean the reference disk. Do not allow lens cleaner to dry on the disk. Always
wipe the disk surface dry.
6. Close the service hatch. Continue to the next procedure to clean the fluorometer shield.
 If you are finished with maintenance, replace the front tower, close the service hatch, and press the
Quick Access button or, on the WalkAway Monitor, click Lock Door to lock the doors and terminate
access.
Clean the Fluorometer Shield

1. With the front tower removed, make sure all instrument doors are closed.
2. On the WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, click Position instrument for shield cleaning. The doors
lock and the instrument positions the read head for easy access to the shields.
3. When the doors unlock, open the service hatch and locate the fluorometer shield on the fluorometer.
4. Grasp the right bottom tab on the fluorometer shield and pull gently until it fully withdraws. Note that the
end of the shield curves upward—remember this position when you are ready to reinstall the shield.

5. Clean both sides of the shield using lens cleaner and lens paper only.
6. Make sure the shield is completely dry.
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol to clean the fluorometer shield. Do not allow lens cleaner to dry on the shield.
Always wipe the shield surface dry.
Make sure you reinstall the fluorometer shield correctly or the instrument will misread fluorescent
panels.
7. Replace the fluorometer shield in its original position and make sure it clicks into place.
8. Keep the service hatch open and continue to the next procedure to check and clean the photodiode shield.
access.
Check and Clean the Photodiode Shield

Tip: If you have just cleaned the fluorometer shield, go directly to step 3 to check and clean the photodiode
shield. You do not have to request separate maintenance access.
CAUTION
Cleaning the photodiode shield between readings may affect results. If possible, clean the photodiode
shield after the panels are completed or before the initial read. Handle the shield only by the edges.
2. On the WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, click Position instrument for shield cleaning. When the
doors unlock, open the service hatch.
3. Locate the photodiode shield. This acrylic plate is located beneath the photodiodes.
 If you are performing a daily check of the shield, you can visually inspect the shield without
removing it. To remove lint or dust, wipe the lower surface using dry lens paper or lint-free tissue.

 If you are performing a weekly check of the shield, remove it for cleaning as explained in the
following steps.
4. Rotate the right side of the shield forward and slide the shield to the right to remove it.
5. Clean the shield using lens paper. If more extensive cleaning is required, also use a lens cleaner, a mild
solution of non-abrasive soap and water, or alcohol.
Tip: Minor scratches on the shield surface will have little or no effect on instrument performance. If large
scratches or other obstructions occur, however, the photodiode shield must be replaced.
6. Make sure the shield is completely dry and place it back into the instrument.
7. Keep the service hatch open and continue to the next procedure to check and clean the diffuser plate.
access.
Check and Clean the Diffuser Plate

Tip: If you have just cleaned the photodiode shield, go directly to step 3 to clean the diffuser plate. You do
not have to request separate maintenance access.
2. On the WalkAway Monitor Maintenance tab, click Position instrument for shield cleaning. When the
doors unlock, open the service hatch.
3. Locate the diffuser plate above the fiber optic ends.
Label on Diffuser Plate
 If you are performing a daily check of the diffuser plate, you can visually inspect the plate without
removing it. To remove lint or dust, wipe the surface using dry lens paper or lint-free tissue.
 If you are performing a weekly check of the diffuser plate, remove the plate for cleaning as explained
in the following steps.
4. Slide the plate forward until it releases from the block.
5. Clean the plate using lens paper. If more extensive cleaning is required, also use a lens cleaner, a mild
solution of non-abrasive soap and water, or alcohol.
6. Make sure the plate is completely dry.
7. With the frosted side down and the label inscription facing up, place the diffuser plate back into the
instrument. The labeled side must face the front of the instrument and extend beyond the read station.

 If you are finished with maintenance, replace the tower, close the service hatch, and press the Quick
Access button or, on the WalkAway Monitor, click Lock Door to lock the doors and terminate
access.
Checking and Cleaning the Air Intake Filter

To keep the air filter clean and in good condition, clean the air filter at least once a month. Maintenance
access is not required to check and clean the air filter.
1. Locate the air filter cover on the lower-right front of the instrument. Grasp the filter cover and pull it out
and away from the front of the instrument.
2. Examine the filter for discoloration by holding the filter in front of a light.
 If the filter is dirty—that is, not transparent—clean it using hot water and mild detergent. Force the
water through the filter in the opposite direction that air flows across the filter when it is installed.
Check the airflow indicator arrows on the sides of the filter for the direction of airflow. Pat the filter
dry.
 After the filter has dried thoroughly, insert it in its original position. The airflow arrows around the
perimeter of the filter must point toward the instrument.
 If the filter appears clogged, order a new filter and then replace the old filter.
3. Replace the filter cover.

Troubleshooting WalkAway Instrument Problems
The WalkAway instrument is considered down if you are unable to process panels or print reports. The
Customer Care Center gives these calls the highest priority. The following charts are provided to assist you
with troubleshooting instrument problems. To resolve panel processing alerts and exception messages, see
“Resolving Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages.”
QC Diagnostic Troubleshooting for the WalkAway Instrument

The following table contains instrument diagnostics results that may appear on the WalkAway QC
Diagnostics Report.
Message/problem Possible cause Solution

Ambient The ambient temperature 1. Determine if an outside variable, such as a
temperature is should be less than 85° F heat vent near the instrument, may be
underlined under (30° C). causing the problem.
Environmental
2. To force calibration, shut down the
Status
WalkAway instrument, wait 15 seconds, and
then start up the instrument.
3. Print the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report
and confirm that the problem is resolved.
If the problem persists, call the Customer Care
Center.
Calibration values  Something is blocking the 1. Clean the photodiode shield and diffuser
are underlined light pathway. plate.
under Colorimetric  The light source failed. 2. To force calibration, shut down the
Calibration, Color
 The photosensor A/D WalkAway instrument, wait 15 seconds, and
Lamp Voltage,
board failed. then start up the instrument.
and/or A/D System
Calibration 3. Print the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report
Center.
Dispenser failed The instrument is unable to 1. Tighten any loose reagent bottles.
build up sufficient pressure to
2. Pressurize the instrument using the
dispense the reagents due to
Maintenance tab on the WalkAway Monitor,
the following:
and check the dispense pressure.
 Loose reagent bottles
 Compressor failure Center.

Fluorometric  The light source may be 1. Verify the following:
System failed burned out.
 If the instrument has been shut down for
or  The shield or reference more than 2 hours, allow the instrument
disk is dirty. to warm up at least 30 minutes.
Fluorometric
Calibration values  The instrument  If the service hatch has been open for an
are underlined temperature is too low. extended period, allow 30 minutes for the
instrument to equilibrate.
2. Clean the reference disk and fluorometer
shield.
Center.
Humidity is The humidity should be 1. Add sterile deionized or sterile distilled water
underlined under within the RH range as to the water reservoir.
Environmental follows:
2. Allow the instrument to equilibrate for 30
Status
 25% to 70% for WalkAway minutes.
SI instrument.
 40% to 70% for earlier WalkAway instrument, wait 15 seconds, and
WalkAway models. then start up the instrument.
The instrument may need 4. Print the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report
water in the reservoir. and confirm that the problem is resolved.
Center.
Internal temperature The card cage is overheated. Turn off WalkAway instrument and call the
is underlined under Customer Care Center immediately
Environmental
Status
Light Source failed  The colorimetric system 1. Clean the photodiode shield and diffuser
failed because: plate.
or
 The lamp failed. 2. To force calibration, shut down the
A/D Photo Board
failed  Something is blocking the
light pathway.
and confirm the problem is resolved.
Center for help in replacing the lamp.
TIP: If all colorimetric calibration values are
underlined, a lamp failure has likely occurred.
Motor Movements Unrecoverable motor Call the Customer Care Center.
movement failure.

Panel Detect A self-diagnostic test Call the Customer Care Center.
System disabled indicates the sensor is out of
alignment. This can happen
while performing shield
maintenance if you
accidentally hit the sensor.
Panel Preparation Call the Customer Care Center.
System disabled
Processor Check Failures on the main CPU Shut down the WalkAway instrument, wait 15
failed, or have occurred during the seconds, and then start up.
WalkAway instrument start
PROM Checksum If the problem persists, call the Customer Care
up.
failed, or Center.
RAM Memory
Check failed
Temperature failed The WalkAway clock starts: Ensure that the ambient temperature is less
than 81° F (27° C).
 60 minutes after the
instrument is started up. If the problem persists, call the Customer Care
 60 minutes after the Center immediately.
service hatch is closed.
 15 minutes after other
doors are closed.
The internal temperature was
out of range for 10 minutes
after the WalkAway clock
started.
Temperature is The temperature is not 35° C 1. Verify the following:
underlined under ±1° C.
Environmental  If the WalkAway instrument has been
Status shut down for more than 2 hours, allow
the system to warm up at least 30
minutes.
 If the service hatch has been open for an
extended period, allow 30 minutes for the
Center.
WalkAway Instrument Display Messages

The following table contains WalkAway instrument control panel messages, listed in alphabetical order

Access Overtime The amount of time 1. Finish your activities in the WalkAway
Please Hurry requested for instrument.
loading/unloading access
2. Close the door and press the Quick Access
expired.
button on front control panel, or click Lock
Door on the WalkAway Monitor, to lock the
door and terminate access.
Access will be The amount of time Press the Quick Access button on front control
cancelled soon requested for access expired panel, or click Lock Door on the WalkAway
and the door has been Monitor, to lock the door and terminate access.
closed for one minute but not
locked.
Check colorimetric Dirty photodiode shield 1. Clean the photodiode shield and diffuser
system and/or diffuser plate or the plate.
lamp failed during a
colorimetric reading.
If the message continues or underlined values
persist on the WalkAway QC Diagnostics
Report, call the Customer Care Center.
Check fluorometric Dirty reference disk and/or 1. Verify the following:
system fluorometer shield or the
fluorometer lamp failed.  If the instrument has been shut down for
more than 2 hours, allow the instrument
to warm up at least 30 minutes.
 If the service hatch has been open for an
extended period, allow 30 minutes for the
2. Clean the reference disk and fluorometer
shield.
If the message continues or underlined values
persist on the WalkAway QC Diagnostics
Report, call the Customer Care Center.

Color wheel jam The color wheel failed to 1. Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
rotate when rotating through WalkAway Monitor.
the interference filters.
2. If the jam persists shut down the instrument
for 30 seconds and then start up the
instrument.
3. If the jam still occurs, call the Customer Care
Center.
Do not attempt to fix a color wheel jam. Call the
Customer Care Center for help.
Dispense head lost The instrument is unable to 1. Follow the resolution instructions on the
find the dispense head. It is WalkAway Monitor.
not located on the
2. Verify that the alignment pin for the dispense
fluorometer or in the waste
head is properly seated in the alignment
funnel.
hole in the waste funnel. If the dispense
The dispense head was not head is loose, reseat it in the waste funnel.
seated properly on the waste
3. If the problem persists, shut down the
funnel after maintenance was
instrument for 30 seconds and then start up
performed.
the instrument.
If the problem still occurs, call the Customer
Care Center.
Dispense pressure Possible leak and pressure is WARNING
out of range too low. (Pressure range
When troubleshooting the reagent dispense
should be within 2.8 to 3.2
system, always wear full protective gear
PSI.) The instrument cannot
(goggles, lab coat and gloves).
come up to pressure during
reagent dispense. Correct the problem as soon as possible after
seeing this message. During the first five
During the first five minutes
minutes, the instrument grants maintenance
after this message appears,
access to correct the problem as follows:
the instrument waits for the
condition to be corrected. 1. If the Peptidase reagent was just replaced,
unscrew the bottle and clean the bottle
Note: If you do not correct
threads and bottle adapter with alcohol.
the problem, all panels that
require reagents are 2. Verify that all bottles are screwed on tightly
completed without reagents. (use 2-finger tighten rule).
These panels appear on the
Exception Status tab on the 3. Pressurize the reagents to check the
WalkAway Monitor with the pressure.
message Dispense failed. 4. Determine the location of the pressure leak
by clamping off the air inlet to each bottle,
one bottle at a time. The air inlet is the clear
plastic tubing that attaches to the top of each
reagent bottle adapter. After a few seconds,
watch the WalkAway Monitor for an increase
in pressure. If the pressure increases, the
clamped reagent bottle is creating the
pressure leak. Verify that all bottles are
screwed on tightly. (continued)

5. After the bottle is isolated:
 Replace the reagent bottle with a new
bottle.
 Check for a cracked or deteriorated
reagent O-ring. If an O-ring is cracked or
deteriorated, call the Customer Care
Center.
 Check for a cracked bottle adapter. If a
bottle adapter is cracked, call the
Customer Care Center.
If the pressure leak still cannot be isolated, call
the Customer Care Center.
Incubator The temperature is too high Take a manual temperature reading. The
temperature too or too low for at least 10 temperature range should be 35° C ±1° C.
high or too low minutes.
Center.
Main carousel jam The carousel that holds the 1. Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
panel towers failed to move. WalkAway Monitor and try to clear the jam.
A tower may be installed
2. Verify that a tower was not installed
backward.
backward.
If the jam persists, shut down the instrument for
30 seconds, verify the movement of the
carousel, and then start up the instrument.
WARNING
After you shut down the instrument, if you hear
a grinding sound when you manually move the
carousel, call the Customer Care Center
immediately. Do not turn the instrument back
on.
Panel grabber jam The grabber plate failed. A 1. Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
jam may occur when the WalkAway Monitor.
instrument attempts to
WARNING
remove or replace a panel.
Typical causes for jams. Shut down the instrument before manually
moving the panel grabber belt.
 Too much mineral oil
(more than 3 drops)—or 2. Remove any panels stuck in the read head,
oil inadvertently dropped using the panel grabber belt located behind
onto the panel surface— the read head assembly. If the panel
causes the tray lid to seal grabber plate is wedged between the panel
with the top of the tray. and the tray lid in the tower, carefully
The instrument is then remove the tower if possible or back out the
unable to pick up the panel grabber plate using the panel grabber
panel, but “thinks” it has. belt.

When the instrument tries 3. If the panel is not damaged, reinsert the
to replace the panel, it panel into the tower.
jams into a panel still in
the tower.  If the panel processing time is not in
overtime, the panel will be processed
Note: This can occur on normally.
earlier WalkAway
instruments without the  If the panel is in overtime, the instrument
panel detection system. will abort the panel. This action will be
noted on the Exception Status tab on
 The panel does not have the WalkAway Monitor as Aborted
a tray lid, has a damaged Overtime.
lid, or has two or more
tray lids. If the jam persists, call the Customer Care
Center.
 The panel is stuck in the
tower slot, the tray lid
does not sit flat on panel
when inserted into the
tower, or the tray lid tabs
have broken.
 The bar code label
extends above the panel
edge and becomes stuck
under the lid. The
instrument cannot pick up
the panel but “thinks” it
has. When replacing the
panel, the instrument jams
into a panel still in the
tower.
 The fluorometer shield is
inserted upside down
(curved end of shield
faces downward).
Please close the The panel access door, Make sure all controlled doors are closed.
door service hatch, or reagent
If the message persists, call the Customer Care
dispense door was open
Center.
longer than scheduled or was
open when trying to advance
the carousel.
Transverse axis jam The transverse axis motor 1. Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
failed. WalkAway Monitor and try to clear the jam.
The axis resides on the read 2. Verify that the fluorometer is centered on the
head and supports side-to- transverse axis. If not, move the fluorometer
side movement. The motor to the center.
controls the fluorometer and
dispense head.
30 seconds and then start up the instrument.
If the jam still occurs, call the Customer Care
Center.

Unable to pick up The reagent dispense head Panels that require reagents are completed
dispense head is not seated properly in the without reagents and appear on the Exception
waste funnel. The instrument Status tab on the WalkAway Monitor with the
was unable to pick up the message Dispense Failed. The results must be
dispense head when verified.
attempting to add reagents.
1. Follow the resolution instructions on the
WalkAway Monitor.
2. Verify that the dispense head alignment pin
is properly seated in the alignment hole in
the waste funnel. If the dispense head is
loose, reseat it in the waste funnel.
If the problem persists, shut down the
instrument for 30 seconds and then start up the
instrument.
Care Center.
Unable to replace After adding reagents to a 1. Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
dispense head panel, the instrument was WalkAway Monitor.
unable to replace the
2. Verify that the alignment pin for the dispense
dispense head in the waste
head is properly seated in the alignment
funnel.
hole in the waste funnel. If the dispense
head is loose, reseat it in the waste funnel.
If the problem persists, shut down the
instrument for 30 seconds and then start up the
instrument.
Care Center.
Vertical axis jam The read head assembly 1. Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
jammed as it traveled up and WalkAway Monitor and try to clear the jam.
down in the center of the
2. Verify that nothing impedes the vertical
carousel.
movement—for example, the fluorometer
shield dropped to the bottom of the
instrument.
30 seconds and then start up the instrument.
If the jam still occurs, call the Customer Care
Center.
Water level low The water in the reservoir is Add sterile deionized or sterile distilled water to
too low. the reservoir. .

General WalkAway Instrument Problems
This table covers basic instrument problems.
Problem Possible cause Solution

All LED status lights The WalkAway instrument 1. Close the panel access door.
next to tower slots cannot determine the status of
flash rapidly when the slots—empty, completed, 2. Shut down the instrument for 30 seconds
panel access door is or in process. The problem can and then start up the instrument again to
open. occur if: force a bar code scan.
 The panel access door If the problem persists, call the Customer Care
sensor has failed. Center.
 The instrument does not

recognize that the door is
open, for any reason.
 The instrument does not
recognize which tower
faces the panel access
door.
Jams Jam messages indicate that a The instrument displays the type of jam—for
mechanical failure occurred example, Panel grabber jam. See the corrective
while the instrument was in action for each particular jam in “WalkAway
motion. Instrument Display Messages.”
Basic jam resolution includes the following
steps:
1. Determine the type of jam. A message
appears on the instrument status display.
Follow the jam resolution instructions on the
WalkAway Monitor.
2. Open the service hatch to determine the
location of the read head assembly. It may
be necessary to remove the front tower.
3. If the read head assembly is down in the
reagent system area, determine if the
reagent dispense head is attached to the
fluorometer.
CAUTION
Do not open the reagent dispense door if the
reagent dispense head is attached to the
fluorometer because the reagent dispense
lines may be pulled loose.
4. If necessary, detach the reagent dispense
head and reseat it in the waste funnel.
(continued)

5. If possible, determine the cause of the jam
and resolve the problem.
WARNING
Always shut down the instrument before
moving the panel grabber belt.
6. Remove any panels that may be jammed in
the read head assembly. To do this, move
the panel grabber assembly belt located
behind the read head assembly.
Panel spill in  The panel may not have Decontaminate the instrument as follows:
WalkAway been seated correctly.
1. Shut down and unplug the instrument, and
instrument tower  The panel handling exit from LabPro.
or assembly is out of
alignment. 2. Open the service hatch.
Rough panel
3. Remove any incomplete overnight panels
handling
from the WalkAway and place in an
incubator.
4. Completely loosen the hold-down wheel of
the tower at the front of the carousel, and lift
the tower up and out of the instrument.
5. Pull any available tower toward you gently to
rotate the carousel. When the next tower
has adequate clearance for safe removal,
repeat the tower removal process, and
continue until all towers are removed from
the instrument.
6. Autoclave the towers.
7. Wipe surfaces inside the instrument with 70
percent isopropyl alcohol.
CAUTION
Do not use amphyl/alcohol or chlorine
bleach to wipe surfaces as these products
can damage certain components such as
the optical system.
8. Allow the instrument to air dry with the
power off and the service hatch open.
9. When the instrument is completely dry,
replace the towers, close the service hatch,
plug in the instrument, turn on the power,
and allow the instrument to run for 30
minutes before proceeding with normal
operations.

Power failure Not applicable. 1. Shut down the WalkAway instrument and all
LabPro components immediately.
2. Wait for the power to restore before you start
up the components.
3. If the instrument has been shut down more
than 2 hours, let the instrument warm up for
at least 30 minutes and then calibrate.
LabPro Error Conditions for the WalkAway Instrument

The following table contains typical, instrument-related messages that may appear in LabPro. These messages
are displayed in the Error Conditions area on the WalkAway Monitor. Some of the messages also print on
the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report.

A/D photodiode The colorimetric system 1. Clean the photodiode shield and diffuser plate.
board has failed failed because:
2. To force calibration, shut down the WalkAway
or  The lamp failed. instrument, wait 15 seconds, and then start up
 Something is blocking the instrument.
Colorimetric lamp
failure the light pathway. 3. Print the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report and
confirm that the problem is resolved.
Center for help in replacing the lamp.
TIP: If all colorimetric calibration values are
underlined, the lamp has probably failed.
Bar code read The bar code reader 1. On the WalkAway Monitor, review the
errors could not read the bar WalkAway Status tab to find the tower slot
code because the label is location of panels with bar code read errors.
smudged, the print is too
2. Unload the corresponding panels from the
light, or the bar code
instrument and inspect the bar code labels to
reader malfunctioned or is
verify that the printing is readable.
out of alignment.
3. Take one or more of the following actions as
needed:
 On the WalkAway Monitor, on the
WalkAway Status tab, click the ID to
WalkAway tab to identify the panel manually
to the WalkAway instrument.
 Reprint and reaffix the bar code labels.
 Reposition the panels or realign the bar
codes.

Communication The instrument is no This problem can be transitory and self-correcting,
failure – <error longer communicating or you may have to take one of following steps:
number> with the LabPro
1. Make sure the instrument is turned on.
computer.
Note: Make sure to
2. Verify that the cables are connected between
record the error
the instrument and the LabPro computer.
number in case you
need to call the 3. Shut down the instrument, wait 15 seconds, and
Customer Care then start up the instrument.
Center.
Center.
Dispense pressure Possible leak and WARNING
out of range pressure is too low.
When troubleshooting the reagent dispense
(Pressure range should
system, always wear full protective gear (goggles,
be within 2.8 to 3.2 PSI.)
lab coat and gloves).
The instrument cannot
come up to pressure Correct the problem as soon as possible after
during the reagent seeing this message. During the first five minutes,
dispense. the instrument grants maintenance access to allow
you to correct the problem as follows:
During the first five
minutes after this 1. If the Peptidase reagent was just replaced,
message appears, the unscrew the bottle and clean the bottle threads
instrument waits for the and bottle adapter with alcohol.
condition to be corrected.
2. Verify that all bottles are screwed on tightly (use
Note: If you do not 2-finger tighten rule).
correct the problem, all
3. Pressurize the reagents to check the pressure.
panels that require
reagents are completed 4. Determine the location of the pressure leak by
without reagents. These clamping off the air inlet to each bottle, one
panels appear on the bottle at a time. The air inlet is the clear plastic
Exception Status tab on tubing that attaches to the top of each reagent
the WalkAway Monitor bottle adapter. After a few seconds, watch the
with the message WalkAway Monitor for an increase in pressure.
Dispense failed. If the pressure increases, the clamped reagent
bottle is creating the pressure leak.
5. After the bottle is isolated:
 Replace the reagent bottle with a new bottle.
 Check for a cracked or deteriorated reagent
O-ring. If an O-ring is cracked or
deteriorated, call the Customer Care Center.
 Check for a cracked bottle adapter. If a bottle
adapter is cracked, call the Customer Care
Center.
If the pressure leak still cannot be isolated, call the

Dispense system The instrument was 1. Tighten any loose reagent bottles.
has failed unable to build up
2. Pressurize the instrument using the
sufficient pressure to
Maintenance tab on the WalkAway Monitor,
dispense the reagents
and check the dispense pressure.
due to the following:
 Loose reagent bottles
Center.
 Compressor failure
Fatal error restart An unknown fatal error This error usually self-corrects after the instrument
occurred – unknown occurred, causing the starts up again.
instrument to start up
again.
Center.
Fluorometer has  The light source is 1. Verify the following:
failed. burned out.
 If the instrument has been shut down for
 The shield or more than 2 hours, allow the instrument to
reference disk is dirty. warm up at least 30 minutes.
 The instrument  If the service hatch has been open for an
temperature is too low. extended period, allow 30 minutes for the
2. Clean the reference disk and fluorometer shield.
3. To force calibration, shut down the WalkAway
instrument, wait 15 seconds, and then start up
the instrument.
4. Print the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report and
confirm that the problem is resolved.
Center.
Incubator The WalkAway clock 1. Ensure that the ambient temperature is less
temperature too starts: than 81° F (27° C).
high
 60 minutes after 2. Take a manual temperature reading. The
or instrument is started temperature range should be 35° C ±1° C.
up.
Incubator If the problem persists, call the Customer Care
temperature too low  60 minutes after the Center
service hatch is
closed.
 15 minutes after other
doors are closed.
The internal temperature
was out of range for 10
minutes after the
WalkAway clock started.
New exceptions New panels were added Review the Exception Status tab to see if any
exist to the Exception Status panel processing exceptions require immediate
tab on the WalkAway attention.
Monitor since the last time
the tab was reviewed.

Panel Preparation The panel preparation Call the Customer Care Center.
System failed system on the WalkAway
Note: Resolving the error condition does not cancel
instrument prepares
the 16/18-hour read for panels previously flagged
Synergies plus panels for
with this error.
the initial read. This
process ensures that all
antimicrobic wells are
homogenous solutions.
If the panel preparation
system fails, the
WalkAway instrument
holds Synergies plus
panels to 16/18 hours for
MIC results.
Processor has Instrument components Shut down the instrument, wait 15 seconds, and
failed, or failed during start up. then start up the instrument again.
Master ROM has If the problem persists, call the Customer Care
failed its checksum Center.
test, or
RAM has failed
WalkAway An error occurred while On the Command Center, click Utilities, double-
configuration error checking and/or updating click Configuration, and then double-click
the instrument WalkAway.
configuration. Most likely
LabPro automatically updates the software
the cause is that LabPro
versions. If the problem persists, LabPro displays a
detected an
message. Call the Customer Care Center and
incompatibility between
report the message.
the software versions on
the WalkAway instrument
and the LabPro computer.
WalkAway panel New panel types have On the Command Center, click Utilities, and
selections have not been added to the double-click Customization, Panels, and
been updated WalkAway Panel WalkAway Selections. Select the panels and click
Selections customization Transfer. The new panel data file will be sent to
in LabPro, but have not the instrument.
been transferred to the
internal instrument
computer.

Operating and Maintaining the
autoSCAN-4 Instrument
The main components of the autoSCAN-4 System are the autoSCAN-4 instrument, the LabPro computer, and
a report printer. This chapter contains basic information about the autoSCAN-4 instrument, operation and
maintenance procedures, and troubleshooting charts for resolving instrument problems. “Appendix B:
autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications” contains instrument specifications and component
information.
How the autoSCAN-4 Instrument Processes Panels

Before a panel can be processed in the autoSCAN-4 instrument, you must:
 Transmit a panel order from a laboratory information system (LIS) to LabPro or enter the order directly
into LabPro.
 Inoculate the panel with microorganisms and add MicroScan oil to any underlined wells. For inoculation
and setup instructions, see the appropriate MicroScan Panel Procedural Manual.
 Incubate the panel for the appropriate time period.
 Add reagents to the panel, if appropriate.
 Load the panel into the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
The autoSCAN-4 instrument processes the panel as follows:
 The autoSCAN-4 instrument contains light-sensitive photodiodes that detect the amount of light passing
through each well on the panel. Each photodiode generates an electronic signal corresponding to the
amount of light detected.
 The autoSCAN-4 instrument processes the electronic signals from the photodiode board and sends the
signals to the LabPro computer. LabPro compares these signals to stored control values and calculates the
organism identification and/or antimicrobic susceptibility patterns.
 The panel contains biochemicals that undergo reactions with the microorganisms. A color or turbidity
change in certain wells occurs due to a shift in pH, the addition of reagents, or the presence or absence of
growth.
 To determine minimum inhibitory concentrations (MICs) for microorganisms, the panel contains
antimicrobics in varying concentrations. The autoSCAN-4 instrument compares each test well reading to a
threshold value derived from turbidity readings in the panel’s control well. The instrument identifies if
growth occurred in each well and thus determines the MICs.
9020-7569, Rev. A Operating and Maintaining the autoSCAN-4 Instrument  3-1

WARNING
The used panels are a biohazard. Dispose of used panels as indicated in the panel procedure manual. Use
your laboratory’s safe biohazard waste disposal procedures—including any personal protective
equipment—for contact with and disposal of these materials.
Operating the autoSCAN-4 Instrument

The following illustration shows the autoSCAN-4 instrument visible components. Additional component
descriptions are available in “Appendix B: autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications.”
Read button
Scanning indicator
Drawer and Power switch

panel block
Exercise Safety and Caution

The autoSCAN-4 instrument contains sensitive optical, mechanical, and electronic components. Operate the
instrument and LabPro with care to prevent personal injury, instrument damage, and data loss.
Follow these important precautions and warnings while operating the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
Lamp
Fuse
RS232 cable
(connects to the
LabPro computer)
Power cord (connects
to the appliance
coupler)
3-2  Operating and Maintaining the autoSCAN-4 Instrument 9020-7569, Rev. A

Before you Do this
Plug in the autoSCAN-4 Make sure that the instrument has been shut down.
instrument main power cord and
Note: Always connect the instrument and
associated equipment
associated equipment to a 3-wire grounded
receptacle of the same voltage and current rating
specified on the data plate on the back of the
instrument.
Open the top of the instrument Shut down the instrument.
Handle any electronic component Ground yourself by touching something metal in the
in the instrument instrument.
Remove or install any Shut down the instrument, wait at least 10 seconds,
subassembly component in the and then disconnect the power cord from the wall
instrument outlet to avoid the risk of a severe shock and to
protect the system electronics.
Replace a burned-out lamp Use caution. The temperature of the tungsten
halogen lamp reflector reaches 250 F. Leave the
instrument on for 10 minutes without performing a
read to let the fan cool the lamp. Then shut down
the instrument and let the lamp cool completely
before removing it.
Do not touch the surface of the new bulb.
Fingerprints or any foreign substances on the lamp
surface may cause a hot spot to develop at that
location, resulting in the lamp’s premature aging
and failure.
Replace a fuse Shut down the instrument, wait at least 10 seconds,
and then disconnect the power cord from the wall
outlet.
Read a panel Make sure that the drawer path is free from
obstructions. The drawer automatically closes when
you press the Read button on the instrument.
Shut down the LabPro computer Exit the Command Center properly to prevent data
corruption.
Continue to work after a power If a power failure occurs, turn off the power switch
failure on the instrument and all LabPro components
immediately. After power is restored, start up the
components. If the power failed for an extended
time, let the instrument warm up for one hour before
processing panels.
WARNING
The power cord is connected at the appliance coupler as depicted in the previous illustration.

Start Up the autoSCAN-4 Instrument
Operating the autoSCAN-4 instrument requires close coordination with LabPro. From the time that you start
up the instrument, LabPro controls many autoSCAN-4 functions. It is recommended that you shut down the
autoSCAN-4 instrument every night and start up the instrument in the morning.
1. Turn on the LabPro computer and monitor first.
2. On the Windows Desktop, do one of the following:
 If a LabPro Command Center icon appears on the Desktop, double-click the icon and the Command
Center appears on the Desktop.
 On the taskbar, click Start, point to Programs, point to MicroScan LabPro, and then click
Command Center. The Command Center appears on the Desktop.
3. Verify that the time displayed on the right of the Windows taskbar is correct. To adjust the time or date,
double-click the time display.
4. Turn on the printer. For paper loading instructions, see your printer manual.
5. Press the power switch on the front panel of the autoSCAN-4 instrument. When power comes on:
 The indicator light next to the power switch illuminates.
 The drawer opens.
 The scanning indicator displays each filter color as the color wheel passes before the light source.
Important: Let the autoSCAN-4 instrument warm up for at least one hour before running QC diagnostics,
calibrating the instrument, and processing panels.
Shut Down the autoSCAN-4 Instrument

1. Remove any panel from the autoSCAN-4 instrument drawer.
2. Close the Patient (or QC) Order Entry window. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click Yes.
The drawer closes.
3. Press the power switch on the instrument front panel. When power goes off, the indicator light turns off.
Tip: If the autoSCAN-4 instrument is inadvertently shut down and the instrument drawer is still open, you
can manually push the drawer to close it.
CAUTION
If you are shutting down the autoSCAN-4 instrument briefly, wait at least 10 to 15 seconds before
starting up the instrument again.
Run QC Diagnostics
QC diagnostics is a series of internal hardware and electronics tests designed to confirm that the autoSCAN-4
instrument is functioning properly. QC diagnostics and calibration must be successfully performed before you
can process panels in the autoSCAN-4 instrument. LabPro requires QC diagnostics to be run at least once a
day and if a communication failure or instrument malfunction occurs.
1. Make sure the instrument has warmed up for at least one hour, and you have performed the necessary
maintenance.

2. On the Command Center, if you are processing patient panels, click Patient Order Entry. If you are
processing QC panels, click QC Order Entry. The Patient (or QC) Order Entry window appears.
3. To process panels in an autoSCAN-4 instrument, on the Patient (or QC) Order Entry window, enter a
specimen (or lot) number, select an isolate and a panel test group, and then click autoSCAN-4 Read.
If QC diagnostics is required, the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box appears and
displays REQUIRED for QC diagnostics.
4. On the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box, click Run QC. The instrument drawer
automatically closes, and LabPro begins QC diagnostics.
While QC diagnostics is in progress, LabPro displays the hourglass symbol, and no other system actions
are permitted until the process is completed.
 When QC diagnostics is completed, LabPro displays the result—OK or FAILED—for each test.
 If all tests are successful, LabPro displays the messages Accepted <current date and time> and QC
Diagnostics successful.
 If any test fails, LabPro displays the messages Failed and Print the QC Diagnostics Report for
documentation purposes. The date/time label is not updated. A failed test indicates a possible
malfunction in the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
5. To print a QC Diagnostics Report, click Print. When the Print dialog box appears, select the report, and
then click Print.
Note: To preview the report before printing it, click Print, select the report, and then click Print Preview.
Tip: It is recommended that you print a QC Diagnostics Report at least daily to document that the
instrument was properly tested before evaluating patient specimens. For documentation purposes, record
any corrective measures that you perform for a failed result.
6. Correct any failed test result, and run QC diagnostics again after troubleshooting. For corrective actions,
see “Troubleshooting autoSCAN-4 Instrument Problems.” If the test still fails, call the Customer Care
Center.
7. After running QC diagnostics successfully, perform instrument calibration.
Calibrate the autoSCAN-4 Instrument

Instrument calibration establishes baseline readings for the colorimetric system. The autoSCAN-4 instrument
uses these calibration values in calculating the panel results. Calibration is:
 Recommended if an hour has elapsed since the last calibration.
 Required if the instrument has not been calibrated for the current date.
 Required if the instrument was shut down and restarted.
 Required if the instrument malfunctions or a communication failure occurs during operation.
 Required when QC diagnostics is Required.
1. Make sure the instrument has warmed up for at least one hour, you have performed the necessary
maintenance, and QC diagnostics have been run on this day.

2. If you are processing a panel, on the Patient (or QC) Order Entry window, enter a specimen (or lot)
number, select an isolate and a panel test group, and then click autoSCAN-4 Read.
If calibration is required or recommended, the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box
appears and displays REQUIRED or RECOMMENDED for calibration.
3. On the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box, click Calibrate. LabPro displays the
message Remove any panel from the autoSCAN-4 and press the instrument READ button.
Note: If QC diagnostics is also required, LabPro makes the Calibrate option available after you run QC
diagnostics.
4. On the instrument front panel, press the Read button. The instrument drawer automatically closes, and
LabPro begins calibration.
When calibration is completed, the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box indicates
whether calibration has succeeded or failed.
5. To print a Calibration Report, click Print. When the Print dialog box appears, select the report, and then
click Print.
Note: To preview the report before printing it, click Print, select the report, and then click Print Preview.
Tip: It is recommended that you print a Calibration Report at least daily to document that the instrument
was properly calibrated and tested before evaluating patient specimens.
6. Correct any calibration errors, and calibrate the instrument again. For corrective actions, see “LabPro
Messages and Problems for the autoSCAN-4 Instrument.”
7. To resume processing panels, click Read Panels or Close to return to the Patient (or QC) Order Entry
window.
Maintaining the autoSCAN-4 Instrument

This section describes how to maintain the autoSCAN-4 instrument. Complete the following tasks every day:
run QC diagnostics, calibrate the instrument, check the fan operation, and inspect the diffuser plate and clean
as needed. Once a week inspect the photodiode shield and clean as needed.
Tip: The maintenance procedures in this guide are also available for quick reference in LabPro. On the
Command Center, click Help.
Clean the Diffuser Plate

The diffuser plate is located directly under the panel block in the instrument drawer. Inspect the diffuser plate
daily and clean as needed. If the diffuser plate is scratched, stained, or broken, replace it with a new one.
1. Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument, open the lid, and slide out the drawer.
2. Remove the front drawer plate (2 inches by 7 inches) from the drawer assembly by moving the plate back
and forth in a seesaw motion.

Front drawer plate
Left diffuser clip
3. Remove the two metal diffuser clips—note the exact location of the clips as they must be reinstalled in
the same location relative to the panel block.
Important: The right and left clips are different and cannot be used interchangeably. Set them aside in
left and right positions.
Left diffuser clip
Right diffuser clip
4. Slide the diffuser plate out from under the panel block.
If necessary, give the plate a slight push from behind the panel block to slide the plate out from the front.
Diffuser plate

5. Clean the diffuser plate with a 70 percent isopropyl alcohol and water solution or with soap and water.
Use a lint-free lens tissue to wipe off the plate.
 If the plate is scratched, stained, or broken, replace it with a new one.
Important: Handle the diffuser plate only by its edges to avoid leaving fingerprints on the surface. Insert
the plate in the same position that it was originally installed.
Tip: You can wear non-powdered gloves to prevent fingerprints.
6. Hold the diffuser plate with the frosted side up and the locator notch toward the right rear corner of the
instrument, and slide the diffuser plate into the guides under the panel block. Look down into the open
drawer to align the plate exactly.
7. Reinstall each of the two diffuser clips as follows:
 While holding the diffuser clip with the hooked end toward the front of the drawer, place the straight
end of the clip over the rear of the panel block. Push the notched portion under the diffuser plate.
 While holding the clip in place along the side of the panel block, place the hooked end of the clip over
the top of the panel block.
 Pop the hooked end upward to snap it into place.
Straight end
Hooked end
CAUTION
Make sure that the diffuser clips are in the correct positions. Drawer and aperture plate motion must be
unobstructed for proper panel readings.
8. Reattach the front drawer plate to the drawer assembly.

Tip: Leave the drawer slightly open before closing the lid to ensure that the lid is tightly aligned on the
instrument.
9. Close the drawer and lid.
Important: It is recommended that you create a new water blank file after installing a new diffuser plate.
For instructions, see “Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File.”
Clean the Photodiode Shield

The photodiode shield is located directly under the photodiode board. Inspect the photodiode shield weekly
and clean as needed. If the photodiode shield is scratched, stained, or broken, replace it with a new one.
1. Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument, open the lid, and pull out the drawer ¾ of the way.
2. With your fingertip, apply upward pressure to a front corner of the shield and pull the shield gently
toward you.
3. Sometimes the photodiode shield is pushed back too far to reach from the front. If so, reach over the top
and under the back of the photodiode board and push the shield toward you.

Photodiode
shield (clear)
4. Clean the photodiode shield with a 70 percent isopropyl alcohol and water solution or with soap and
water. Use a lint-free lens tissue to wipe off the plate. Dry completely to prevent water spots.
 If the plate is scratched, stained, or broken, replace it with a new one.
Important: Before installing a new photodiode shield, be sure to remove the plastic film on both sides.
The film was used to prevent damage while shipping the shield.
5. Insert the shield into the slots directly under the photodiode board, being careful to handle the shield only
by its edges to avoid leaving fingerprints on the surface.
Tip: You can wear non-powdered gloves to prevent fingerprints.
6. Slide the shield back until it is flush with the front of the shield block.
Check the Fan

 At least daily, listen for the fan operating at the rear of the autoSCAN-4 instrument. You can also check
for warm air flowing from the fan. If the fan is not operating, shut down the instrument and contact the
WARNING
Do not operate the autoSCAN-4 instrument if the fan is not working.
Replace the Fuse

The fuse protects the electrical components of the autoSCAN-4 instrument from power surges. It does not
require routine maintenance, but it may require replacement if the instrument does not start up.
1. Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
WARNING
After shutting down the instrument, wait at least 10 seconds before unplugging the power cord (step 2)
to prevent damage to system electronics.
2. At the instrument back panel, unplug the power cord from the instrument and the outlet.

3. Position the instrument so that the back extends approximately one inch over the edge of the counter top.
4. Find the black, rectangular fuse holder located directly above the power cord receptacle. The fuse holder
looks like a drawer and displays a picture of a fuse.
 If your instrument was built before 1993, the fuse is located below the power cord receptacle.
Lamp
Lamp cover plate Fuse holder (for

instruments built in or
after 1993)
5. Find the slot approximately 1/16 inch below the fuse holder. Insert a flat-head screwdriver vertically into
this slot and slide the fuse holder toward you. Remove the fuse from the holder and replace it with the
same type and rating as the old fuse (2A/250V).
 If your instrument was built before 1993, unscrew—counterclockwise—the black, cylindrical fuse
holder.
6. To reinstall the fuse holder, push it back into the fuse receptacle.
 If your instrument was built before 1993, push the holder into the fuse receptacle, using the
screwdriver, while turning the holder clockwise. Make sure to tighten the fuse holder completely.
7. Reconnect the power cord at the rear of the instrument, plug in the other end of the power cord to an
outlet, and start up the instrument.
Remove the Lamp

The tungsten halogen lamp is located inside a metal plate on the instrument back panel.
WARNING
The tungsten halogen lamp is extremely hot. The lamp reflector reaches 250 F. Leave the instrument on
for 10 minutes without performing a read function to let the fan cool the lamp. Then shut down the
instrument and let the lamp cool completely before you attempt to remove it.
WARNING
After shutting down the instrument, wait at least 10 seconds before unplugging the power cord
(step 2) to prevent damage to system electronics.

2. At the instrument back panel, unplug the power cord from the instrument and the outlet.
3. Facing the instrument back panel, find the metal cover plate labeled CAUTION! Hot Lamp. Loosen the
screw, using a Phillips-head screwdriver, and pull down the lamp cover plate toward you.
Lamp ejector bar
4. Push down the lamp ejector bar located on the right side of the lamp. This action loosens the lamp.
5. Hold the lamp at its base and pull it from the fixture.
6. Push the lamp ejector bar back into its original position.
Install a New Lamp

The lamp provides the light source for the colorimetric system. It does not require routine maintenance, but
the lamp requires replacement if it burns out.
CAUTION
The lamp should be replaced at least once per year. Do not touch the surface of the new lamp. Fingerprints
or any foreign substances on the lamp surface may cause a hot spot to develop at that location, resulting in
the lamp’s premature aging and failure.
1. Confirm that the new lamp is the correct type and rating: 85W tungsten halogen projector lamp.
2. While holding the new lamp at its base, push it gently but firmly into the light fixture until the lamp is in
place.
3. Close the lamp door and lock the door with the screwdriver.
Important: It is recommended that you create a new water blank file after replacing the lamp. For
instructions, see “Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File.”

Troubleshooting autoSCAN-4 Instrument Problems
This section describes how to respond to messages on the QC Diagnostics Report and troubleshoot general
instrument problems and instrument related LabPro messages. Be prepared to call the Customer Care Center
or your Beckman Coulter Representative or Distributor and have your account ID number ready. To resolve
panel processing alert messages, see “Resolving Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages.”
QC Diagnostics Troubleshooting for the autoSCAN-4 Instrument

This table provides possible solutions for each item identified on the QC Diagnostics Report

A/D board failed. The A/D board is WARNING
unseated or the ribbon
Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument, wait at
cable is disconnected.
least 10 seconds, and then unplug the power cord.
Before handling any electronic board, ground
yourself by touching something metal inside the
autoSCAN-4 instrument. Wait at least 10 seconds
before removing the board.
To reseat the A/D board and ensure that the
ribbon cable connectors are secure:
1. Open the instrument lid. The A/D board is
under the black cover on the right rear side.
2. Use a 7/64-inch Allen wrench to remove the
two rear screws that mount the cover to the
color wheel box. Set aside the green/yellow
wire connected to the rear screw.
3. To eject the flat ribbon cable, press the plastic
hinge on each side of the plastic connectors,
and pull off the cable.
Located below the CPU board, the A/D board
is identified by white winged board tabs.
4. To eject the A/D board, grasp the inside of the
white plastic wing tabs and pull the tabs toward
you. The board will eject. It is not necessary to
remove the board completely.
5. To reseat the board, place both thumbs over
the white plastic wing tabs and press toward
the back of the instrument, using some force,
until the board clicks back into place.
6. Reinstall the ribbon cable using care to align
the plastic casing with all pins.
7. Reinstall the cover and tighten the two rear
screws. Make sure that the left screw secures
the green/yellow wire to the cover.

After starting up the instrument, if you still get the
A/D board failure message, call the Customer
Care Center.
The lamp is burned out Replace the lamp.
Color wheel failed. The CPU A/D interface To reseat the CPU A/D interface cable:
cable is unseated.
1. Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument, wait at
least 10 seconds, unplug the power cord, and
open the lid.
2. Locate the CPU A/D interface cable toward the
rear of the instrument next to the power board.
Note: In newer models, this cable is wrapped in
black tape and has a gray connection. In older
models, the cable is rainbow-colored.
Make sure that the CPU A/D interface cable
connects to the back of both the CPU and the A/D
board.
Drawer motion failed. The instrument lid is out Realign the lid. Leave the drawer slightly open
of alignment. before closing the lid to ensure that the lid is tightly
(You may hear a
aligned on the instrument.
grinding noise when
drawer opens and
closes.)
The metal tab that To check the drawer motion:
prevents the drawer from
1. Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument and
opening too far is bent or
open the lid.
crooked.
2. Check if the vertical, black metal tab on the left
rear side of the drawer assembly is bent. If so,
the drawer will try to open beyond its limit,
causing a grinding noise.
3. If the tab is crooked, loosen the screws holding
the tab in place, adjust the tab until it is
straight, and then tighten the screws.
4. Close the lid, push in the drawer completely,
and turn the autoSCAN-4 instrument on and off
to test the drawer motion.
5. Run QC diagnostics again.
If the drawer motion test fails, call the Customer
Care Center.
The diffuser clips have Retrieve the diffuser clips and reinstall them
fallen below the panel correctly on the diffuser plate and panel block.
block and interfered with Replace the clips if they are bent.
the operation of the
aperture plate and the
drawer motion.

Fan is not operating. Call the Customer Care Center.
WARNING
Do not operate the autoSCAN-4 instrument if the
fan is not working.
Light source failed. The lamp is burned out if: If necessary, replace the tungsten halogen lamp.
 No light is visible at It is recommended that you create a new water
the back of the blank file after replacing the lamp.
instrument while the
power is turned on.
 The scanning indicator
does not illuminate
during QC diagnostics.
The A/D board is Reseat the A/D board and ensure that the ribbon
unseated or the ribbon cable connectors are secure. (See the following
cable is disconnected. procedure.)
Power supply The power supply has Call the Customer Care Center.
voltages failed. failed.
PROM checksum The PROM chip on the Call the Customer Care Center.
failed. CPU has failed.
RAM memory failed. The Random Access Call the Customer Care Center.
Memory has failed on the
CPU.
General autoSCAN-4 Instrument Problems

The following troubleshooting information pertains to potential instrument problems—not necessarily
identified by a LabPro message.

autoSCAN-4 The autoSCAN-4 Confirm that:
instrument does not instrument:
1. All cables are properly connected and the
start up.
(Indicator light does  Is unplugged. power cord is plugged into a functional outlet.
not illuminate.)  Is connected to a faulty 2. The outlet has power.
outlet. 3. The line conditioner is turned on.
 Is connected to a line 4. If the instrument does not start up when the
conditioner that is power switch is pressed, replace the fuse.
turned off.
If the autoSCAN-4 instrument does not respond
 Has a burned-out fuse. after replacing the fuse, call the Customer Care
Center. In the meantime, you may need to read the
panels manually.

Drawer does not A power surge has Shut down the instrument and the LabPro
automatically close caused the instrument and computer using the normal shutdown procedure.
when you press the computer to lose Wait 15 seconds, and then start up the instrument
Read button, or synchronization. and LabPro. Reread any panel being read at the
autoSCAN-4 time of the power surge.
instrument does not
CAUTION
respond to normal
LabPro commands. Make sure that the autoSCAN-4 instrument is
connected to a line conditioner.
Drawer makes a The metal tab that For troubleshooting instructions, see Drawer
grinding noise when prevents the drawer from motion failed in “QC Diagnostics Troubleshooting
it opens or closes. opening too far is bent or for the autoSCAN-4 Instrument.”
crooked.
Drawer makes a The drawer is pulled out Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument. Close the
jerking motion and a too far. drawer fully and then start up the instrument.
grinding noise when
it opens or closes.
Metallic scratches The diffuser clips have Retrieve the diffuser clips and reinstall them on the
appear on aperture fallen below the panel diffuser plate and panel block.
plate. block.
Panel spill occurred The panel is not seated WARNING
in instrument properly on the panel
Do not close the instrument drawer until the spill is
drawer. block.
cleaned.
To clean the spill:
2. Wipe down any contaminated surfaces with
70% isopropyl alcohol. If necessary, remove
and clean the shields with 70% isopropyl
alcohol.
3. Start up the instrument, allow the instrument to
warm up for at least one hour and then
calibrate.
WARNING
Do not use amphyl/alcohol or chlorine bleach to
clean or disinfect the instrument. These products
can damage certain system components, such as
the drawer.

Power failed at your 1. Turn off the power switch on the autoSCAN-4
site. instrument and all LabPro components
immediately.
2. Remove the panel from the instrument drawer.
3. After the power is restored, start up the
components.
4. If the power failed for an extended time, let the
instrument warm up for at least one hour, and
then run QC diagnostics and instrument
calibration.
Scanning indicator The lamp is burned out Replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, it is
does not illuminate recommended that you create a new water blank
on front panel. file.
Unable to read a The autoSCAN-4 Call the Customer Care Center. A field service
minimum of 10 instrument needs representative will perform all necessary tests and
water blank panels adjustment or repair—for adjustments.
during water blank example, the drawer
calibration needs to be aligned.
LabPro Messages and Problems for the autoSCAN-4 Instrument

The following table lists instrument-related LabPro messages and problems.

autoSCAN-4 Read The selected test group Ensure that the appropriate test group is selected.
button is not cannot be processed on
available. (Patient the autoSCAN-4
or QC Order Entry) instrument—for example,
a Rapid Fluorogenic
panel.
The serial port Correct the serial port assignment.
configuration is set to
For the correction to take effect, close and reopen
None.
any LabPro window from which you were trying to
access the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
Failed after A panel was left in the Make sure that the drawer is empty, and then
performing drawer during instrument recalibrate the instrument.
calibration. calibration.
(Filters 1-6 are The diffuser plate is dirty Clean or replace the diffuser plate and recalibrate
underlined on or scratched. the instrument.
Calibration Report.)

The photodiode shield is Clean or replace the photodiode shield and
dirty or scratched. recalibrate the instrument.
If the readings are still out of control after
recalibrating the instrument, shut down the
autoSCAN-4 instrument. Be sure to wait at least 15
seconds before starting up again. Recalibrate the
instrument.
If calibration is still out of control, print another
Calibration Report and call the Customer Care
Center.
Failed after The aperture plate is To check and release the aperture plate:
performing obstructed. 1. Turn off the autoSCAN-4 instrument and open
calibration. the lid.
(Filter 7 value is 2. Pull out the drawer ¾ of the way.
underlined on
Calibration Report.) The aperture plate, located under the
photodiode shield, has alternating rows of small
and large holes.
3. Move the aperture plate back and forth. You
should hear a clink sound as the plate is
released, indicating that the plate is in the
correct position.
4. If you do not hear a clink sound, jiggle the
aperture plate to ensure that nothing is
obstructing its movement.
5. Recalibrate the instrument. If filter 7 values are
still out of control, call the Customer Care
Center.
Failed after The lamp is burned out. Replace the lamp.
performing
calibration.
(All values are
underlined on
Calibration Report.)
Unable to The autoSCAN-4 Make sure that the autoSCAN-4 instrument is on.
communicate with instrument has been shut
autoSCAN-4 down.
instrument.
The autoSCAN-4 Correct the serial port assignment.
instrument port
To effect the correction, close and reopen any
assignment is incorrect.
LabPro window from which you were trying to
access the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
If you still get the message, call the Customer Care
Center. (continued)

The cables between the Confirm that the cables are connected between the
autoSCAN-4 instrument autoSCAN-4 instrument and the LabPro computer.
and LabPro computer are Tighten the connector screws if necessary.
disconnected or loose.
The internal CPU board is WARNING

unseated or the ribbon
Shut down the autoSCAN-4 instrument, wait at
cables are disconnected.
least 10 seconds, and then unplug the power cord.
Before handling any electronic board, ground
yourself by touching something metal inside the
autoSCAN-4 instrument. Wait at least 10 seconds
before removing the board.
To reseat the CPU board and ensure that the
ribbon cable connectors are secure:
1. Open the instrument lid. Use a 7/64-inch Allen
wrench to remove the cover to the electronic
boards.
2. Remove the two rear screws that mount the
cover to the color wheel box and set aside the
green/yellow wire connected to the rear screw.
3. The CPU board is located on top. Carefully
remove the two ribbon cables by pulling up on
the plastic connectors.
4. Place your fingers behind the raised black
components on the board and your thumbs
against the front bracket. Pull the board toward
you until the board is unseated.
5. Place both thumbs on the front edge of the
board and firmly press the board back into its
socket. Connect the two ribbon cables using
care to place the plastic connectors properly
over all pins.
6. Reinstall the cover with the two rear screws and
make sure that the left screw secures the
green/yellow wire to the cover.
Water blank file A water blank file does not Create a new water blank file or restore the file
does not exist. You exist in LabPro. from a backup disk.
must create this file
before reading
panels on the
autoSCAN-4
instrument.

Customizing LabPro
LabPro is typically customized and configured during system setup. This chapter describes some
customization that you may need to complete or modify after the initial LabPro system setup.
Configuring WalkAway and autoSCAN-4 Instruments

Set or Change the WalkAway Instrument Configuration
The following procedure explains how to:
 Configure the WalkAway instrument name, date, and time. The instrument date and time should be
synchronized with the LabPro date and time.
 Set the panel read time to 16 or 18 hours.
 Disable the fluorometer to save maintenance time if you do not process Rapid or Synergies plus panels.
 Select the reagents that the WalkAway instrument will automatically purge. This process occurs before the
instrument adds reagents to panels.
 Specify the default bar code printer.
Before beginning, make sure the time and date in LabPro are correct. Complete the following steps for one
WalkAway instrument and then repeat the steps for a second instrument in the second column, if applicable.
1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Configuration, double-
click WalkAway, and enter the password if requested.
2. Confirm that all instruments are attached and that the time and temperature display on the instrument’s
front panel, and then click OK on the configuration status message.
Important: At this point LabPro checks for version compatibility between the software loaded on the
WalkAway instrument and the software loaded on the LabPro computer. If the software versions are
incompatible, LabPro attempts to update the software on the WalkAway instrument. If a file transfer is not
successful, call the Customer Care Center.
If the software compatibility check is successful, the WalkAway Configuration dialog box appears.
Complete any or all of the following steps to add or change settings, and click OK when finished.
3. Accept the default in the Name box or type an instrument name.
4. Type the correct date in the Date box—for example, 4/6/01—or click the Date Calendar button and
double-click a date on the calendar.
5. Type the correct time in the Time box—for example, 3:24 PM—or type a shortcut character such as N for
now. The new time displays on the front panel of the WalkAway instrument upon completing the
instrument configuration process.
9020-7569, Rev. A Customizing LabPro  4-1

6. Click the Panel Read Time arrow and select 18 hours or 16 hours.
Important: The recommended panel processing time for Dried Overnight panels is 18 hours.
7. To disable the fluorometer when you do not process Rapid or Synergies plus panels, select the
Fluorometer Disabled check box.
CAUTION
Be certain that you want to disable the WalkAway fluorometer. If the fluorometer is disabled, you will be
unable to process Rapid or Synergies plus panels, or the panels will be Aborted–Unrecognized. To
make the fluorometer available again requires assistance from a field service engineer.
8. In the Reagent Auto-Purge area, select the check boxes of the reagents used at your site.
Important: Clear a check box only if you do not use that reagent at your site.
9. Click the Bar Code Printer arrow and then click the name of the default bar code printer.
The bar code printer may be listed as Generic/Text Printer or Bar Code Printer. If the bar code printer
name does not appear on this list, contact the Customer Care Center.
10. When you have finished setting up the WalkAway instrument configuration, click OK on the WalkAway
Configuration dialog box and respond to any confirmation messages.
Assign the autoSCAN-4 Serial Port

The port assignment identifies to LabPro which communications port connects the autoSCAN-4 instrument
and the LabPro computer. A field service representative selected the serial port and installed the water blank
file during initial set up. In the event the port assignment is blank or the water blank file does not exist,
complete the following procedure to enter the serial port or see “Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank
File.”
1. Determine the autoSCAN-4 serial port connection, that is, COM1, COM2, and so on.
2. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Configuration,
autoSCAN-4, and Port Assignment.
The autoSCAN-4 Port Assignment dialog box appears.
3. Do one of the following:
 If the autoSCAN-4 serial number displays—for example, 165—continue with the port assignment.
 If the autoSCAN-4 serial number box is blank, a message appears stating that a serial number is
required. Click OK and type a serial number in the autoSCAN-4 serial number box.
4. Select the port assignment as follows:
 If the Serial port box already contains a port—for example, COM2, trace the cable connection
between the instrument and the computer to confirm that this is the correct port.
 If the Serial port box displays None, click the Serial port arrow and then click the appropriate
communications port on the list. For example, click COM2 if that is the port where your autoSCAN-4
instrument connects to the computer.
5. When you have finished, click OK.
4-2  Customizing LabPro 9020-7569, Rev. A

Setting the Active Specimen Range
You can reduce the amount of data that is accessed when printing patient reports, performing patient queries,
or when reviewing and editing stored patient data by setting a date range for active specimens. Inactive
specimens can be excluded or included in exported files and reports resulting from queries, including
epidemiology. If your laboratory reuses specimen numbers, customize the active specimen days to be less
than the time interval between rolling over specimen numbers.
1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click System and Active
Specimen Range.
2. Enter the password if requested and the Active Specimen Range dialog box appears.
3. Select the Enable Active Specimen Range check box or clear the check box to disable the active
specimen range. If you clear the check box, all patient specimens in the LabPro database will be active.
4. Accept the default of 30 days or click the Preceding Days arrows to increase or decrease the time
interval.
5. Click OK to save.
Transferring Panel Files, Selecting Panel Processing

Options, and Creating QC Batteries
This section explains how to select panels and transfer files for WalkAway instruments, set panel processing
options, and create ID and MIC batteries for processing QC panels.
Select and Transfer MicroScan Panels

Before processing a new panel type on the WalkAway instrument, you must add it to the WalkAway Panel
Selections list. After adding the panel to the list, LabPro builds a new panel data file, and you must transfer
that file to the WalkAway instrument’s onboard computer. Selected panels cannot be processed until the panel
data file transfers successfully.
1. Make sure WalkAway instruments are not currently processing panels; that is, none of the panels have the
status of No data, any hold state, or Complete with exceptions.
 If panels are processing you can save new panel types to the WalkAway Panel Selections list, but
you cannot transfer the new panel data file to the WalkAway instrument.
2. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window double-click Customization, Panels,
and WalkAway Selections.
3. Enter the password if requested. Verify that each instrument is attached and the time and temperature
display on the front panel of each WalkAway instrument. On the confirmation message, click OK.
4. On the WalkAway Panel Selections dialog box, click the Panels Lookup button and the Test Groups
table displays.
5. Double-click a panel—or while pressing Ctrl, click one or more panels in the table, and then click Select
on the toolbar. LabPro moves the selected panels to the WalkAway Panel Selections list.
 To delete a panel from the list, right-click on the panel and click Delete on the shortcut menu.

6. When you are finished selecting panels, click Transfer.
Important: If the panel data file does not transfer for any reason, you can click Retry to attempt another
transfer. If the panel data file does not transfer, return to the WalkAway Panel Selections dialog box and
click Save to save the selected panels for transferring at a later time. When the confirmation message
appears, click OK.
When the transfer is complete, the Panel Selections Transfer dialog box identifies the successful
transfer.
7. When finished, click Close.
Select Panel Processing Features

This procedure explains how to select Group Level ID options, ESBL and IB Flagging, 24–Hour Hold options
for staphylococci and enterococci, and automatic completion options for Synergies plus panels.
To select panel processing features

1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization, Panels,
and Processing.
2. Enter the password if requested and the Panel Processing dialog box appears.
3. To select Group Level ID, select the groups that you want LabPro to sum for probability. To do this, in
the Group Level ID area, select the Staph/Related Genera and/or Streptococcaceae check boxes.
4. In the Interpretations area, select or clear the ESBL Flagging-Urine sources, ESBL Flagging Non-
urine sources, and/or IB Flagging check boxes. If selected, LabPro screens for ESBL based on source
and/or inducible beta-lactamase production when each panel is processed.
Japan Only: To view and report Japanese Society of Chemotherapy breakpoints when a disease state is
entered in a patient order, select the Japanese Society of Chemotherapy Breakpoints check box.
5. Under 24 Hour Holds for Staphylococcus (Dried Overnight), select Oxacillin options, if available. In
the Instrument area, select or clear the check boxes for this type of hold.
Note: The Oxacillin susceptible only (CLSI method) and Oxacillin susceptible and multi-drug
resistant options are country specific and may not be available to change. The WalkAway check box is
also selected and unavailable to change.
6. Under 24 Hour Holds for Enterococci (Dried Overnight), select the Vancomycin susceptible only or
Vancomycin and Streptomycin susceptible option. Then select or clear the check boxes for this type of
hold—Manual, autoSCAN-4 and/or WalkAway.
7. To automatically complete Synergies plus panels when the remaining antimicrobics are not routinely
reported, in the Synergies plus Panel Auto-completion area, select any of the following options.
To automatically complete when Select
Antimicrobics are included in a drug suppression rule. Drug Suppression Rules

Antimicrobics are not selected as part of the formulary. Drug not on Formulary
Interpretations are not available for certain drug/organism combinations. For No CLSI Interpretive
details, see the CLSI guidelines or Adult Therapy Guide Legend. Criteria

8. To report Synergies plus panel results before panels are complete, in the Synergies plus Results
Reporting area, select the Report preliminary MIC results check box.
9. When you are finished selecting panel processing features, click OK.
Create ID and MIC Test Batteries for QC Panels

In a typical workflow, when a MicroScan panel shipment is received, someone in your laboratory adds a QC
order to LabPro to record the lot number, panel type, and received date. To test panels for quality control, the
appropriate QC organisms are selected for panel processing. You can customize LabPro to simplify and
standardize the QC organism selection by creating a QC battery for each panel type used in your laboratory.
1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization, QC, and
Test Batteries.
2. Enter the password if requested and the QC Test Batteries dialog box appears.
3. To select a panel type, click the Panel Type Lookup button and select a panel from the table. Depending
on the panel selected, the appropriate organisms display in the Identification Battery area and the
appropriate strains display in the MIC Battery area.
4. Depending on the panel, select the strains you will test under the Identification Battery and/or MIC
Battery areas. You can also select QC strains for testing additional endpoints.
Important: If your laboratory uses Prompt, make sure that you select QC strain 29213P S. aureus in the
MIC Battery and the Identification Battery areas. If you do not use Prompt, select 29213 S. aureus in
both areas.
5. When you are finished selecting QC test battery criteria, click Save.
6. Repeat this procedure for each panel type processed in the laboratory.
Automating Database Backups and Report Printing

Customize the Scheduled Backup
This section explains setting up LabPro to perform database backups at a scheduled time each day.
Important: If LabPro is already customized to receive or transmit LIS data or automatically print reports, do
not schedule a conflicting or overlapping appointment time for backing up the database.
1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click System and Scheduled
Backup.
2. Enter the password if requested and the Scheduled Backup dialog box appears.
3. Select the Enable scheduled daily database backup check box or clear the check box to discontinue
scheduled backups.
Important: If you discontinue the scheduled backup, remember you will need to periodically back up your
LabPro database manually.

4. In the Scheduled Backup Properties area:
 In the Scheduled Time box, enter the time to perform the scheduled backup. Be sure to use the
appropriate time format.
 Accept the default destination drive and file name, or click the Destination Browse button to select a
different drive and folder name.
5. If you are not using a Zip drive or CD RW disk to back up LabPro and you want to append the current
system date to the file name in MMDDYY format, select the Force unique file names check box.
Important: If you back up the database to a Zip drive or CD RW disk, do not select the Force unique
file names check box.
6. Click OK to save your selections.
Configure LabPro to Automatically Print Selected Reports

This section describes how to configure LabPro to automatically print reports for panels in the WalkAway
instrument. In most cases, LabPro will not automatically print Long Patient, Short Patient, or QC Panel
reports if the reports have already been printed. However, LabPro will automatically reprint the reports if you
edit and save specimen, isolate, or test group data or the QC order, QC panel results, or corrective action text.
1. On the Command Center, click Utilities.
2. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization, Reports, and then Automated Printing. The
Automated Report Printing Configuration dialog box displays.
3. In the Report Trigger area, choose one of the following options.
To Click
Print a report each time the WalkAway instrument completes a panel Panel Completion
Print reports at specific times Appointment Time
4. In the Report Type box, click the Report Type arrow and then click a report to select it.
 If you select a custom Chartable Report, Long Format Patient Report, or Short Format Patient Report
type, LabPro prints the reports sequentially by specimen number. If you select an Appointment Time
report trigger, you can change the sort order by clicking the Primary Sort Order arrow and/or the
Secondary Sort Order arrow and then clicking any item.
5. If you selected Appointment Time as the report trigger, in the Time box, type the time you want reports
to print and press Enter. Repeat this step to enter additional times.
Note: Type times in HourHourMinuteMinute 24 hour format—for example, type 0700 for 7:00 A.M. or
2230p for 10:30 P.M.
Important: If LabPro is already customized to backup the database or transmit data at a specified time,
do not select a conflicting or overlapping appointment time for automated report printing.
6. In the Selection Criteria for Panels in the WalkAway area, click one or more of the available check
boxes.
7. Click Add. LabPro adds the configuration to the Scheduled Reports grid at the bottom of the dialog box.

8. If desired, do the following.
To Do this
Delete a configuration Click an item in the Selected Reports area and click
Delete. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Print all automated report printing Click Print.
configurations
Exit from the Automated Report Printing Click Close.
Configuration dialog box
To disable or enable automated report printing

You can disable automated report printing at any time without losing the configuration settings.
 On the Automated Report Printing Configuration dialog box, to disable automated report printing, in
the lower left corner, clear the Enable Printing check box. To enable automated report printing again,
select the Enable Printing check box.
Customizing Codes and Groups

Add, Edit, Delete, and Print Codes and Descriptions
LabPro code tables are directly linked to corresponding text boxes on various windows. Upon initial set up of
LabPro, most tables are empty—that is, you can fill in the tables with codes and descriptions commonly used
at your site. The Organisms tables already contain system-defined organisms, but you can add organisms to
these tables as necessary. To maintain the integrity of code tables, be sure to follow any standards for the
entry of codes that may have been established at your site.
Important: Make sure that codes and descriptions meet the interface guidelines. After you customize LabPro
codes, you may have to customize LIS cross-references if LabPro codes do not match LIS codes.
1. On the Command Center, click Utilities and then double-click Customization, Codes, and the table.
or
On any window, click the Lookup button on an associated text box.
 If the table has many items and you want to look up a code and description, click a column heading to
sort the table by topic. Then begin typing in the Lookup box to find a particular item in the selected
column.
Note: The lookup function is not available on certain tables if you select the sort options, Active,
Urine, Reportable, or User-defined.
 To reduce the amount of information on an Organism table, on the Data menu, point to View and then
click one organism set, or click All. To view the short name organism description, on the Data menu,
click Display Short Name.

2. On the table, choose one of the following actions.
Add a new code Click Add on the toolbar.
Type a code, a description, and any other required information. If additional
boxes are shown, enter the information. Click Save to save the data and clear
the information. Add another code or click Close to exit.
Edit or delete a code Right-click a table item and click Edit on the shortcut menu. Make the
and description appropriate changes. Click OK.
Note: You cannot edit a Urine Source descriptor if the source code is
referenced in the database. If the descriptor is incorrect for a code that is
referenced, inactivate the code and create a new source code.
Delete a code Right-click a table item and then click Delete on the shortcut menu. On the
confirmation message, click OK.
Note: You cannot delete a code that has been referenced in the LabPro
database. However, if a message indicates you can inactivate the code, do so by
clicking OK.
Inactivate a code Double-click the item. On the Edit dialog box, clear the Active check box.
Print the table On the Data menu, click Print or Print Preview. If you clicked Print on the
Windows Print dialog box, select any options and click OK. If you clicked
Print Preview, click Print to print the report or Close to exit.
Note: You can also select or clear the Reportable check box on the appropriate Comments tables.
Add, Edit, and Delete Group Codes, Descriptions, and Members

With this LabPro customization feature you can define one code and description to represent a group of
related codes. When group codes are used to create queries and drug test suppression rules, any patient record
containing a member of the code group will be selected.
Note: The following procedure shows how to add an organism group but the process for adding group codes,
descriptions, and members is basically the same for all group tables.
1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization and Code
Groups.
2. Double-click a group table.
3. Complete one of the following actions.
To Do this
Add a new group Click Add on the toolbar to display the Add dialog box. Then, complete steps 4
through 8.
Edit a group Double-click the group. When the Edit dialog box appears, make appropriate
changes to the table entry and click OK.
Note: If you are editing an epidemiology organism group, you cannot edit the
Organism Set unless all of the members are deleted.
Copy a drug or Click the group to select it and click Copy. Then, complete steps 4 through 8, as
organism group applicable.

To Do this
Delete a group code Right-click the code and then click Delete on the shortcut menu. On the
Note: If the group code and description are referenced in the database, LabPro
displays a list of rules that use the group code. To delete the group, remove it
from the rule and then delete it from the table.
Epidemiology organism groups are never referenced in the database, so you can
delete these groups at any time.
Print a table On the Data menu click Print or Print Preview. If you clicked Print, on the
Windows Print dialog box, select any options and click OK. If you clicked
Print Preview, click Print to print the report or Close to exit.
4. On the Add dialog box, in the Code box, type an appropriate code.
5. In the Description box, type a description for the group.
 If you are adding an epidemiology organism group, click the Organism Sets Lookup button, and
then double-click an organism set.
6. Click the Members Lookup button.
7. To select members from the table, double-click one item—or press Ctrl, click multiple items and then
click Select on the toolbar. The items move to the Selected Members list.
Note: If you select an organism for an epidemiology organism group, you cannot include the same
organism in a different epidemiology organism group.
8. Click Save. LabPro adds the group to the table and the Add dialog box clears so you can add another
group.
9. When you finish adding groups, click Close on the Add dialog box.
10. On the Groups table, click Close to return to the Utilities window.
Defining Orders
Orders are a convenient way of selecting tests (specimen tests, panels, and offline tests) typically used at your
site. Instead of entering various test information and combinations of tests each time you add a specimen or
isolate, you can select orders to enter specimen and isolate test details via the Patient Order Entry window.
LabPro provides a panel test group for every MicroScan panel in the system. For most laboratories, isolate
orders contain one panel test group but you can combine an MIC and an ID panel test group into a simple
order. You can also include offline tests in isolate orders if the offline tests have been added to LabPro.
Important—Japan Only: If LabPro is connected to a laboratory information system, LIS orders must match
LabPro orders exactly. Before adding orders to LabPro, print a list of LIS orders and the associated test
groups. Then, duplicate each LIS order exactly in LabPro. For example, if the LIS order ID is 12 and includes
a Pos Combo 12 test group, add a corresponding LabPro order entering 12 as the order code and Pos
Combo 12 as the test group.

1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization and
Orders.
2. Choose one of the following actions.
To Do this
Add a new isolate order Double-click Isolate and Orders.
On the Orders windows, click Add. On the Orders – Add dialog box, type a
Code and Description.
Click the Test Groups Lookup button. On the Test Groups window,
double-click one test group—or press Ctrl, click multiple test groups, and
then click Select. The test group or groups appear on the Orders – Add
dialog box.
Note: Most combined orders include an ID and MIC panel or a panel and an
offline test group. You cannot combine two test groups if any of the tests are
duplicated.
Tip: If you accidentally add the wrong panel test group to an order, right-
click the test group under Selected Test Groups, and then click Delete on
the shortcut menu.
Add a new specimen test Double-click Specimen and Tests.
On the Specimen Tests window, click Add. On the Specimen Tests – Add
dialog box, type a Code and Description.
In the Test Category box, type C for Code or F for Free Text, or click the
Lookup button and select a test category. Select a C category to enter test
results by selecting Observation and Quantitation codes. Select an F
category to type test results in a free text format.
3. Click Save. LabPro adds the code and description and clears the dialog box so you can add another
isolate order or specimen test.
5. On the Orders or Specimen Tests window, click Close to return to the Utilities menu.
Defining Queries and Drug Test Suppression Rules
The same basic Rules dialog box is used to add drug test suppression rules, patient queries, and QC queries.
All Rules dialog boxes feature the same three primary areas: Parameters, Rules, and Conditions.
Note: The LabPro AlertEX System uses a modified version of the Rules dialog box to analyze microbial
identification and antimicrobial susceptibility tests or other parameters against a series of rules. Instructions
for defining AlertEX System rules are not provided in this guide but may be referenced in the LabPro AlertEX
System Guide.

Parameters
Rules area Conditions

area
Drug test suppression rules suppress selected drugs and results from printing on Chartable Reports.
Suppressed drugs are also flagged on the Short Format Report and in other areas of LabPro.
Query rules are used to select specific information for printed reports and exported files and for working with
Patient Review and Edit. Selected parameters and conditions instruct LabPro to search for specific
information while filtering out other data.
You can use the same basic steps described in the following procedure to add drug test suppression rules,
patient queries, and QC queries. Depending on how you want LabPro to initiate a search, a cell can contain
one or more parameters.
Note: During set up, before adding drug test suppression rules, you may want to customize the formulary to
prevent non-formulary drugs from printing under any circumstances.
1. Choose one of the following actions:
To add Do this
Patient or QC query On the Command Center, click Print Reports. On the Print Reports window,
rules click the Patient or QC tab.
In the Search Type area click Patient (or QC) Query Rules. Click the Patient
(or QC) Query Rules Lookup button, and the Patient (or QC) Query Rules
window appears.
Drug test suppression On the Command Center, click Utilities. On the Utilities window, double-click
rules Customization, Drug Reporting, and Drug Test Suppression Rules. Enter
the password, if requested.
2. On the Patient (or QC) Query Rules or Drug Test Suppression Rules window, click Add. The appropriate
Rules – Add dialog box appears.

3. Type a code and description for this query or rule.
 If you are adding a drug test suppression rule, in the Conditions area, click the Drug Test Lookup
button. Double-click one drug on the table—or press Ctrl, click multiple drugs, and click Select.
Tip: To delete a selected drug on the Rules dialog box, right-click the drug or comment, click Delete
on the shortcut menu, and click OK on the confirmation message.
4. Select a parameter for the query or rule in one of the following ways:
 Click and drag: Click and drag the parameter to the first blank cell in the Rules area.
 Thereafter click and drag a parameter to an existing cell or to the open area below the last cell. Each
time you click and drag a parameter to the open area, LabPro creates a new cell for your selected
parameter. If the Rules area becomes full, click Add on the toolbar to add a blank cell—or right-click
a cell and then click Add on the shortcut menu.
 Double-click: Double-click a parameter in the Parameters list to add the parameter to the selected cell
in the Rules area.
You can select all of the parameters for the rule and then define the conditions for each parameter, or you
can select a parameter and define the conditions for that parameter before selecting the next parameter.
Keep in mind that ANDs appear between cells and ORs appear between multiple parameters within a cell.
Tip: In the Rules area, you can right-click a cell and select an item from the shortcut menu to Add, Clear
or Delete a cell or Delete, Copy, Cut, or Paste parameters.
5. If the parameter you want to add conditions for is not selected, click the parameter in the cell to select it.
6. In the Conditions area, complete the appropriate actions to add conditions for the selected parameter—for
example, click a Lookup button and select items from a table, select a test and result, select an
antimicrobic and interpretation, and so on. You can select multiple conditions for the same parameter if
desired.
Important: You must press Enter after selecting certain conditions—for example, date ranges, MIC
values, biochemical results, and interpretations—to add the conditions to the Selected List in the
Conditions area and the selected cell in the Rules area.
When To and From boxes appear in the Conditions area, you can type any of the following relative date
codes and press Enter to quickly select a common date range.
To specify Type this relative date code
Today T
Yesterday Y
The current month CM
The previous month PM
The current quarter CQ
A quarter in the current year Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4
The current year CY
The previous year PY
The last 12 months (“Rolling 12”) R12

You can also:
 Combine relative date codes if the date specified in the From box is the same or earlier than the date
specified in the To box. For example, type from Q1 to Q2 to specify the data for the first and second
quarter of the current year.
 Type a – (minus) with a code to specify an earlier day, month, quarter, or year. For example, type T-2
for two days ago, CM-3 for 3 months ago, and so on.
 Specify a single date by typing the From date only.
7. If desired, repeat steps 4 through 7 to add other parameters and conditions.
 To test a completed query, click Find and select a report to search the database and display the results
in the selected format. To print the results displayed, click Print.
8. When finished adding all parameters and selecting the associated conditions, click Save and then click
Close.
9. On the Patient (or QC) Query Rules or Drug Test Suppression Rules window, click Close.
10. On the Utilities menu or Patient Reports window, click Close.
Edit, Copy, and Delete Queries and User-Defined Rules

This procedure explains how to copy and/or edit a user-defined rule.
To edit or copy Do this
A patient or QC query On the Command Center, click Print Reports.
On the Patient or QC tab, in the Search Type area, click Patient (or QC)
Query Rules. Click the Patient (or QC) Query Rules Lookup button.
A drug suppression rule On the Command Center, click Utilities. On the Utilities window, double-
click Customization, Drug Reporting, and Drug Test Suppression
Rules. Enter the password, if requested.
2. On the Patient (or QC) Query Rules or Drug Test Suppression Rules window, right-click the rule. On the
shortcut menu, click Edit, Copy, or Delete.
 If you select Edit or Copy, the appropriate Rules dialog box appears with all information as set up
for the selected query or rule. Proceed to step 3.
 If you select Delete, click OK on the confirmation message to delete the query or rule. Click Close to
exit from the Rules window.
3. Change any items in the query or rule as needed:
To Do this
Add or change the Code Type a new code and/or description, or select and modify an existing
and/or Description code and/or description.
Add a new parameter Click and drag a parameter to a blank cell, an existing cell, or to the
open area below the last cell. If the Rules area becomes full, click Add
on the toolbar to add a blank cell.

To Do this
Add or change a condition for In the Rules area, click the parameter in the cell to select it. Add or
an existing parameter change the conditions in the Conditions area—for example, click a
Lookup button and select items from a table, select a test and result,
select an antimicrobic and interpretation, and so on.
Delete a condition for an In the Rules area, click the parameter in the cell to select it. In the
existing parameter Conditions area, right-click the item in the Selected List and then click
Delete.
Tip: In the Rules area, you can also right-click a cell and select an item from the shortcut menu to Add,
Clear or Delete a cell or Delete, Copy, Cut or Paste parameters. (You cannot delete the Drug Test or
Alert Comments cell.)
4. When finished adding information or making changes, click Find and select a report format to check a
query, or click Save to store the query or rule.
5. On the Patient (or QC) Query Rules or Drug Test Suppression Rules window, click Close.
6. On the Utilities window or Patient Reports window, click Close.
Troubleshoot Drug Test Suppression Rules

Troubleshooting drug test suppression rules is a convenient way to check under what circumstances a
particular drug is suppressed in LabPro. The Troubleshooting Drug Test Suppression Rules dialog box
also indicates if the drug is in the formulary.
1. Click Utilities on the Command Center. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization, Drug
Reporting, and Troubleshooting.
The Troubleshooting Drug Test Suppression Rules dialog box appears.
2. Click the Drug Test Lookup button and select a drug test from the table. A note displays in the upper-
right corner indicating if the drug is in the formulary or not.
3. To display all drug test suppression rules that suppress the drug, click Find.
4. To view or print the Drug Test Suppression Rules Report, click Print and then click Print Preview or
Print.
 If you clicked Print, on the Windows Print dialog box, select any options and click OK.
 If you clicked Print Preview, click Print to print the report or click Close.
Print Rules and Queries

This section explains how to print one or all patient queries, QC queries, or drug test suppression rules.
To print all drug test suppression rules

2. On the Utilities window, double-click Customization and then double-click Drug Reporting.
3. Right-click Drug Test Suppression Rules.

4. On the shortcut menu, click Print or Print Preview.
 If you clicked Print, on the Windows Print dialog box, select any options and click OK.
To print all patient (or QC) query rules

1. On the Command Center, click Print Reports.
2. On the Patient (or QC) tab, in the Search Type box, click Patient (or QC) Query Rules.
3. Click the Patient (or QC) Query Rules Lookup button.
4. On the Data menu, click Print to print the report or Print Preview to view the report.
 If you clicked Print, on the Windows Print dialog box, click OK.
Creating Custom Reports

You can create custom reports to specify the layout, content, and format of patient reports, lab reports, and
Query Summary Reports. This section describes how to position selected items of information on custom
reports and how to apply various format and section options.
Note: To customize the header text, hospital name, and header and footer spacing for system-defined reports,
use the Utilities, Customization, Reports, Formatting option.
Individual items of information and blocks of data on custom reports are referred to in the following
procedures as sections. Each section includes one or more modifiable labels and associated LabPro values.
For example, a Ward of Isolation section is one item of information. The modifiable label for this section is
Ward of Isolation and the LabPro value is whatever was entered for the specimen—for example, Emergency
Room. The Isolate Results section includes many items of information and multiple labels. Labels in these
sections are often headings for columns of LabPro data—for example, Drug and MIC labels are headers for
columns of LabPro test result values.
It is generally easier to copy an existing report and edit the copy than to add an entirely new report. Therefore,
procedures in the following sections explain first how to copy an existing report and then how to add a new
report. If you are not familiar with Custom Report features, it is highly recommended that you copy a report
and use basic features—such as, move and resize or add and delete sections—to modify the copy.
Copy or Edit a Custom Report

When you copy a custom report, all report sections are locked (you cannot move or resize the sections), and
the sections contain sample data instead of the specimen data you would normally see on a report. After
completing the following procedure to copy a report, be sure to complete the remaining procedures to unlock
report sections and fill the report with data from a LabPro specimen or query.
Note: You cannot edit system-defined reports, but you can copy the reports and edit the copies.
To copy or edit an existing report

1. On the Utilities menu, double-click Customization, Reports, and Custom Reports.
The Custom Reports window displays.

To Do this
Copy an existing Right-click the report you want to copy, and then click Copy on the shortcut
report menu.
On the Custom Reports – Add window, type a code and description.
Edit an existing report Double-click the report.
3. Complete the next two procedures to unlock report sections and fill the report with data from a LabPro
specimen or query.
To unlock custom report sections

If you copied an existing report, use the following procedure to unlock any or all sections before you attempt
to change the report.
Important: You cannot resize or move locked sections.
1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, click a section to select it. To select multiple sections,
chose one of the following actions. To cancel a selection, click on a blank area.
 Press Shift and click each section.
 Position the pointer in a blank space, hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer.
 Press Ctrl + A to select all sections.
2. Click Unlock selected sections, or right-click a selected section and click Unlock Selected on the
shortcut menu.
To fill a custom report with LabPro data

1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, on the File menu, click Load Database Data.
2. Type a specimen number or query code, or click the Lookup button and select a specimen or query from
the Specimen or Patient Query Rules window. Click OK.
To edit a custom report

 Use the following cross-reference table to find procedures in this chapter for Custom Report features.
Basic Custom Report Features

To See
Add or delete sections “Add and Delete Custom Report Sections”
Resize, move, and align sections “Resize, Move, and Align Sections on Custom Reports”
Select a font, border, or background “Select a Custom Report Section Style”
for selected sections Caution: If you are not familiar with the advanced alignment
options in this procedure, complete the first three steps only and
click OK. Do not attempt to set advanced alignment features unless
you have time to work with these features and learn how to achieve
the desired results.
View or print a sample report “View or Print a Sample Custom Report”

Other Report Features
To See
Select options for gridlines, margins, “Add a New Custom Report”
units of measure, background color,
 Editor Options
and Snap and Glue features.
Specify the paper size, print  Report Options
orientation, and number of report
pages to print on each sheet of paper
Change format and section options for “Select Custom Report Format and Section Options”
a selected section
Set advanced alignment options or “Select a Custom Report Section Style”
specify format options for one or more
selected sections
Add a New Custom Report

Hint: If you are adding a report that is very similar to an existing report, you can copy the existing report and
edit the copy. For details, see “Copy or Edit a Custom Report.”
To add a new custom report

1. On the Utilities menu, double-click Customization, Reports, and Custom Reports.
The Custom Reports window displays a list of system- and user-defined reports.
2. Click Add.
3. On the Report Types dialog box, double-click one of the following report types.
Report Type Description
Chartable Report A patient report for physician review.
Lab Report An internal report for lab use only. Use this report type to print
preliminary results without flagging the results as Reported.
Query Summary Report A log-type report that shows the results of a database search.
4. On the Custom Reports – Add window, type a Code and Description. Make sure the description is clear
so you can easily recognize this report on the Print Reports and Automatic Report Printing windows.
Note: You can change the report type on the Custom Reports – Add window by clicking the Report Type
arrow in the upper-right corner and selecting Chartable Report or Lab Report.
5. Complete the remaining procedures in this section of the guide, and click Save to store the report.
To select Report Options

Report Options specify the paper size, print orientation, and the number of report pages you want to print on
each sheet of paper.
1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, on the Edit menu, click Report Options.
2. Under Supported Papers for Current Printer, click a paper or envelope size.

3. Under Paper Details, click Portrait, Landscape, or Custom Size.
 If you select Custom Size, you can change the measurement in the Width and Height boxes to
increase or decrease the paper size.
4. To print more than one report page on a single sheet of paper, click the Pages per Sheet arrows until the
appropriate number displays.
 To increase or decrease the amount of space between the report pages on each sheet of paper, type a
new measurement in the Page Spacing box.
5. To increase or decrease the report margins, in the Margins area, change the measurement in the Left,
Right, Top, and Bottom box, as needed.
6. Click OK to save your selections and return to the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window.
Note: If you selected more than one report page per sheet of paper, LabPro subdivides the report
vertically on the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window into the number of pages selected. Create your
report in the first, blank subdivision only. Do not add sections to subdivisions with blue diagonal lines.
To select Editor Options

Editor Options allow you to show or hide gridlines and margins, select a unit of measure for data entry,
specify a background color for all sections, and select Snap and Glue settings.
1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, on the Edit menu, click Editor Options.
2. Select or clear the Show Grid and/or Show Margins boxes.
3. To change the grid size, type a new measurement in the Grid Size box.
4. In the Snap Mode area, click None to turn the Snap feature off, or click Grid or Section.
Note: When a Snap feature is on and you drag sections to move them, LabPro pulls the sections into
alignment with a gridline or target section when you release the mouse button.
5. In the Units area, click the unit you want to use when entering measurements such as the width of a
section or label.
6. To change the background color for all report sections, click the Section Background Color arrow and
select a color.
7. Click the Glue Distance arrows to increase or decrease the section snap distance.
Note: When the Section Snap feature is on and you drag one section toward another, a red indicator bar
appears when you get close to the targeted section. The red bar lets you know you can release the mouse
button to snap, or glue, the section to the target. The Glue Distance specifies how close the section is to
the target when the red indicator bar appears.
Hint: If your report has many sections, you may want to select a lower number in the Glue Distance box.
8. Click OK.
Add and Delete Custom Report Sections

The following procedure describes how to add and delete items of information on your report.
Important: If you used the Report Options, Pages per Sheet option to print more than one report page on
each sheet of paper, LabPro subdivides the report into the number of pages selected. Position all sections in
the first, blank subdivision only. Do not add sections to subdivided areas with blue diagonal lines.

To add sections to a custom report
1. On the far left side of the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, click + next to the Specimen,
Patient, Results, Other, or Query Summary category to display the associated fields of information.
2. Double-click a field to add a section to the report, or drag a field to the desired location on the report.
Repeat this step to add additional sections.
Important: If you cannot find a section after you add it, the section may be hidden under another section. To
locate the section, click Display all report sections. On the Report Sections window, click the section to
select it, and then click Select on Editor. Small red boxes appear on the border of the selected section.
To delete custom report sections

 On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, right-click a section and click Delete on the shortcut
menu—or, complete any of the following actions to select multiple sections, and click Delete all
selected sections on the toolbar. To cancel a selection, click on a blank area.
 Press Shift and click each section.
 Position the pointer in a blank space, hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer.
 Press Ctrl + A to select all sections.
Resize, Move, and Align Sections on Custom Reports

Important: If you selected options to print multiple report pages on each sheet of paper, do not position
sections in subdivided areas with blue diagonal lines.
To find a section by name

Use this feature to quickly find and select a specific section.
 On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, click Display all report sections. On the Report
Sections window, click the section to select it, and then click Select on Editor. Small red boxes appear
on the border of the selected section.
To resize sections
You can resize sections individually or change the width and height of selected sections.
Important: When you add a new section, sample data appears in the area where LabPro data will be printed,
to indicate the maximum number of characters LabPro allows in the database for this information. For
example, if you add a Specimen section, you might see 20 characters after the Specimen label. If you
change the width of that section and only 10 numbers display, an ellipsis (…) appears after the 10th number.
The ellipsis warns you that only the first 10 characters of the specimen number will print on the report. If the
specimens processed in your laboratory never exceed 10 characters, this is not a problem. However, if you
frequently have specimens with more than 10 characters, you must adjust the width appropriately to prevent
these specimen numbers from being cut off on printed reports.
Important: You cannot move or resize a locked section. To unlock one or more sections, select the sections
and click Unlock selected sections, or right-click any selected section and click Unlock Selected on the
shortcut menu.

 On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, choose any of the following actions.
To Do this
Resize one section Click the section to select it. Point to a sizing handle and drag the
pointer until the section is the size you want.
Click on a blank space to cancel the selection.
Change the height or width of selected Choose one of the following actions to select multiple sections:
sections
 Press Shift and click each section you want to change.
 Position the pointer on a blank space, hold the left mouse
button, and drag the pointer to select sections.
Click inside the Width or Height box, edit the width or height, and
press Tab.
Click on a blank space to cancel the selection.
Change the height or width of one or Choose one of the following actions to select multiple sections:
more sections to match the height or
width of a selected section  Press Shift and click each section you want to change.
 Position the pointer in a blank space, hold the left mouse
button, and drag the pointer to select sections.
Press Shift and click the section with the height or width you want to
duplicate. Sizing handles appear as red boxes on the border of this
section.
Click Make same width or Make same height.
Click on a blank area to cancel the selection.
To move and align sections

The Report Editor includes many options for aligning selected sections with a grid, another section, or a report
margin. The following procedure describes how to align sections using options on the Custom Reports – Add
or – Edit window. LabPro also uses other options at print time to realign sections based on the available
LabPro data. For details, see “Select a Custom Report Section Style.”
Important: You cannot move or resize a locked section. To unlock one or more sections, select the sections
and click Unlock selected sections, or right-click any selected section and click Unlock Selected on the
shortcut menu.
1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, click a section to select it, or choose any of the
following actions to select multiple sections. To cancel a selection, click on a blank area.
 Press Shift and click each section you want to move.
To Do this
Find and select a specific section Click Display all report sections. On the Report Sections window,
click the section, and then click Select on Editor. Small red boxes
appear on the border of the selected section.
Move one section Drag the section to the new position.
Move multiple sections Select the sections. Drag the selection to the new position.

To Do this
Move one section and automatically align Click the section to select it.
it with a another section
Click Toggle Section Snap on. LabPro highlights the button when
toggled to the on position.
Drag the selected section until a red indicator bar appears on the
target section. Release the mouse button. The selected section snaps
to the target section.
Note: The snap feature remains on until you click Toggle Section
Snap again to turn the feature off or until you select the Toggle Grid
Snap option.
If you cannot display the red indicator bar on the target section, you
may need to reposition other sections, or select a smaller Glue
Distance. For details, see “To select Editor Options.”
Move one section and automatically align If gridlines are not visible, click Toggle display of grid.
it with gridlines
Click the section to select it.
Click Toggle Grid Snap on. LabPro highlights the button when toggled
to the on position.
Drag the section until it snaps to the desired gridline.
Note: The snap feature remains on until you click Toggle Grid Snap
again to turn the feature off or until you select the Toggle Section
Snap option.
Align one or more sections with report Select one or more sections.
margins
Click Align to left margin, Align to top margin, Align to right
margin, or Align to bottom margin.
or
In the Left or Top box on the toolbar, edit the space from the left or top
margin and press Tab.
Align the right or left sides, tops, or Select one or more sections.
bottoms of selected sections with the right
or left side, top, or bottom of a target Press Shift and click the target section. Small red boxes appear on
section. the borders of the target section.
Click Align left sides, Align right sides, Align tops, or Align
bottoms.
Move one or more sections up or down to Select one or more sections.
align and center with a target section
Press Shift and click the target section. Small red boxes appear on
the borders of the target section.
Click Align to center (horizontally).
Move one or more sections to the left or Select one or more sections.
right to align and center with a target
section Press Shift and click the target section. Small red boxes appear on
the borders of the target section.
Click Align to center (vertically).
Important: If you cannot find a section after moving or realigning it, the section may be hidden under another
section. Click Display all report sections. On the Report Sections window, click the section to select it, and
then click Select on Editor. Small red boxes appear on the border of the selected section.
2. Click Preview Sample Report to see a sample of the printed report.

To lock or unlock section movement
After sizing and positioning sections, you can lock the sections in place or lock only the vertical or horizontal
movement. When you lock sections in place, you cannot resize or move the sections.
1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, click a section to select it, or choose one of the
following actions to select multiple sections. Click on a blank area to cancel a selection.
 Press Shift and click each section;
2. Choose one of the following options.
To Do this
Lock or unlock the size and location of On the toolbar, click Lock selected sections. To unlock
selected sections selected sections, click Unlock selected sections.
Lock or unlock the horizontal On the bottom of the window, click Lock movement to
movement of selected sections horizontal axis. To unlock, click again.
(prevent up or down movement)
Lock or unlock the vertical movement On the bottom of the window, click Lock movement to
of selected sections (prevent left or vertical axis. To unlock, click again.
right movement)
Select Custom Report Format and Section Options

The Report Editor provides several format and section options that can only be applied one section at a time.
Common format options allow you to:
 Edit the section, header, or data element name (label).
 Show or hide section, header, or data element labels.
 Print headers, labels, and LabPro data (values) in bold and underlined type.
 Change the width and position of labels, headers, and data elements.
Most sections include additional options that may or may not be unique to that section. Because most format
and section options are self-explanatory, and the Section Preview feature provides a visual representation of
most option selections, detailed instructions for every possible format and section option are not required or
included in this guide.
To select format and section options

1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, double-click a section.
2. On the Report Section Editor window, if applicable, click a tab to display other format and section
options.

3. Choose one or more of the following options, as applicable.
Hint: When you select most of the following format and section options, LabPro applies the selection and
displays a sample of the result in the Section Preview area in the top portion of the Report Section Editor
window.
To Do this
Show or hide a label or header on Select or clear the Show or Visible box associated with the label or
printed reports header.
Print a label, header, or the associated Select the Bold or Underline check box associated with the label,
LabPro data in bold or underlined type header, or value.
Change a label or header name In the Label box or column, type a new label.
Change the width of a section or data In the Label Width or Width box or column, edit the width. The
element within a section change appears in the Section Preview area when you exit from the
box or column.
Change the position of a label in relation In a section with one label, click the Alignment arrow associated
to the corresponding LabPro value with the label, and then select an option.
Change the position of a label and In a section with one label, click the Section Alignment arrow and
LabPro value within a section select an option.
or
In a section with many columns or data elements, click a row in the
Alignment column, click the drop-down arrow, and select an option.
Select border and shading options In areas with border and shading options, click the drop-down
arrows and select options.
or
In sections with many columns or data elements, click on a row in
the Borders column, click the drop-down arrow, and select an
option.
Change the characters (---) printed In the Blank Value or Blank Result Text box, type new characters.
when no LabPro data exists
Print a section on the first page of the Select the Display on first page only check box.
report only
Note: When you select this option, the section prints on the first
page only, but the space designated for the section remains on
subsequent pages of the report. However, you can set Align options
for other report sections that instruct LabPro to move those sections
into the blank space at print time. For additional information, see
“Select a Section Style.”
Hide a section when no LabPro data Select Hide field if no data exists.
exists for that section
Note: When you select this option, the section label does not print
on the report when no data exists, but the space designated for the
section remains. However, you can set Align options for other report
sections that instruct LabPro to move those sections into the blank
space at print time. For additional information, see “Select a Section
Style.”

To Do this
Shrink the section size to fit the amount Select the section Shrink to Fit check box.
of LabPro data retrieved from the
database at print time Note: When selecting the Shrink to Fit option, make sure the
section is big enough to hold the maximum amount of LabPro data.
At print time, LabPro shrinks the section to contain even the smallest
amount of LabPro data. However, LabPro does not stretch the
section if LabPro data exceeds the specified section width.
When you select this option and LabPro shrinks the section at print
time, blank space remains on the report. You can set Align options
for other report sections that instruct LabPro to move those sections
into the blank space at print time. For additional information, see
“Select a Section Style.”
Isolate Results and Table Data Sections Only

Include or exclude the Isolate Results On the General tab, click Isolate Summary, Isolate Results, or
and Isolate Summary elements in the Both.
Isolate Results section
Specify the text you want to see if there On the Isolate Results tab, in the lower-left corner, change the text
are no isolate results when LabPro in the No Data Label box.
prints the report
Change the label for non-MicroScan On the Isolate Results tab, in the lower-left corner, change the text
(offline) tests and predicted in the Offline Tests Label box and/or the Predicted Interpretations
interpretations Label box.
Select the data format for specific data Click the drop-down box associated with the data element type and
element types. For example, print select a format.
Codes (not Descriptions) for
Mnemonic data elements or
On the Table Data, Data Options tab, click a row in the Data
Format column, click the drop-down arrow, and select a format.
Note: Boolean data element types display LabPro results in a
positive/negative format such as Yes/No, True/False or +/-. For
example, Nosocomial and Excluded from Epi are Boolean data
element types.
Reposition data elements or columns Click the data element or column name to select it.
within a section
On the right side of the table, click the Move data item up or Move
data item down arrow.
or
On the Table Data, Data Options tab, select element or column in
the Show box. Click Move Selected Elements to Top to move all
selected columns to the top of the list.
Expand a column so the combination of Select the Stretch box associated with the column.
columns fits the section width
Note: The column expands at print time when extra space exists
after LabPro fills the section with data. With the exception of Free
Text and Comments, you can only stretch one column.
Important: If you cannot find a section after selecting format and section options, the section may be
hidden under another section. Click Display all report sections. On the Report Sections window, click the
section to select it, and then click Select on Editor. Small red boxes appear on the border of the selected
section.

Select a Custom Report Section Style
You can apply Section Style format and alignment options to one or more selected sections simultaneously.
Format options specify section background patterns or colors, borders, and fonts. Alignment options realign
sections on the report at print time to reduce or remove blank spaces created when you select certain section
options. The information in the following table describes each of these section options and explains how
blank spaces are created on printed reports when these options are selected.
Option Description
Display on first page only The section prints on the first page only. However, a section placeholder
remains and appears as blank space on subsequent pages of the report.
Hide field if no data exists If LabPro data does not exist, the section does not print but a placeholder
remains and appears as blank space on the printed report.
Shrink to Fit If the amount of LabPro data retrieved at print time is smaller than the
section size, LabPro shrinks the section size to fit the data leaving a blank
space on the report.
Note: Align results are not entirely predictable when combined with
sections marked Shrink to Fit because the amount of data and blank space
may not be consistent from one report to another.
When you select Section Style Align options (Left, Right, Top, and Bottom) for a section, you instruct
LabPro to align that section with the closest section or margin to the left, to the right, above, or below the
section. For example, suppose you select the Display on first page only option for the Hospital Name at the
top of the page, and then select a Top Align option for all sections below the Hospital Name. LabPro prints
the Hospital Name on the first page and aligns the remaining sections with the sections above them. When
LabPro removes the Hospital Name from subsequent pages, the remaining sections (already aligned with
each other) align with the top margin to fill in the space.
Important: Unlike most section options, you cannot view the result of Align option selections in the Section
Preview area at the top of the Report Editor window or on the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window. You
must select Print Sample Report on the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window to view a sample report
with your Align option selections. Because you cannot immediately see the results of your selections, you
may need to resize or reposition sections; modify the Align options; and display a sample report several
times until you achieve the result you want.
To select a section style

1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, choose one of the following actions.
To format Do this
One section Double-click the section.
Multiple sections Press Shift and click each section; or position the pointer in a blank space, hold
the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to select sections. Click Edit
Common Attributes.
All sections Press Ctrl + A. Click any section, and then click Edit Common Attributes.
Note: To clear a selection, click a blank area on the report.
2. On the Report Section Editor window, display the Section Style tab.
3. To select format options, click Background, Border, and Font arrows and select options. The format
displays in the Section Preview area at the top of the window.

4. To align the selected sections with sections positioned to the left, right, above and/or below the selected
sections at print time, click the Align arrow and select Left, Right, Top, and/or Bottom.
Note: When you print this report, LabPro aligns the selected sections one direction at a time in the order
selected. For example, if you select Left and Top, LabPro first aligns selected sections with the sections to
the left and then with the sections above.
5. If you selected Align options (step 4), choose the following options, as applicable.
To Do this
Hold one or more sides of the selected sections Click the Anchor arrow and select Left, Right, Top,
in the current location when LabPro realigns and/or Bottom to lock selected sides in the current
the sections at print time positions.
Select the amount of space to apply between Move the Align Spacing slider to the right or left.
sections when LabPro realigns the sections at
print time
6. To change the space between tab stops for selected sections that contain tab characters, move the Tab
Spacing slider to the right or left.
7. To apply the selected options, click OK.
 If you changed Align options (step 4), be sure to click Preview Sample Report to see the results of
your Align option selections. On the Report Preview window, click the Next Page arrow to review
subsequent pages.
Important: If you cannot find a section after selecting advanced alignment options, the section may
be hidden under another section. Click Display all report sections. On the Report Sections window,
click the section to select it, and then click Select on Editor. Small red boxes appear on the border of
the selected section.
View or Print a Sample Custom Report

1. On the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window, click Preview Sample Report.
2. As needed, click buttons on the toolbar to view report pages.
3. To print the report, click Print.
4. Click Close to return to the Custom Reports – Add or – Edit window.
Safeguarding Customization and Configuration Settings

Some customization settings require a great deal of thought and a substantial amount of time to create. If you
routinely back up the LabPro database, you can use the Restore or Merge feature to restore most of your
customization in the event of a catastrophic hardware or software failure. For added security, you can also
print most customization and some configuration and system settings from the Utilities window and/or the
customization, configuration, and system windows. For details on printing rules and queries, see the previous
section.
2. On the Utilities window, click + to expand a menu item.

3. Right-click the customization feature and click Print to print the report or Print Preview to view the
report.
 If you clicked Print, on the Windows Print dialog box, choose any options and click OK.
Print Epidemiology Segmentation Settings

2. Click the Epidemiology tab.
3. On the bottom of the tab, click Print Segments.
4. On the Windows Print dialog box, click OK.

Using the LabPro Interface
LabPro includes an interface program that allows you to transmit patient, specimen, and isolate information
between the LabPro computer and other healthcare systems—for example, laboratory information systems
(LIS), pharmLINK systems, or Surveillance Data Link Network (SDLN) products. If the other healthcare
system is a bidirectional LIS, you can transmit patient demographics and specimen information to LabPro and
use that data to order and/or process panels. When LabPro test results are available, you can transmit the
results to the LIS.
This chapter describes how to:
 Enable Auto-Monitor so LabPro is always ready to receive transmissions from the LIS.
or
Configure Auto-Request to send requests for data to the LIS at scheduled times.
 Configure Auto-Transmit to transmit selected data from LabPro to the LIS at scheduled times.
 Manually send a request for data to the LIS.
 Manually transmit selected data to the LIS.
 View the Interface Queue and Auto-Request and Auto-Transmit schedules.
 Print the Interface Log, configure Auto-Delete, and suppress Code Not Found errors.
 Troubleshoot interface problems.
 Resolve data transmission problems.
Interface cross-reference tips, drug test codes, test group codes, and technical specifications are available in
the LabPro Interface Implementation Guide on the Beckman Coulter website.
About the Interface Monitor

The Interface Monitor displays all defined devices, the status of those devices, the next Auto-Request and
Auto-Transmit times, and any error conditions.
Button Function
Transmit Manually transmit patient data to another healthcare system.

Patient Data
Request Data Manually send a request for data to your LIS.
View Log View, print, and manually delete the Interface Log.
9020-7569, Rev. A Using the LabPro Interface  5-1

Two menu options are available on the Interface Monitor: Device and Log. The Device menu provides
options for transmitting data and printing the device configuration report. The Log menu provides options for
viewing and configuring the Interface Log.
Device Menu Command Function
Auto-Communication Configure LabPro to automatically send requests for data and transmit results to
the LIS by configuring the Auto-Request and Auto-Transmit features.
Transmit Patient Data Manually transmit patient data to another healthcare system.
Transmit Custom Data Transmit custom tables to another healthcare system.
Request Data Manually send a request for data to an LIS.
View Queue Display activities for all active devices.
Stop Transmission Stop a transmission on a device that is currently sending data.
Enable Auto-Monitor Enable/disable Auto-Monitor. When enabled, the device monitors the line for
incoming transmissions.
Japan Only: Auto-Monitor must be enabled to request or receive data.
Print Configuration Print the configuration report for the selected device or all devices.
Print preview View the configuration report for the selected device.
Log Menu Command Function
View View, print, and manually delete the Interface Log.

Configure Error Suppress Code not found errors on the Interface Log for the selected device.
Suppressions
Japan Only: LabPro does not support error suppressions for Japan devices at
this time.
Configure Auto-Delete Specify the number of days to retain Interface Log entries during the auto-delete
process.
Interface Icons in the Taskbar

The following interface icons may display on the Windows taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows
desktop.
This icon Appears when
The LabPro interface is installed.
The system is sending or receiving data.
A transmission error occurred. When this icon appears, print or view the Interface
Log. To resolve errors, see “Suppress Code Not Found Errors on the Interface
Log.”
5-2  Using the LabPro Interface 9020-7569, Rev. A

Interface Transmission Workflow
The following is an example of a typical workflow if LabPro receives patient orders from an LIS.
 If your LIS requires you to initiate a download from the LIS, create a load list on the LIS and transmit
the data to LabPro. The LabPro Auto-Monitor must be enabled to receive the LIS transmission.
Japan Only: Auto-Monitor must be enabled to request or receive data.
 If your LIS requires a request for data and Auto-Request is enabled, LabPro will request data from
the LIS at the specified time. If you need to manually request data from the LIS before data can be
transmitted, on the LabPro Interface Monitor, click a device, and then click Request Data.
2. After receiving patient and specimen information from the LIS, resolve any errors that occurred during
the data transmission.
3. Process MicroScan panels.
 To process panels in a WalkAway instrument, open the WalkAway Bar Codes window, add any
missing order information, and print the bar code labels. Affix labels to the panels, complete the set
up procedures, and load the panels into the WalkAway instrument.
 To process panels manually or on the autoSCAN-4 instrument, open the Patient Order Entry window,
recall each specimen, add any missing information, and read the panels.
For details about panel processing, see “Processing Panels.”
4. When panel processing is complete, if Auto-Transmit is enabled, LabPro transmits the results to the LIS.
If Auto-Transmit is not enabled, manually transmit the data.
5. Resolve any transmission errors that occur.
Configuring LabPro to Automatically Send and Receive

Data Transmissions
In many laboratories, LabPro receives specimen and patient information for panel processing from an LIS.
Depending on the LIS, you must either transmit data from the LIS to LabPro or send a request for data from
LabPro to the LIS. This section describes how to:
 Configure LabPro to receive data transmitted from an LIS.
 Automatically send requests for data to an LIS at scheduled times.
 Automatically transmit selected data to an LIS at scheduled times.
You can configure multiple devices for Auto-Request and Auto-Transmit. However, if more than one device
is configured for the same port, select an appropriate time interval that avoids conflict with another device.
You can enable or disable Auto-Request or Auto-Transmit at any time.

Enable and Disable Auto-Monitor
If you initiate data transmissions from the LIS, the LabPro Auto-Monitor must be enabled to receive the data.
When Auto-Monitor is enabled, LabPro constantly monitors the communications line for incoming LIS
transmissions; when you initiate a transmission, LabPro receives the data. You can assign more than one
device to the same serial port; however, you can only enable Auto-Monitor on one device at a time because
the serial port is always busy for that device.
Important: Do not enable Auto-Monitor if you use the Request Data option to manually request LIS data.
Japan Only: Do not disable Auto-Monitor. Auto-Monitor must be enabled to request or receive data.
1. On the Command Center click Interface.
2. On the Interface Monitor, click a device.
3. On the Device menu, select Enable Auto-Monitor, or clear the check box to disable Auto-Monitor.
When enabled, a check mark appears on the Device menu and by the device name on the Interface
Monitor.
 If an Auto-Monitor conflict message appears, Auto-Monitor is already enabled for another device
assigned to the same serial port. You must disable Auto-Monitor for the other device before you can
enable Auto-Monitor for the selected device.
Configure Auto-Request
Some laboratory information systems require a request for data from LabPro before the LIS can transmit
patient orders to the LabPro computer. For these systems, you can either manually send a request for data
each time you want to download LIS patient and specimen data, or you can enable Auto-Request so LabPro
automatically requests orders from the LIS at specified times. LabPro does not specify to the LIS what type of
specimen or isolate data to send.
Important: The Request Data option only applies to specific laboratory information systems.
3. On the Device menu, click Auto-Communication. The Configure Automatic Transmit/Request dialog
box appears.
4. Select the Enable Auto-Request check box, or clear the check box to disable Auto-Request.
Note: When Auto-Request is disabled, the selected configuration is retained but ignored.
5. In the Time box, type the time to send a request for data and press Enter. Repeat this step for additional
times.
6. Click OK.

Configure Auto-Transmit
After you finish processing panels and reviewing patient test results, you can manually transmit the results to
another healthcare system, or use the following procedure to automatically transmit selected data from
LabPro to the LIS. Automatic transmission occurs at the times you specify. LabPro displays the next
scheduled transmission time on the Interface Monitor.
If you schedule multiple devices to automatically transmit at the same time, LabPro queues the transmissions
at the scheduled times and starts transmitting in the order queued. You can view queued transmissions in the
Interface Queue.
3. On the Device menu click Auto-Communication and the Configure Automatic Transmit/Request
dialog box appears.
4. Select the Enable Auto-Transmit check box, or clear the check box to disable Auto-Transmit.
5. In the Time box, type the time or various times to transmit data and press Enter. Type the time using the
24-hour format—for example, type 2230 for 10:30 P.M.
6. In the Search Type area, click one of the options.
7. Enter the search criteria for the selected search type in any of the following ways:
 Click a Lookup button and double-click a table item to select it.
 Type the information in each search criteria box, and then press Enter.
 If a search requires a date, enter the number of days you want to search prior to the transmission date.
8. Do the following only if appropriate:
 To search the entire database instead of active specimens only, clear the Active specimen only check
box.
 To resend data that was previously transmitted by the selected device, select the Retransmit data
previously sent check box.
9. Click OK.
Manually Requesting LIS Data or Transmitting Results

You can use the procedures in this section to manually send a request for data to an LIS or to select and
transmit specific LabPro data to an LIS.
Manually Sending a Request for Data to an LIS

1. On the Command Center, click Interface and the Interface Monitor appears.
2. Click the appropriate device.
3. On the toolbar, click Request Data.
The Interface Monitor shows a Waiting status. The status changes to Receiving when data starts to
download and Idle when the transmission is complete.

Manually Transmitting Results to the LIS
Use the following procedure to manually transmit results from LabPro to the LIS.
1. On the Command Center, click Interface.
2. On the Interface Monitor, click the appropriate device to select it.
3. Click Transmit Patient Data. The Manual Transmit window appears.
4. In the Search Type area, click a search type. The search criteria for that option appear to the right of the
Search Type area.
5. Enter the search criteria for the selected Search Type in any of the following ways:
 Type the information in each search criteria box and press Enter.
 Click a Lookup button and double-click an item in the associated table.
 If a search type requires a date, enter a number of days prior to today’s date. For example, to transmit
specimens that became final since yesterday, type 1 in the Days prior to transmission date text box.
Note: Specimen, Isolate, and Test Group Status Dates update whenever a specimen, isolate, or test
group status changes. If a device filter specifies a status, LabPro searches for that status only in the
specified date range. If a device filter is not defined or does not specify a status, the interface searches for
all statuses.
6. Do the following only if appropriate:
 To search the entire database instead of active specimens only, clear the Active specimen only check
box.
 To resend data that was previously transmitted by the selected device, select the Retransmit data
previously sent check box.
Important: The data that appears in the Search Results area at the bottom of the dialog box does not
represent the actual data that will be transmitted, because the search criteria and device filter rule are not
applied until you select Find or Transmit.
 To review or edit the actual data that will be transmitted, complete steps 8 through 10.
 To transmit the selected specimen data without review, click Transmit.
8. Click Find. LabPro applies the search criteria and filter rule and displays the data to be transmitted in the
Search Results list. If the expected data does not appear, click View Filter to view the filter rule.
Each isolate appears on a separate line. A No appears in the Transmitted column, if the specimen, isolate,
or test group has not been previously transmitted via the selected device, or a Yes appears if it has.
 If a specimen displays without an isolate or test group, the transmitted status refers to the specimen.
 If an isolate displays without a test group or the test group is an ID only panel, the transmitted status
refers to the isolate.
 If a test group that is not an ID only panel displays, the transmitted status refers to the test group.
Note: When test results are edited, LabPro resets the transmitted status to No.

9. Complete any of the following steps.
To Do this
Exclude one or more Click the entry in the Search Result list, or press Ctrl and click multiple
specimens or isolates from entries. Highlighted entries will not be transmitted.
transmitting
Note: If an isolate has combined test groups and you select one of the
test groups,
and
the device is configured to transmit All test groups in a single isolate
record,
then, none of the results for the isolate will be transmitted.
Clear all entries from the Click Clear.
Search Results grid
10. Click Transmit to transmit the selected data.
If an error occurs in transmission, the Interface Monitor displays Error(s) occurred in the Error
Conditions column and the Transmission Error Icon appears in the taskbar. View or print the Interface
Log and resolve the error.
Stop a Transmission
You may need to stop a transmission when a problem exists on the receiving system. You can stop a
transmission without causing errors in the LabPro interface, but errors may occur in the receiving system.
2. On the Interface Monitor, click the appropriate device.
3. Right-click the device and click Stop Transmission on the shortcut menu.
4. When the message Stop transmission? appears, click Yes. LabPro stops the transmission and sets the
device status to Idle.
Viewing Transmission Details

This section describes how to view the Auto-Transmit configuration, Auto-Request schedule, device filter
rule criteria, and the interface queue.
View the Automatic Transmit/Request Configuration and Filter Rules

You can use the following procedure to view the Auto-Transmit configuration, Auto-Request schedule, and
filter rule for a selected device on the Configure Automatic Transmit/Request dialog box. You can also
view the next scheduled request or transmission time on the Interface Monitor and display the filter rule
criteria before manually transmitting data.
2. On the Interface Monitor, click the appropriate device.

3. On the Device menu, click Auto-Communication.
The Configure Automatic Transmit/Request dialog box displays the configuration. A checkmark
appears in the Enable Auto-Transmit and Enable Auto-Request check box when these features are
enabled.
 To view the filter rule criteria for this device, if available, click View Filter. To print the filter rule,
click Print. To return to the previous window, click Close.
4. Click Cancel to return to the Interface Monitor.
View the Interface Queue

2. On the Interface Monitor, on the Device menu, click View Queue. The Interface Queue window displays
pending actions for all devices.
3. Click Close to return to the Interface Monitor.
Using the Interface Log

The Interface Log records all transmission activities to and from the LabPro interface. You can view or print
this log and use it for troubleshooting errors that occur in transmission.
View and Print the Interface Log

View or print the Interface Log on a daily basis and when errors occur in transmission. When errors occur, a
Transmission Error icon appears on the taskbar and the message Error(s) occurred appears on the Interface
Monitor.
2. On the Interface Monitor, click View Log and the View Log window appears.
The Interface Log displays entries for all devices. Use the scroll bars to view all entries.
3. Click the View Log By arrow, and select the appropriate device. Only entries for the selected device
appear.
4. To sort the list in ascending or descending order, click the Date/Time column heading.
The following table shows the symbol and printed text style for each message type.
Symbol Message Indicates

# Error Message The interface did not store the data, transmit the data, or receive
(Bold text) the expected data.
! Warning Message An event occurred that needs further investigation but does not
(Italicized text) inhibit data storage. Check if a setting in device configuration
needs editing or if a data element in LabPro customization needs
editing.

Symbol Message Indicates
+ Incoming Data Any data or character LabPro receives from another healthcare
(Underlined text) computer system. Use this information for configuring the
LabPro interface or for troubleshooting.
- Outgoing Data Any data or character sent to another healthcare computer
(Normal text) system. Outgoing data allows you to see what the LabPro
interface transmits.
(blank) System Message When a transmission is sent or received and when a transmission
(Normal text) is complete. System messages are informational and do not
require any intervention or action.
5. To print the log, click Print.
If you select All Devices, all entries for all devices print. If you select a device, only the entries for the
selected device print.
6. Click Close to return to the Interface Monitor.
Configure Auto-Delete
Unless you change the Auto-Delete configuration, LabPro retains Interface Log entries for one day and
deletes the entries when the LabPro database is backed up. You can change the Auto-Delete configuration to
retain Interface Log entries for up to 7 days.
2. On the Log menu, click Configure Auto-Delete.
3. On the Configure Auto-Delete dialog box, type the number of days you want to retain Interface Log
entries.
4. Click OK.
Suppress Code Not Found Errors on the Interface Log

When LabPro receives a code from another healthcare system and that code is not in the corresponding
interface cross-reference table or LabPro customization table, the interface considers this an unknown code
and generates an error. If you do not want to add this code to the appropriate table, you can suppress the data
type—Institution, Comments, Physician, Service, Tech, or Ward—so the interface ignores the code and an
error does not occur. This option is not recommended for data types that may be needed for queries,
suppressions, or epidemiology reports in LabPro.
Japan Only: LabPro does not support error suppressions for Japan devices at this time.
1. On the Command Center, click Interface and the Interface Monitor appears.
2. Click the appropriate device.
3. On the Log menu click Configure Error Suppressions. The Configure Error Suppressions window
appears.
4. Select the appropriate check boxes.
Note: Physician codes include attending and requesting physicians, Ward codes include ward of
isolation and patient wards, and Tech codes include isolate and specimen techs.

5. Click OK to save the settings and return to the Interface Monitor.
Important: This procedure suppresses the errors for the selected device only. Configure each device
separately.
Troubleshooting Interface Issues

The previous sections provide solution charts for resolving basic transmission problems and responding to
errors and warning messages that appear on the Interface Log. This section describes other conditions that
may cause interface problems. The following topics are included in this section.
 Finding Information for Configuring the Interface
 Determining the Correct Date and Time Format
 Converting Cross-Reference Tables
 Resolving Transmission Backup Conflicts
 Merging LabPro Databases
Interface cross-reference tips, drug test codes, test group codes, and technical specifications are available in
the LabPro Interface Implementation Guide on the Beckman Coulter website.
Find Information for Configuring the Interface

If you are unable to find information for configuring the interface, perform a test transmission by sending data
from the LIS to LabPro. The Interface Log captures the data transmitted, and you can review the log for the
information you need. On the Interface Log printout, data received from the LIS is underlined.
Code Information
There are two ways to find a code transmitted to LabPro from the LIS:
 If the code is not in the LabPro customization table or is not cross-referenced to a LabPro code, a Code
not found error appears on the Interface Log with the code that caused the error.
 Look in the Interface Log for the appropriate record that has the code—messages received from the LIS
are underlined. To determine which record and field contain the desired code, compare the record in the
Interface Log with the record attributes in the LabPro Interface Implementation Guide.
You can enter the code in the appropriate LabPro customization table, or cross-reference the code in the
LabPro interface or the LIS.
Field and String Delimiter Information

When the LabPro interface or another healthcare computer system receives data, the program parses and
stores the data by looking at the field and string delimiters. If the field and string delimiters are not configured
correctly, data is not stored. The field delimiter is required; some programs do not use string delimiters.
If you cannot find the correct delimiters used by the LIS, print the Interface Log. Messages received from the
LIS are underlined and each record in the message contains the delimiters.
For example, look for a record that starts with <STX>P. This is the Patient Record. A field delimiter separates
the different fields in the record—for example, patient ID number from the patient’s last name. A string
delimiter, if used, surrounds the data between the field delimiters.

The following example of a Patient Record shows the field delimiter as a comma (,) and the string delimiter
as double quotes ("):
<STX>"P","Field 2","4215689","Picard","Jean Luc","2001-01-26","","","","Field 10"[CR][LF]<ETX>
Another example of a Patient Record shows the field delimiter as (<HT>) and no string delimiters:
<STX>P<HT>Field 2<HT>4215689<HT>Picard<HT>Jean Luc<HT>2001-01-26<HT><HT><HT><HT>Field

10[CR][LF]<ETX>
Important: When configuring the interface, select the same delimiters as the other healthcare computer
system. Do not use the Header (H) Record to determine the field and string delimiters.
Field and Delimiter Information — Japan Only

Japan devices use a modified ASTM format which parses and stores LabPro data by looking at the following
delimiters. If delimiters are not configured correctly, the data is not stored.
 A Field Delimiter is a single allowable character (excluding <CR>) that is used to separate the data
elements of fields.
 A Repeat Delimiter is a single character (excluding <CR> and the Field Delimiter value) that is used to
separate a number of descriptions belonging to the same group in a field.
 A Component Delimiter is a single character (excluding <CR> and the Field and Repeat Delimiter values)
that is used to separate data elements of fields of a hierarchical or qualifier nature—for example, the fields
of a street address.
 An Escape Delimiter is a single character, (excluding <CR> and the Field, Repeat, and Component
Delimiter values) that is used within text fields to signify special case operations.
Alphanumeric characters are not used as delimiters, because they are likely to appear within field content and
in some cases have special uses.
If you cannot find the correct delimiters used by the LIS, print the Interface Log. Messages received from the
LIS are underlined and each record in the message contains the delimiters.
Determine the Correct Date and Time Format

When LabPro receives a date or time, the format must match the date and time format configured in the
LabPro interface or a Bad Date Format or Bad Time Format error occurs.
1. Transmit data with dates and times from the LIS to LabPro (this may generate an error in transmission).
2. Review the Interface Log. Messages received from the LIS are underlined and the dates, times, and
delimiters (if used) are in the format used by the LIS.
3. Select the same date and time format when you configure the interface.
The following tables list the record and fields that contain date or time entries. For more information, see
the LabPro Interface Implementation Guide.

Record Type Field Date or Time
Patient (P) 6 Date of birth
9 Admit date
10 Discharge date
Specimen (B) 10 Collect date
11 Collect time
12 Request date
13 Receive date
14 Receive time
Japan Only:
Record Type Field Dates
Test Order Record (O) 7 Request/Ordered Date
8 Specimen Collection Date
Patient Identifying Record (P) 8 Date of Birth
Convert Cross-Reference Tables

When you upgrade from the MicroScan Data Management System (DMS) to LabPro and you want to retain
the same cross-reference tables that were defined in the DMS, you can run the LabPro Interface Conversion
program. See the LabPro Interface Installation Instructions. This section covers what to consider before and
after converting cross-reference tables from the DMS to LabPro.
Note: The MIC cross-reference table and the Numeric Only option do not convert during this process.
The LabPro interface has enhanced configuration capabilities; therefore some functions previously
accomplished through cross-referencing in the DMS may be accomplished easier through configuration in the
LabPro interface.
1. Consider the following before converting the cross-reference tables:
DMS Function LabPro alternative
Cross-reference MIC Receiving system does not In Data Suppressions, you can suppress MIC values
values to blank accept MIC values. from transmitting for standard or Breakpoint panels.
Cross-reference “<” to Receiving system expects Cross referencing is not required, LabPro sends the
“<=”. “=” sign with <= MIC values. “=” sign with <=MIC values. The DMS does not send
the “=” sign with <= MIC values.
Organism codes The receiving system Select Numeric Only for the organism table in cross-
expects the organism code referencing. LabPro sends the organism code as text.
to be a numeric only field. DMS sends the organism code field as numeric only.
Cross-reference drug The receiving system Cross-referencing is not required; LabPro sends all
test codes from mixed expects uppercase drug drug test codes in uppercase.
case to uppercase test codes.
DMS sends drug test codes in mixed case.

2. After you complete the interface conversion, the Cross-Reference Conversion Log lists the cross-
reference entries that did not convert. Codes do not convert for the following reasons:
 The LabPro code does not exist in the LabPro customization table. You must run the LabPro Convert
program before the Interface Conversion program to ensure that all the former DMS codes exist in
LabPro.
 The panel or test group does not exist in LabPro—for example, a panel is obsolete.
3. When entries appear on this log, note the DMS codes on the log. If you use the code and the code is
transmitted to or from LabPro, choose one of the following actions:
 Add the DMS code and description to the LabPro customization table and build a cross-reference
entry in the appropriate cross-reference table.
 Enter the External Device code and description in the LabPro customization table. LabPro codes can
be up to eight characters.
4. After the conversion is complete, check the cross-reference tables in LabPro.
 If organism specific drugs were cross-referenced in the DMS—for example, AmE, AmL, AmN, AmO,
AmS, CbP, AzP, PE, PL, PNE, PO, PPN, PS, the LabPro Interface Conversion Program inserts the
device code in the Drug Tests table but the LabPro code is blank. Delete these entries from the cross-
reference table.
 If you added new codes in LabPro that need cross-referencing, add those entries to the appropriate
table.
 If necessary, enable the Numeric Only option for any appropriate tables.
Resolve Transmission and Backup Conflicts

If you schedule automatic backup, report printing, and/or data transmissions to occur at the same time, a
conflict will occur and LabPro will not initiate the backup, print the reports, and/or transmit the data.
 If a backup does not occur, wait for the transmission to complete and perform a manual backup. Delete
the Interface Log manually.
 If reports do not print, print the reports manually or wait for the next scheduled print time.
 If a data transmission does not occur, wait for the next scheduled transmission for the device or manually
transmit the data.
Merge Interface Data
The LabPro merge program is primarily designed to restore LabPro patient and QC data and customization
settings after upgrading LabPro software. The merge feature also provides an easy method for transferring
LabPro and interface customization settings from one LabPro computer to another.
CAUTION
When merging databases, if you do not select Exclude Interface data, LabPro:
 Overwrites the interface configuration settings in your current database with the interface configuration
settings from your backup. This includes all device configuration and auto-communication settings. (The
Interface Log and the Interface Log configuration settings from your current database are retained.)
 Sets all the Transmitted Flags in your current database to No. This may cause data that was previously
transmitted to be transmitted again.

After merging databases:
 Check the interface log configuration settings—for example, Configure Error Suppressions and
Configure Auto-Delete.
 Make sure Auto-Monitor is enabled for all appropriate devices.
Resolving Data Transmission Problems

The following table contains probable causes and solutions for issues that occur before or during data
transmissions. See the following table if the selected data was not transmitted or the data was not received by
LabPro or an external system. If an error or warning message appears on the Interface Log see “Responding
to Interface Log Errors and Warning Messages.”
Note: Interface cross-reference tips, drug test codes, test group codes, and technical specifications are
available in the LabPro Interface Implementation Guide on the Beckman Coulter website.

Problem Possible Cause Solution
Selected data not included in Data field is suppressed Check Data Suppressions in the message
data transmission. layer.
The device has a filter defined. Check the filter rule criteria:
 The View Filter button is accessible on
the Manual Transmit and Configure
Automatic Transmit/Request dialog
boxes.
 A system message appears in the
Interface Log if a filter was applied to
the data prior to transmission.
Data was not in search criteria Use a different data selection option.
range.
Specific search criteria not Data was already transmitted. Use a different data selection option.
finding any specimens Data is inactive.  Select Retransmit data previously
sent.
 Select Individual specimens with
isolates.
The device filter is screening Check the filter rule criteria:
the data.
 The View Filter button is accessible on
boxes.

The receiving systems did not The device filter is screening Check the filter rule criteria:
receive the data. the data.  The View Filter button is accessible on
boxes.
Specimen or isolate was Check Retransmit data previously sent
transmitted previously. and transmit again.
The field and string delimiters Check the field and string delimiter
are not configured correctly. configurations.
The protocol settings are not Check the protocol setting; make sure they
correct. match on both systems.
The LIS expects leading zeros Contact your LIS vendor.
for the isolate or specimen If the LIS expects a leading zero on single
numbers. digit isolate numbers, on the Data
Formatting tab, select Isolate Number in
the Transmit with Leading Zeros area.
LabPro interface or the other Codes do not match between Check the Interface Log for errors.
healthcare computer system systems. Change codes on either LabPro or other
did not accept the data healthcare computer system or establish a
element. cross-reference.
Isolates or specimens not Auto-Monitor is not enabled for Make sure Auto-Monitor is enabled for the
displayed in Patient Order the device. device. If not, enable Auto-Monitor and re-
Entry or WalkAway Bar Codes transmit orders.
window after a download from
the LIS.
Errors occurred in Check the Interface Log for any errors.
transmission.
The field and string delimiters Check the field and string delimiter
are not configured correctly. configurations.
Panels are not configured as Check the WalkAway Panel Configuration
WalkAway panels in LabPro. in LabPro.
LabPro is only sending [STX] Usually indicates that the Switch to a valid port.
when transmitting to another interrupts are blown on the
healthcare computer system. COM port.
Test Group does not appear The LIS is transmitting the Change the test group codes in your LIS
or wrong test group appears in wrong test group code to or cross-reference the test group codes in
LabPro. LabPro. LabPro.
Test group code is cross- Complete or correct cross-reference table.

referenced to the incorrect test
group code in LabPro—check
for errors in log file.

Patient Name/Demographics The LIS is transmitting different Some multi-site laboratory information
not correct in LabPro for a patients with same ID number. systems allow duplicate patient ID
specific ID #. Patient ID numbers must be numbers but an additional identifier is
unique in LabPro. used to ensure uniqueness. The LIS is not
sending this identifier. Check with your LIS
vendor.
LabPro is not sending Patient A filter is configured for the Click Find before transmitting data. The
Data (specific patients). device. Search Results box displays all data to
be transmitted. Check the filter criteria:
A filter is configured for the
device and a record has a  The View Filter button is accessible on
blank field that is required for the Manual Transmit and Configure
the filter. Automatic Transmit/Request dialog
boxes.
Edit the device filter.
Enter appropriate data on specimen
record then retransmit that specimen
number.
LabPro not sending all data Record or field is suppressed. Check Data Suppressions.
for certain patients.
LabPro did not send Interpretation has been cross- Delete the cross-reference.
interpretations. referenced to “Blank”.
Interpretations are suppressed Check Data Suppressions.

from sending.
Inappropriate drug/bug Check Patient Review and Edit to see if

combination. interpretation was generated for the drug
test.
When using Individual Specimen does not have an Use another option to transmit data.
Specimen with Isolates to isolate.
transmit data, a specimen Specimen was previously Select Retransmit data previously sent.
number does not display in transmitted.
the Search Results list.
Interpretations not appearing Inappropriate drug/bug Check Patient Review and Edit to see if
in receiving system. combination. interpretation was generated for the drug
test. Consult the LabPro Therapy Guide
for further information.
Interpretations are suppressed Interpretation is cross-referenced to a
in the interface. blank.
Check the Data Suppressions tab in the
Message Layer.
Check with the LIS vendor.

Receiving system does not Disable ESBL and IB reporting in
accept results of BLAC, TFG, Customize Panel Processing.
IB, ESBL, R*, EBL?.
Build a cross-reference to an interpretation
that is compatible with the other
healthcare computer system.
The LabPro interface transmits BLAC; the
pharmLINK system only accepts BLac.
Cross-reference the interpretation BLAC to
BLac (capital B and capital L).
LabPro transmits the ESBL screening
drugs as ESA and ESB. For these drugs,
the interpretations are only transmitted
when the screens are positive.
Transmission of Check with the other healthcare computer
Interpretations is set system vendor and select the appropriate
incorrectly. transmission of interpretations. See Data
Formatting in the message layer.
Antimicrobic codes do not Codes must match exactly including case.

match between LabPro and the LabPro sends all upper case. If codes
receiving system. differ then establish cross-reference
compatible with the other healthcare
computer system.
Antimicrobic is suppressed by To ensure suppressed drugs are
the Formulary or Drug transmitted, confirm 'Non-reportable drugs'
Reporting Rules. Does the drug is not selected in Data Suppressions.
appear on the Long Patient
Report?
MIC values are suppressed Receiving system may need the MIC
from transmitting. values for calculating interpretations. Make
sure the MIC values for Breakpoint or
standard panels are not suppressed.
Non-reportable drugs are If selected, all drugs suppressed by
suppressed. LabPro, either through Formulary or drug
suppression rules are not transmitted.
Synergy Drug Records not Synergy Drug Records are Check that gentamicin or synergies are
transmitted or stored in the suppressed. not suppressed in LabPro.
receiving system. Check to make sure synergy drug records
are not suppressed in Data Suppressions.
Confirm synergy drugs are defined in the
LIS.

Synergy Drug Record is LabPro transmits synergy Suppress synergy results in LabPro and
suppressed in Data results in two ways: then suppress Non-reportable Test Record
suppressions but synergy in Data Suppressions.
 Synergy interpretations in
results still appear in the LIS.
the Isolate record. or
 Synergy results (MIC and Suppress Synergy Interpretations and
interpretation) in Drug Test Synergy Drug Test Record.
Records.
Transmission appears to have The correct port is not Check that the correct port is indicated in
taken place but nothing stored configured. the serial configuration.
in LabPro.
Device is configured for file Check if physical layer is configured for file
transfer. transfer. Check file for data.
The field and string delimiters If the log file shows data received, verify
are not configured correctly. that the field delimiter used in the records
received is the same as the field delimiter
defined in the message layer. Data was
not parsed correctly.
Auto-Monitor is not enabled. Enable Auto-Monitor.
Urine Interpretations not Receiving system requires Change transmission of interpretations to
appearing in the receiving LabPro to only transmit one appropriate interpretation in Systemic field.
system. therapy and LabPro is sending
Systemic and Urine
interpretations.
Port was working but no Interrupts may be blown for the Change COM ports, hard boot the
longer works. COM port. computer to reset the interrupts.
Responding to Interface Log Errors and Warning

Messages
The following table contains probable causes and solutions for errors and warning messages that appear on
the Interface Log. If selected data was not transmitted or received by LabPro or an external system see
“Resolving Data Transmission Problems.”
Note: Interface cross-reference tips, drug test codes, test group codes, and technical specifications are
available in the LabPro Interface Implementation Guide on the Beckman Coulter website.

Error and Warning Message
Message Possible Cause Solution
<X> Retries before Number of times a record was resent Verify protocol character definitions.
transmission corrected. in response to a NAK. This occurs Check transmission line (cable or
Note: X reflects the number of when the number of resends is <10 connectors).
retries. before an ACK is received.
This error can result from a faulty
transmission line (cable or
connectors).
10 Records repeated When a single record is resent 10 Verify protocol character definitions.
(NAK’ed) during last times and is NAK’ed each time, the Check transmission line (cable or
operation. Transmission transmission stops. connectors).
stopped.
ACK/NAK character expected If you use the Ack/Nak protocol and:
but not received  The other healthcare computer Check the other healthcare
system is not sending an ACK or computer system customization for
NAK in response to a record. proper protocol settings and protocol
characters.
 The Protocol Characters are set Verify the protocol character
incorrectly. definitions.
 The Time-out period too short Increase Time-out period by 15
seconds.
All selected tables are empty Occurs when you are transmitting When transmitting custom tables,
custom tables and the tables you select tables with data.
select are empty.
All WalkAway panel IDs are in Occurs when the WalkAway System Resolve panels on the WalkAway
use. Patient data not stored has 999 panels that are in process Exceptions tab and then re-transmit
and not completed. orders from the LIS.
Note: The WalkAway System tracks
panels in process by assigning panel
ID numbers 1 through 999. These
numbers cycle as panel data is
stored and new panels are ordered.
Bad Checksum: received Occurs when checksums are used Check for loose or faulty cable
<checksum value> Expected and an incorrect checksum is and/or connectors.
<checksum value>. received.
Faulty transmission line (cable or
connectors).
The incorrect checksum type was Verify that the LabPro checksum
selected during interface type is the same as the other
configuration. The log file shows the healthcare computer system.
checksum characters received and
the value the interface expected.

Bad Checksum(s) on Record / When checksums are used and Check for loose or faulty cable
10 retries before message LabPro NAKed the same record ten and/or connectors.
aborted times in a row. The record was not
stored.
Faulty transmission line (cable or
connectors).
The incorrect checksum type was Verify that the LabPro checksum
selected during interface type is the same as the sending
configuration or no checksum was system.
received.
Bad Date Format LabPro received a date that is In the message layer on the Data
unrecognizable. Formatting tab, change format to
The date format is set incorrectly. match the other healthcare computer
system.
A future date was received; LabPro Check with the LIS concerning
does not accept dates in the future. sending future dates.
Birth dates are sent using a 2-digit Check if the LIS sends DOB flag or if
year, and the LIS does not send the possible, change format to a 4-digit
DOB flag. year.
Bad Specimen # format The specimen # contains illegal Check the specimen number in the
characters. LIS.
The specimen # exceeds 20 Check the tagging configuration.
characters. Tagging may cause the specimen #
to exceed 20 characters.
Bad Time format <time> The time format received does not Change the time format to match
agree with the configured time receiving system.
format.
The time format is configured
incorrectly.
Break Interrupt Received This error occurs when the interface
program is attempting to receive
information and:
 Data link and/or physical layer Check the physical and data link
configuration is incorrect. layer configurations.
 The transmission line (cable or Check the cable and connections.
connectors) is faulty.
The sending system is rebooting.

Buffer Overflow This occurs with Xon/Xoff protocol Try setting Baud Rate to slower
settings. Some or all data received is speed.
lost. Check protocol of both systems.
This error can occur if information is Verify the receiving system received
received at a rate faster than LabPro the XOFF character.
can store it. Various protocol options
are available to regulate (like a traffic
light) the flow of information. If this
error occurs, it is likely that these
protocol options may not be set
correctly or that the reciprocal
interface is not responding correctly
to the assigned protocols.
Call disconnected (line was Modem tried dialing the specified Check the receiving modem.
busy) number and gets a busy signal.
Call disconnected (No Answer Modem dialed the specified number Check the receiving modem.
by Remote) and the remote modem does not
answer.
Cannot cross-reference A cross-reference table for a Japan On the Message Layer Properties
<string> to numeric value. device is configured as Numeric dialog box for the Japan device,
Only, and at least one code in the identify the cross-reference table(s)
table contains alphabetical configured as Numeric Only.
characters. Clear the Numeric Only check
box(s), or change the codes in the
corresponding LabPro table(s) to
include numbers only.
Cannot import data for SDLN The SDLN device type is for sending You cannot import data using this
device type information only. device type.
Code not found: <data The code received from the LIS was Add the code to the LabPro
element>, <code> not in the cross-reference table or in customization tables.
the LabPro customization table. or
Cross-reference a LabPro code to a
device code.
Code received is inactive: A code received from the LIS is in Activate the code in the LabPro
<data element> <code> the LabPro customization table and customization table.
is inactive.
A code received from the LIS is
cross-referenced to an inactive code.
Comm port not assigned to When the LabPro device was In the physical layer, select the
device configured, the COM port was not appropriate COM port.
selected.
ENQ character expected but This error occurs when using the Check the transmission cable and
not received <character ENQ protocol and the LabPro connection.
received> interface does not receive an ENQ Check the route of the transmission
character at the beginning of a cable.
transmission from the LIS.
Verify protocol character definitions.

ESBL result already exists An ESBL result was sent from the Check the ESBL result for the
LIS and an ESBL result exists for the isolate.
isolate.
External Device is not This error usually occurs when ENQ Verify in the log file that LabPro sent
available is one of the protocols used. out the ENQ.
LabPro sends out an ENQ to bid for Verify the receiving system is in a
the line, and no response is received mode to receive.
within the Time-out period. Check if the LIS received the ENQ.
Receiving system is not in “receiving” Verify the protocols agree between
mode. LabPro and the other healthcare
computer system.
The incorrect port is used. Connect cable to alternate port and
Bad port on receiving system. test.
Incorrectly wired (pin) cable. Verify that the port, connectors, and
cable are correct.
Field and string delimiters The LabPro interface program uses Check fields 6 and 7 of the header
same in Header Record. the configuration in the Header record. Ensure that they are not the
Record if it differs from the same or both fields are blank.
configuration set for the device.
This error occurs when the Header
Record sends a configuration where
the field and string delimiters are the
same.
Framing Error This error may occur when the Check the physical and data link
interface program is attempting to layer configurations.
receive information being sent from Check the cable and cable
the LIS. Normally, this is a result of connections.
incorrectly settings in the data link
and/or physical layer. If these
settings are correct then the problem
most likely resides in the
connectors).
This can also occur when the LIS is
rebooted.
Electrical interference occurs due to
the length of the serial cable.
Electrical interference occurs due to
the route of the cable.
Freetext record not accepted: The freetext record exists in LabPro. LabPro does not overwrite or add to
<text of free text> the free text.
Manually add the freetext to the
record in LabPro.

Import file is empty When using file import, the file does In the physical layer configuration,
not contain data. ensure the file import name is
correct.
Ensure proper data is in import file.
Import file is not found or file When using file import, the file name In the physical layer configuration,
contents invalid or path is incorrect. ensure the file import name and path
are correct.
Incompatible Family. When a specimen exists in LabPro Ensure the family stored for the
Appropriate family was used. and no organism or family is stored isolate in LabPro is correct.
for the isolate and a MICroSTREP
plus, Rapid Yeast ID, or HNID panel
order is received without an
organism. LabPro received a family
that is incompatible with the panel
type.
Incompatible Family for The test group received is Manually add or download the
existing Test Group : <Test incompatible with the test group correct test group.
Group Code> stored for the isolate.
Incompatible Organism for The organism received is Check the isolate and confirm the
existing Test Group: <Test incompatible with the test group correct organism.
Group Code> stored for the isolate.
Incompatible Test Group: The test group order received from Manually add or download the
<Patient ID>, <Specimen #>, the LIS is incompatible with the test correct test group.
<Isolate #>, <Test Group groups stored for the isolate.
Code>
Incomplete Record Received Values received were not complete Check the transmission cable and
enough to recognize as a valid connection.
record. This normally occurs if the Check the route of the transmission
transmission cable is faulty or if the cable.
transmission parameters are
incorrectly set up. Verify protocol character definitions.
Occurs when an ETX was not
received before the next STX.
Invalid data type: <record ID>, This occurs when the Numeric Only Check the cross-reference table
<field ID> option is set for a cross-reference configuration and check the
table and LabPro code contains customization table.
alpha characters.
Invalid Extra Test/Test Group The test group and extra test result The test group is stored. Manually
combination are incompatible. add the extra test result.

Invalid value for DOB flag When the LIS is using a 2-digit Check if the LIS is sending the
(DOB: Date of Birth) format for the date (YY) and the DOB correct character in the DOB field:
field is blank. acceptable characters are Y or N.
Y (Yes) indicates that the patient’s
DOB is prior to January 1, 1900, or
later than December 31, 1999
N (No) indicates the patient’s DOB is
between January 1, 1900 and
December 31, 1999.
Or if possible, change format to a
4-digit year.
Maximum number of An optional field exceeds the Check the record in LabPro.
characters has been maximum length.
exceeded – field truncated: The field is truncated. The Interface
<record ID>, <field ID>. Log shows the record and field.
Maximum number of A required field exceeds the
characters has been maximum length.
exceeded – field rejected: A numeric field exceeds the
<record ID>, <field ID>. maximum length.
Maximum record length of 255 A record exceeds the 255-character Suppress from transmission
characters exceeded: <record frame size limit. unnecessary fields.
ID>. Too many data elements cross-
referenced with large fields.
The transmission cable may be
faulty.
Modem connection failed. The modem is operational but did not
respond to the latest command. This
is a probable modem hardware error.
Modem not responding. Modem is not connected to a Check connections to serial port on
working telephone line or not LabPro and on modem.
connected to the correct serial port. Check phone jack.
Modem not plugged in or turned on. Make sure the serial port is
configured correctly.
Check power connections and turn
on modem.
No response from external LabPro requested information from Ensure the receiving system is ready
device an LIS and received no response. to receive data.
Some laboratory information systems
do not support all available LabPro
options, or the systems are not
designed to respond to a request for
information.
The interface cable is plugged into Position the cable in the correct
the wrong location on the back of the location on the LabPro computer.
LabPro computer.

No specimens found in This occurs when you enable Auto- No available data that meets the
requested range Transmit and at the scheduled time search criteria at the time of
no specimens match the search transmission.
criteria.
or
When you initiate a manual transmit
and no specimens are found
matching the selected criteria.
Obsolete Test Group <PatID>, This occurs when LabPro receives a Update your LIS with the current test
<SpecID>, <IsoID>, test group, from the LIS, that is group information.
<TestGroupCode>. obsolete. If test group code is cross-
LabPro does not store the test group, referenced, delete this test group
however, all other isolate data is code cross-reference entry.
stored.
Parity Error This error may occur when the Check the physical and data link
interface program is attempting to layer configurations. Change the
receive information from the LIS and parity to match the other healthcare
settings are incorrect in the data link computer system.
and/or physical layer.
If these settings are correct then the
problem most likely resides in the
connectors).
Patient ID in specimen record Check the LIS to ensure the patient
does not match patient ID in ID is transmitted correctly.
patient record
Received specimen not saved If a received specimen already exists If the LIS sends repeating specimen
in LabPro and belongs to a different numbers, configure specimen
Patient ID number, the new tagging.
specimen record is rejected and this
message is logged.
Record already exists, record Patient, specimen, isolate record Don’t send completed results to
not updated <key values> received that already exists in the LabPro more than one time.
database with results.
If LabPro receives a specimen or
isolate that already exists, the isolate
record is not saved and this
message is logged.
Record in use – no update LabPro is trying to update a record Close the program using the record
occurred: <key values> that another LabPro program is and retransmit data.
using.

Records repeated (NAK’ed) If Ack/Nak protocol is used and a No action needed. Informational
during last operation: <x>. faulty record(s) were detected and message only.
Note: X reflects the number of corrected during a transmission, this
records repeated. message appears at the end of the
transmission session. It is merely
designed to inform you that the
connectors) appears to be
developing faults.
Faulty records were detected &
corrected during a transmission.
Required field missing: LabPro did not receive a required Check that the LIS is sending the
<record ID>, <field ID> field in the listed record-for example, required information.
record identifier.
Required record missing: LabPro did not receive a required Check that the LIS is sending the
<record type> record or record is out of hierarchical required information.
order.
Serial Port no longer If the default or previously selected Verify the appropriate serial port is
operational. serial port does not exist or is no used.
longer functional, this message Change cable connection to a
appears. functional serial port.
Specimen # in isolate record Check the LIS to ensure the
does not match specimen # in specimen # is transmitted correctly.
specimen record: <Specimen
#>, <Isolate #>
Specimen invalid after tagging If specimen tagging is enabled, when Check the specimen-tagging
removed the device transmits the specimen configuration for each device.
the tag is stripped from the specimen
#.
This error occurs when one device
receives the specimen and another
device sends the specimen and the
removal of the tags results in a blank
specimen #.
Specimen previously assigned A specimen record is received for a Check the LIS to ensure the
to a different Patient ID, data specimen stored in LabPro and the specimen and patient data is correct.
not saved patient IDs do not match.
Stopped sending without A timeout occurred while receiving a Check the LIS, the transmission was
proper EOT transmission, and an EOT or a not completed.
terminating ‘L’ record was not
received.
STX character expected but When LabPro receives data, an Check the transmission cable and
not received: <character <STX> character always precedes a connection.
received> record. If at the beginning of a Check the route of the transmission
transmission an <STX> character is cable.
not received, this error occurs.
Verify protocol character definitions.

TAPI already open, dialing, or An attempt was made to perform a Wait until the modem is not busy
answering modem operation before the and the device returns to idle then
previous one finished. try to transmit.
Telephone number is missing The telephone number is not Enter the telephone number in the
configured in the physical layer. physical layer configuration.
The frame number does not Frame number is out of sequence or Check to be sure the LIS is
match the expected value incorrect. calculating the frame numbers
correctly.
Check the transmission cable and
connection.
Check the route of the transmission
cable.
Time out occurred Insufficient time allotted for data Increase the time-out period in serial
transmission before error is reported. configuration.
Timeout occurred - XON Incorrect protocol selected. Verify protocol settings. Check for
character expected but not the XON character in the Interface
received Log (default = [DC1]).
Time-out- error occurred while The LabPro interface is sending a Check log file to confirm that LabPro
transmitting: ACK/NAK record to the other healthcare did send a record.
character expected but not computer system and is not getting Verify that the receiving system is up
received. any acknowledgment that the data and in a transmit/receive mode.
has been received.
Reconfirm all of the other healthcare
computer system’s communication
parameters and make sure they
match on LabPro.
To confirm data is being sent, use a
Mini Tester first and the serial port
on the back of the LabPro computer
and then at the point where the
cable connects into the port.
Timeout occurred – CTS line This occurs when the CTS/RTS The null modem cable is not pinned
held low protocol is used. The transmission to accommodate RTS/CTS protocol.
line is not ready or a hardware The reciprocal interface system is
protocol timeout occurred while not using RTS/CTS protocol
sending data.
The reciprocal interface system uses
RTS/CTS protocol and holds their
RTS line low for a period of time that
exceeds the user-specified time-out.
Timeout occurred – DSR line This occurs when the DSR/DTR
held low protocol is used. The transmission
line is not ready or a hardware
protocol timeout occurred while
sending data.

Timeout occurred- Modem not The modem is not connected to a Check connections to the serial port.
responding working telephone line or not Check the phone jack.
connected to the correct serial port.
Compare serial port setting with
Modem not plugged in or turned on. actual. These must agree.
Check the power connections and
turn modem on.
Too many characters The number of characters is greater Check with the LIS vendor to make
than the custom frame size. sure the frame size is not greater
than the custom frame size.
Transmission stopped The transmission was stopped.
Transmission stopped by User The transmission was manually
stopped.
Unexpected character LabPro received an incorrect Check the LIS to ensure
received response from the LIS transmission follows Japan Device
datastream specifications.
Check the transmission cable and
connection.
Check the route of the transmission
cable.
Unknown or out of sequence Record is out of hierarchical order or Check the LIS to ensure
Japan Device record an unknown record was received. transmission follows Japan Device
datastream specifications.
Unknown record type LabPro received a record type that is Check the Interface Log for the
received: <type> not valid. The record identifier is record, and then check that the LIS
unknown. is sending the required information.
Unsupported character(s) This error occurs when LabPro Check the patient ID in the LIS to
received in the Patient ID field receives the following characters in ensure that only numbers and upper
the patient ID field: case letters are used. Use only valid
á, à, â, ê, ë, è, ï, î, ì, í, ô, ò, ó, û, ù, upper case letters.
and ú. For a list of supported characters,
The LabPro interface: see the LabPro Interface
 Forces all text characters to Implementation Guide.
upper case in the patient ID field.
 Supports only the ASCII
characters 32-126 and 128 –253.
 Forces the characters listed
above to upper case and converts
them to characters within the
ASCII character set.

Unsupported character(s) This error occurs when LabPro Check the specimen number in the
received in the Specimen receives the following characters in LIS to ensure that only numbers and
Number field the specimen number field: upper case letters are used. Use
á, à, â, ê, ë, è, ï, î, ì, í, ô, ò, ó, û, ù, only valid upper case letters.
 Forces all text characters to Implementation Guide.
upper case in the specimen
number field.
Unsupported character(s) This error occurs when LabPro Check the isolate number in the LIS
received in the Isolate Number receives the following characters in to ensure that only numbers and
field the isolate number field: upper case letters are used. Use
á, à, â, ê, ë, è, ï, î, ì, í, ô, ò, ó, û, ù, only valid upper case letters.
Implementation Guide.
 Forces all text characters to
upper case in the isolate number
field.

Working with Patient Orders
Depending on your system configuration, LabPro either receives patient orders from a laboratory information
system (LIS) or you must enter patient orders directly in LabPro. The following illustration shows the patient
order process.
9020-7569, Rev. A Working with Patient Orders  6-1

Entering Patient Orders
This section explains how to use worklists and add patient orders to LabPro.
Use Worklists
The Worklist area of the Patient Order Entry window allows you to display and work with a specific set of
specimens. You can either display all specimens received from an LIS without isolates or test groups, or run a
patient query to select only those specimens defined by the query. LabPro refreshes or updates the worklist
each time you open the Patient Order Entry window. LabPro does not automatically refresh the worklist when
the window is open, but you can manually refresh the data or rerun a query at any time. LabPro removes a
specimen from the worklist when: you add an isolate or test group and save the data; you select a specimen on
the worklist and use the Remove command; or the specimen is finalized.
To list LIS specimens received without isolates and/or test groups

1. Choose one of the following options to display specimens from the latest LIS download.
 If the Patient Order Entry window is not open:
 On the Command Center, click Patient Order Entry.
 On the Patient Order Entry window, if the Worklist area is hidden, click Show/Hide Worklist.
 If the Interface Download option is selected, LabPro displays the latest LIS specimens received.
If the Query option is selected, click Interface Download.
 If the Patient Order Entry window is already open:
 If the Worklist area is hidden, click Show/Hide Worklist.
 Click Interface Download. If the Interface Download option is already selected, click
Refresh/Run to update the worklist.
To Do this
Sort the worklist or change the Click a column heading.
ascending/descending order
Display specimen details Double-click a specimen in the worklist.
Remove one or more Right-click a specimen on the Interface Download worklist, and click
specimens Remove on the shortcut menu. To remove multiple specimens, press
Ctrl and click each specimen. Right-click any selected specimen and
click Remove. On the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Add or edit specimen, patient, See the appropriate section later in this chapter.
isolate, or test group
information
6-2  Working with Patient Orders 9020-7569, Rev. A

To select a specific set of specimens for the worklist
1. If the Patient Order Entry window is not open, on the Command Center, click Patient Order Entry.
 If the Worklist area of the Patient Order Entry window is hidden, click Show/Hide Worklist. The
worklist displays on the left side of the window.
2. In the Worklist area, click Query and do one of the following.
To Do this
Select specimens based on the Click Refresh/Run.
query rule shown in the Query
box
Select a different query Click the Query Lookup button. On the Patient Query Rules window,
double-click a query. In the Worklist area of the Patient Order Entry
window, click Refresh/Run.
Note: To view or edit a patient query, on the Patient Query Rules
window, right-click the query and click Edit on the shortcut menu. To
add a new query, see “Defining Queries and Drug Test Suppression
Rules.”
To Do this
Sort the worklist by topic or Click a column heading.
change the ascending/
descending order
Display specimen details Double-click a specimen in the worklist.
Add or edit specimen, patient, See the appropriate section later in this chapter.
isolate, or test group
information
Add Patient Orders

This section describes how to add new specimens, specimen tests, isolates and test groups. It is recommended
that you add a Ward of Isolation and a Source to each specimen when these boxes appear on the Patient
Order Entry window. LabPro needs the source to correctly calculate antimicrobial interpretations based on
whether the source is urine or systemic. When you consistently enter a ward of isolation, you can determine
where infections originate in a particular site, especially if the infection is nosocomial in origin.
If you roll over specimen numbers and reuse the same specimen number, in most cases, you must add a
Collect Date so LabPro can differentiate one specimen from another.

To add a new specimen
1. On the Command Center, click Patient Order Entry and the Patient Order Entry window appears.
2. Type a number in the Specimen box and press Enter.
LabPro checks if the specimen number exists in the database.
 If a matching specimen number is found, the data for that specimen appears. Make sure you entered
the specimen number correctly. If not, click Clear on the toolbar, and then click Clear Specimen.
Type the correct specimen number.
3. Type a number in the Patient ID box and press Enter.
LabPro checks if the patient ID exists in the database.
 If a match is found, Edit Patient displays in the upper-right corner and the available patient data
appears.
4. If applicable, type information in each optional specimen- and patient-related box.
To Do this
Add one comment Type a valid comment code and press Tab or Enter.
Add multiple comments In a Comments box, click the Editor button. On the Selected
Comments box, in the first blank row, type a valid code and press
Enter—or, click the Lookup button and double-click an item on the
Comments table. Repeat these steps to add other comments. When
finished, click OK. To remove a comment, select the comment and then
click Remove.
Note: When you return to the Patient Order Entry window, only the first
comment displays in the Comments box.
Add extensive free text In the Free Text box, click the Editor button. Enter and edit text using
basic text processing commands. When finished, click OK.
Enter a date or time Type the date or time in the established format. For details, see “Enter
Times” or “Enter Dates.”
Japan Only: If LabPro is customized to report JSC IV, PO, and IM breakpoints based on a disease state,
click the Disease State Lookup button and double-click an item on the Disease State window.
To Do this
Add a new isolate and order See “To add new isolates and test groups.”
tests
Add a specimen test See “To add specimen tests and observations.”
Save the specimen and clear Click Save.
the Patient Order Entry
window
Clear the Patient Order Entry Click Clear on the toolbar, and then click Clear Specimen. On the
window without saving the confirmation message, click No.
specimen and patient data

To add new isolates and test groups
The following steps describe how to add isolates and orders to existing specimens. When you add an order,
you essentially add a panel test group, an offline test, or a combination of panels and/or offline tests. You
cannot add more than one test group for the same isolate if the orders contain more than one of the same tests
or test groups.
1. Do one of the following to display an existing specimen:
 Add a specimen as described in the previous procedure.
 Enter a specimen number, or click the Specimen # Lookup button and then select a specimen from
the table. To view active specimens only on the Specimens table, on the Data menu, click Active
Specimens Only.
 If necessary, click Show/Hide Worklist to display the Worklist area, click Refresh\Run to update the
list, or select another query. Double-click a specimen on the worklist.
2. If desired, enter additional specimen and patient data.
3. On the Isolate Tests tab, type up to three alphanumeric characters in the Isolate box.
Note: By default, LabPro bypasses the Exclude from Epi check box. To exclude test results for this
isolate from epidemiology searches and reports, select the Exclude from Epi check box.
4. In the Order box, type a valid order code—or click the Order Lookup button and then double-click a
code in the Orders table.
5. To enter an organism, family, or additional test result, type a valid code in an available text box, or click
the Lookup button and then double-click a code in the associated table.
Important: If you enter an organism for an ID or Combo panel, LabPro replaces the organism when
panel results are received from the WalkAway instrument or saved to the database after reading a panel
manually or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
6. If optional text boxes are available, enter valid codes, or use the Lookup buttons to select codes from the
associated tables.
7. Click Accept Isolate to add the isolate to the isolates and test groups list, or click Clear Isolate and click
No on the confirmation dialog box.
8. If desired, repeat steps 3 through 7 to add additional isolates.
Japan Only: You cannot add more than one order for each isolate.
9. Click Save.
To add specimen tests and observations

1. On the Patient Order Entry window, add a new specimen or recall an existing specimen as described in
the previous procedures.
2. On the Specimen Tests tab, click the Specimen Test Lookup button and double-click a test on the
Specimen Tests window.
3. To enter or edit test results, double-click a specimen test, or right-click a test and click Manual Read on
the shortcut menu.

4. On the Specimen Test Results dialog box, complete any of the following actions.
To Do this
Add results for a Free Text Type results in the Results box.
type specimen test
Click Final in the Status area to finalize the specimen test. All specimen
tests must have a Final status before the specimen can be finalized.
Add observations and Press Insert to add the first row.
quantitations for a Code
In the Observation column, type a code—or, press F3 or click the
type specimen test
Lookup button and select a code from the table. Press Enter to move to
the Quantitation column.
Note: You can press Tab to move from column to column, but Lookup
buttons do not display. To display a Lookup button, press Enter while
positioned in a cell, or click inside the cell.
In the Quantitation column, type a code—or, press F3 or click the
Lookup button and select a code from the table. Press Enter.
In the Result Date column, type a date, or click the Lookup button and
select a date from the calendar. Press Enter.
Note: Press Insert to add a row above a selected row, or press Ctrl +
Insert to add a row after the last row.
To finalize a specimen test, click Final in the Status area. Specimen
tests must have a Final status before the specimen can be finalized.
To delete an item of information, right-click the item to select it, and
click Delete on the shortcut menu. On the confirmation dialog box, click
OK.
5. When finished, click OK to return to the Specimen Tests tab.
Changing Patient Orders

The procedure in this section describes how to edit an existing patient order; delete a specimen, specimen test,
isolate, or test group from an order; and finalize a specimen, specimen test, or isolate.
Edit a Patient Order

1. On the Patient Order Entry window, do one of the following to recall a specimen:
 Type a specimen number and press Enter—or click the Specimen Lookup button and double-click a
specimen in the Specimens table. On the Specimens table, to view only active specimens, click
Active Specimens Only on the Data menu.
 If necessary, click Show/Hide Worklist to display the Worklist area. Click Refresh\Run to update
the list or select another query, if desired. Double-click a specimen on the worklist.

2. Choose any of the following actions to edit specimen and patient information.
To edit Do this
The specimen number Select the existing number, and then type the new number, or use basic text
editing functions.
The patient ID See “Edit a Patient ID.”
Most text boxes Type the new code and press Enter, or click the Lookup button and select a
code from the table.
To delete information, position the pointer in the box and press Delete—or if
necessary, select the information and then press Delete.
Dates and times Type a date or time in the specified format. For details, see “Enter Dates” or
“Enter Times.”
Free text Use basic text editing functions to modify text. To edit extensive text, click the
Editor button on the right side of the Free Text box.
Comments Click the Button on the right side of the Comments box to display the Selected
Comments dialog box.
Click the first blank line to add a new comment, or click an existing comment to
change a comment. Then, type a valid comment code and press Enter, or click
the Lookup button and select a code from the Comments table. To delete a
comment from the Selected Comments dialog box, click the comment to select
it, and then click Remove. When all edits are complete, click OK.
3. To recall an isolate, on the Isolate Tests tab, double-click the isolate in the isolates and test groups list.
Do any of the following to edit isolate and test group information.
To Do this
Edit the isolate Select the entry in the Isolate box, and type the new number or letter.
number
Order additional tests In the Order box, type a code—or click the Lookup button and double-click an
for the isolate order in the Orders table.
Note: You cannot change a test group that has already been accepted for an
isolate. Instead, delete the test group and then add the new one.
Change the organism, In the appropriate box, type a new code and press Enter—or click the Lookup
family, additional test button and then double-click an item in the table. To delete information, select
result, or isolate tech the text in a box and press Delete.
Add or change free Edit the same as patient and specimen free text and comments.
text or comments
Accept the isolate Click Accept Isolate—or click Clear Isolate, and click No on the confirmation
changes or cancel the dialog box. If necessary, repeat step 3 to change data for another isolate.
changes

4. To recall a specimen test, on the Specimen Tests tab, double-click a specimen test. On the Specimen
Test Results window, do any of the following to edit specimen test information.
To Do this
Edit free text results Use basic text processing features. Right-click in the Results box to display a
shortcut menu.
Edit observations, Type a code or date in the column—or, press F3 or click the Lookup button to
quantitations, and result display a table or calendar, and then select a code or date. Press Enter to move
dates to the next column.
Note: You can press Tab to move from column to column, but Lookup buttons
do not display. If you prefer to use the Tab key, press Enter while positioned in
a cell or click inside a cell to display the Lookup button.
 To add a row above the pointer position, press Insert. To add a row after the
last row, press Ctrl + Insert.
 To delete a specimen test result, right-click the row, and click Delete on the
shortcut menu. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Change the specimen In the Status area, click Final or Preliminary.
test status
Note: All specimen tests must have a Final status before the specimen can be
finalized. If you change the status for a specimen test from Final to Preliminary,
LabPro automatically sets the specimen status to Preliminary.
Return to the Click OK. If applicable, repeat step 4 to edit another specimen test.
Specimen Tests tab
5. Click Save to save the specimen and clear the window—or, to clear the window without saving the
changes, click Clear Specimen. When the confirmation message appears, click No.
 If you changed an item of patient or specimen information that may be used in a drug suppression or
AlertEX System rule, LabPro reprocesses the isolate results for this specimen when you click Save.
Reprocessing the results clears all manually entered interpretations and reapplies drug test
suppression and AlertEX System rules. Use the Patient Review and Edit feature to review the
reprocessed results.
 If you changed an item of patient information that might cause a drug suppression or AlertEX System
rule to be applied to—or removed from—other specimens belonging to the same patient, the
Modified Patient dialog box appears.
 To print the information on the Modified Patient dialog box, click Print. When the Print dialog
box appears, click OK. To return to the Patient Order Entry window, click Continue. LabPro
saves the changes you made on the Patient Order Entry window and clears the window.
 To review each specimen, recalculate drug suppressions, and if applicable, reapply Alert System
rules, see “Retrieving Stored Specimens.”

Delete a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test Group
1. On the Patient Order Entry window, recall a specimen.
2. Do any of the following:
To Do this
Delete a specimen Click Delete, and then click Delete Specimen. When the confirmation message
appears, click OK to delete the specimen.
Delete a specimen test On the Specimen Tests tab, right-click a test and click Delete Specimen Test
on the shortcut menu.
Delete an isolate or On the Isolate Tests tab, right-click an isolate and then click Delete
test group Isolate/Test Group. The Delete Isolate/Test Group dialog box appears. Click
Delete Isolate or Delete Test Group.
Note: If the Delete Isolate/Test Group function is not available, the isolate
selected in the isolates and test groups list does not match the isolate/test group
displayed in the Isolate area. Accept or clear the isolate and repeat step 2.
Japan Only: If LabPro is interfaced with another information system, do not
delete test groups; delete isolates only.
Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, or Isolate

LabPro finalizes specimen data when no additional test results are expected—that is, when all associated
specimen tests, isolates, and test groups are finalized. Use the following procedure to manually finalize a
specimen, specimen test, or isolate.
1. On the Patient Order Entry window, do one of the following to recall a specimen:
 Type a specimen number and press Enter—or click the Lookup button and double-click a specimen
on the Specimens table.
 Double-click a specimen on the worklist. If the worklist is hidden, click Show/Hide Worklist.
2. Choose one of the following options.
To Do this
Finalize a specimen Make sure all specimen tests have a Final status and no isolates exist for the
specimen. Click Finalize Specimen or Isolates, and then click Finalize
Specimen. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Finalize a specimen On the Specimen Tests tab, double-click a specimen test. On the Specimen
test Test Results window, in the Status area, click Final and then click OK.
Finalize an isolate Make sure no test groups are ordered for the isolate. On the Isolates tab, on the
isolates and test groups list, right-click an isolate, and then click Finalize Isolate
on the shortcut menu. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Note: If the Finalize Isolates option is not available and the selected isolate
does not match the isolate displayed in the Isolates area, click Clear Isolate or
Accept Isolate and then repeat step 2.

Edit a Patient ID
This section describes how to edit a patient ID for a set of demographics and how to change the patient
associated with an individual specimen. When you change the patient ID for a set of demographics, and
specimens with the old patient ID exist, LabPro updates the patient ID for these specimens too.
To change the patient ID for a set of demographics

This procedure assumes a specimen is displayed on the Patient Order Entry window, and you want to change
the patient ID for the set of patient demographics you see.
1. On the Data menu, click Change Patient ID. The Change Patient ID dialog box appears.
2. In the Change To box, type a unique patient ID and click OK.
3. When finished updating the patient order, click Save.
 If multiple specimens are associated with the original patient ID, the specimens display on the
Modified Patient dialog box.
To Do this
Print the specimen list Click Print. On the Print dialog box, click OK.
Change the patient ID for the specimens Click Continue.
shown
Leave the patient ID unchanged on all Click Cancel.
specimens
To change the patient associated with a specimen

This procedure assumes a specimen is displayed on the Patient Order Entry window, and you want to change
the patient ID for this specimen only.
1. On the Patient Order Entry window, click Clear on the toolbar, and then click Clear Patient.
2. Type a new ID in the Patient ID box and press Enter—or click the Patient ID Lookup button and then
double-click a patient in the Patients table.
 If the patient ID exists in LabPro, all available information displays.
 If the ID is for a new patient, add optional patient information, if any.
3. Click Save to store the changes.

Reusing Specimen Numbers
LabPro differentiates one patient order from another by the specimen number and collect date; you can create
patient orders with the same specimen number, but the collect date must be unique. If you periodically
rollover specimen numbers at your site, be sure to enter a collect date each time you use an existing specimen
number in a new patient order.
1. On the Command Center, click Patient Order Entry.
2. On the Patient Order Entry window, type a number in the Specimen box and press Enter.
Depending on how LabPro is customized, LabPro searches through all patient orders or only those with
active specimens to determine if the specimen number already exists.
 If LabPro finds one patient order with the same specimen number, the information for that specimen
appears. To reuse the same specimen number for a new specimen, on the Data menu, click New
Specimen.
 If LabPro finds more than one patient order with the same specimen number, the Duplicate Specimen
Numbers window displays. Click New Specimen.
3. Add the rest of the patient order per normal procedure. Be sure to enter a date in the Collect Date box.
Important: LabPro considers a blank collect date unique. You cannot save a new patient order that
reuses an existing specimen number if both orders have a blank collect date.
4. When you finish entering the patient order, click Save.
 LabPro searches the database to be sure the combination is unique. If a patient order with a matching
specimen number and collect date is found, a message advises you to change one or the other. Click
OK, change the specimen number or the collect date, and then click Save.

Processing Panels
This chapter describes how to process panels in a WalkAway or autoSCAN-4 instrument and how to read a
panel manually. Instructions for resolving panel processing alerts and exception messages are provided at the
end of this chapter.
Processing Panels in a WalkAway Instrument

You can monitor and control most WalkAway panel processing functions on the WalkAway Monitor.
The WalkAway box in the upper-left corner displays the name of a configured WalkAway instrument. The
instrument status, instrument access, and the information on the tabs apply to the instrument selected in the
WalkAway box. The instrument status area, also in the upper-left corner, displays a general status message for
each configured WalkAway instrument.
The Access area controls access to the WalkAway instrument when you want to load or unload panels or
perform instrument maintenance.
The WalkAway Monitor contains four main tabs—WalkAway Status, Load Status, Exception Status, and
Maintenance.
 The WalkAway Status tab displays a quick view of panel and instrument status. WalkAway instrument
errors, new panel processing alerts and exceptions, and communication failures display in the Error
conditions area.
 The Load Status tab displays more detailed panel status information. On this tab, you can reorder, delete,
or abandon a panel.
 The Exception Status tab displays more detailed information on panels with processing exceptions or
AlertEX System messages. You can also reorder, delete, or abandon a panel on this tab.
 The Maintenance tab is used to position instrument components for cleaning, control manual reagent
purges, and perform other maintenance functions.
From the three status tabs, you can open the Results (and QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box to
review or edit panel results and resolve exceptions.
The following workflow example summarizes the main tasks involved in processing MicroScan panels in a
WalkAway instrument. It is included for information purposes only as each workflow is site-specific. The
procedures in this section are presented in the same workflow order.
Note: In the following example, exception processing occurs after panels are unloaded. Remember, however,
that exceptions may occur at any time during panel processing.
9020-7569, Rev. A Processing Panels  7-1

Enter additional
Enter patient LabPro receives patient Information
orders from LIS
No information
orders into LIS* complete?
into LabPro
LIS
Yes
Enter patient or
Non- Print bar code
Start LIS
QC orders
labels
into LabPro
Load panels; Request/receive

Inoculate Apply bar code
end WalkAway access to
panels labels to panels
access WalkAway
WalkAway scans
bar codes
Bar code Unread

No
read error? panels?
No
Yes Yes
Identify panel to Resolve unread

WalkAway panels
WalkAway processes
panels
Unload panels; Request/receive

WalkAway completes Monitor panel
end WalkAway access to panel processing status
access WalkAway
Print reports
Any
LabPro stores and/or transmit
exceptions? No
panel results panel results
to LIS
Yes
Abandon,
Resolve Acceptable
No delete, or End
exceptions results?
reorder panel
Yes
Print reports
Save and store
and/or transmit
results in
panel results
LabPro
to LIS
* LIS customers enter QC orders manually in LabPro.
7-2  Processing Panels 9020-7569, Rev. A

Access the WalkAway Monitor
You can access the WalkAway Monitor in any of the following ways:
 On the Command Center, click WalkAway Monitor.
 On the right of the Windows taskbar, double-click the WalkAway Monitor symbol—or right-click the
symbol and click Open.
Print Bar Code Labels

When LabPro receives new WalkAway panel orders, each panel appears on the WalkAway Bar Codes
window. When the panel orders are complete—that is, all required isolate information has been received or
entered—you can print bar code labels and affix them to the panels during panel setup. After loading the
panels in the instrument, the bar code scanner reads each bar code to identify the specimen/lot, isolate, and
panel type.
Note: If a patient order is transmitted without an isolate or test group, you must enter the isolate or test group
manually on the Patient Order Entry window.
To confirm that isolate information is complete

1. On the Command Center, click WalkAway Bar Codes. The WalkAway Bar Codes window displays the
test groups ordered for WalkAway processing. Patient panel orders always appear before QC panels.
Note: The symbol Ø next to a panel indicates that additional isolate information is required.
2. Click the first incomplete panel—if any—to select it, and then look at the boxes in the Patient Isolate
Detail area to determine where to enter additional isolate information.
3. If Required appears in a box, type the appropriate information in the box—or click the Lookup button and
double-click an item on the table.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each incomplete panel on the WalkAway Bar Codes window. You may click
Previous or Next to select the panels in backward or forward sequence.
Note: Click Refresh at any time to add any new panels that may have been downloaded via the interface.
5. To clear or delete a panel, right-click the panel, and then click Clear or Delete on the shortcut menu.
When the confirmation box appears, click OK.
Note: A Rapid Fluorogenic panel cannot be cleared.
To print bar code labels or the New WalkAway Orders Report

1. On the WalkAway Bar Codes window, click Print. The Print dialog box appears.
2. Do the following as needed:
 To change the sort order of the bar code labels to be printed or the information on the New
WalkAway Orders Report, click the Sort Order arrow. On the drop-down list, click Order
Sequence, Specimen/Lot #, Panel Type, Isolate Tech, or Source to select the sort order. Bar code
labels for patient panels always appear before those for QC panels.
 To print bar code labels for all panels that have complete information, click Bar Codes, and then
click Print.
 To print the New WalkAway Orders Report, click New WalkAway Orders Report, and then click
Print.

 To test the alignment of a bar code on a label, click Alignment Bar Code, and then click Print. The
bar code printer prints one bar code label. If necessary, adjust the bar code labels in the printer and
print another alignment label until the bar code is aligned on the label.
3. Click Close to return to the WalkAway Bar Codes window. Any remaining panels are incomplete or new.
Reprint Bar Code Labels

Use this procedure to reprint bar code labels that were damaged or printed incorrectly.
1. On the WalkAway Bar Codes window, click Reprint Bar Codes.
To Do this
Sort the panels differently Click the Specimen/Lot #, Panel Type, or Print Date column heading
to select the sort order, or right-click anywhere in the list and then click
Sort on the shortcut menu. Patient panels always appear before QC
panels.
Print an alignment bar code Click Align.
label
The bar code printer prints one bar code label. If necessary, adjust the
bar code labels in the printer and print another alignment label until the
bar code is aligned on the label.
3. Reprint bar code labels as needed.
To reprint Do this
One bar code label Click the appropriate panel to select it, and then click Print.
Multiple bar code labels Press Ctrl, click each panel, and then click Print.
Bar code labels for all Right-click anywhere in the list, click Select All, and then click Print.
panels on the Reprint
Bar Codes dialog box
4. When finished, click Close to return to the WalkAway Bar Codes window.
Note: LabPro removes a panel from the Reprint Bar Codes dialog box when the WalkAway instrument
identifies and begins processing the panel or if the panel is abandoned.
Affix Bar Code Labels to MicroScan Panels

It is recommended that you affix the bar code labels before inoculating the panels.
1. Hold the panel with the MicroScan logo on the right side nearest you.
2. Affix the bar code label securely to the long side of the panel nearest you and the MicroScan logo. Make
sure that the label is upright and centered.
CAUTION
Do not extend the bar code label beyond the top edge of the panel. If any part of the label extends over
the top of the panel, the WalkAway instrument may jam.
3. Repeat this procedure for all panels to be processed in a WalkAway instrument.

Identify Panels to the Instrument if the Bar Code Printer Malfunctions
If the bar code printer is not working, use this procedure to set the panel status to Barcoded and identify
panels to the WalkAway instrument. You can also use this procedure if the bar code reader inside the
instrument is not working. If you are loading a lot of panels, this procedure works best with two people.
1. For each panel you want to identify, create a simulated bar code label. To do this, draw black vertical
lines on a blank bar code label or use a previously printed alignment label.
2. Write the specimen or lot number and isolate information on each simulated bar code label and affix them
to the panels.
3. On the WalkAway Bar Codes window, click the Data menu, and click Update Status to Bar Coded.
4. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes and close the WalkAway Bar Codes window.
5. On the Command Center, click WalkAway Monitor.
 If you have two configured WalkAway instruments and one has no available tower slots, select the
other instrument in the WalkAway box. The WalkAway Status tab then displays the tower slots for
the selected instrument.
6. Request access to the WalkAway instrument.
7. When access is granted and the doors unlock, click the WalkAway Status tab, and then click the ID to
WalkAway tab.
8. Load the panels into the instrument.
As you load each panel into an available tower slot, click and drag the corresponding specimen/lot
number and isolate number from the ID to WalkAway tab to the corresponding tower and slot in the
WalkAway Status grid.
9. When you are finished loading and identifying panels to the WalkAway instrument, click Lock Door to
terminate access to the instrument.
10. After the WalkAway instrument finishes scanning the panel bar codes, click Send on the ID to WalkAway
tab.
11. Review the WalkAway Status grid to be sure there are no bar code read errors.
Request Access to the WalkAway Instrument

Before you can load panels into—or unload panels from—the WalkAway instrument, you must request access
to avoid interrupting scheduled activities. If LabPro does not grant access immediately, you can wait for
access or cancel the request. Use the Quick Access procedure if your WalkAway instrument is a WalkAway SI
model and you need no more than three minutes to load or unload a small batch of panels. Use the LabPro
procedure if your WalkAway instrument is not a WalkAway SI or you need more than three minutes access.
Note: Quick Access is not available while the WalkAway instrument scans bar code labels.
To request Quick Access to a WalkAway SI instrument

1. On the front panel of the WalkAway instrument, press the Quick Access button (lock symbol).
 If Quick Access is not granted immediately, the instrument doors do not unlock and the LED light at
the right of the panel access door remains amber. The instrument status display reads Unable to
Access at This Time. Wait a few minutes and retry Quick Access or request access through LabPro.

 If Quick Access is granted, the instrument doors unlock and the LED light turns green. The
WalkAway Monitor instrument status displays the message Accessed. The Access area displays the
message Time until access overtime: 3:00 and counts down the number of minutes and seconds
available for access.
2. When access is granted and the instrument doors unlock, open the panel access door on the front of the
To request access to the WalkAway instrument via LabPro

1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the WalkAway Status, Load Status, or Exception Status tab. Do not
click the Maintenance tab.
2. In the Access area, click the number of minutes required for access—1, 5, 15, or 30—and then click
Access.
 If access is not granted, the instrument doors do not unlock and the LED light at the right of the panel
access door remains amber. The Access area displays a message and counts down the time you must
wait for access. After the time counts down to zero, the instrument doors unlock. If you decide not to
wait, click Cancel.
Tip: If you requested 30 minutes and access was not granted, try a shorter time interval—for
example, 5 or 15 minutes.
 If access is granted, the instrument doors unlock and the LED light turns green. The Access area
displays a message and counts down the time available for access.
3. When access is granted and the instrument doors unlock, open the panel access door on the front of the
Load Panels into the WalkAway Instrument

1. Make sure that access to the instrument is granted, as described earlier in this chapter.
2. On the WalkAway instrument control panel, confirm that the tower facing the panel access door has empty
or available slots. If necessary, press the Tower Rotation Forward button or the Tower Rotation Reverse
button to position a tower with empty or available slots.
Note: When you press a rotation button, the doors lock, the towers rotate, and then the doors unlock.
3. When the instrument doors unlock, open the panel access door.
4. Look at the red LED light at the right of each tower slot.
 If the light is on, but is not blinking, the slot is empty.
 If the light is blinking, the slot contains a completed, aborted, or abandoned panel. You can remove
the panel to load a new panel into this slot.
 If the light is off, the slot contains a panel in process.
WARNING
If you open the panel access door and the LED status lights next to the tower slots are flashing at a very
fast rate, the door sensor may have failed to detect that the door is open.
Close the door, turn off the instrument, wait 30 seconds, and then turn on the instrument again. If the
lights are still flashing, call the Customer Care Center.

Tip: You can move a panel in process to another slot in the same tower, or a different tower within the
same WalkAway instrument—for example, you may want a tower to contain only panels still being
processed. It is recommended that you move the panel before terminating instrument access.
If you remove the panel from a tower slot and do not replace it before terminating access, LabPro
displays a Panel missing exception. You can resolve the exception by placing the panel into any tower
slot.
5. Hold a panel with tray lid so the bar code label is facing away from you.
6. Carefully and evenly insert the panel into a tower slot, aligning the lid with the tower slot cutouts.
7. Gently slide the panel and lid forward until the lid drops into place.
CAUTION
Make sure the lid drops into place. A panel jam will occur if the lid is not properly seated in the tower
slot.
8. Repeat this procedure for each panel to be loaded into a WalkAway instrument. You may have to open
and close the panel access door and rotate the towers several times.
9. When you are finished loading panels, close and lock the door to terminate access.
To lock the instrument doors, you may either press the Quick Access button on the instrument control
panel or click Lock Door on the WalkAway Monitor.
Important:
WalkAway Monitor displays the message ACCESS OVERTIME in the Access area. Quickly close
any opened instrument doors, and then press the Quick Access button or click Lock Door to
terminate access.
 If you terminate access without closing all instrument doors, the WalkAway Monitor displays a
message in the Access area indicating which door must be closed. Quickly close the instrument
door, and then press the Quick Access button or click Lock Door to terminate access.
Resolve Bar Code Read Errors

A bar code read error may occur after a panel is loaded into a WalkAway instrument—the instrument detects
the bar code label on the panel, but it cannot read the data encoded in the bar code. For example, the bar code
label is smudged, the print is too light, or the reader malfunctions or is out of alignment.
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the WalkAway Status tab.
To identify the tower slot location of any panel with a bar code read error, note the position of the bar
code read error symbol on the WalkAway Status grid.
2. Request access to the WalkAway instrument with the bar code read error. When access is granted,
position the corresponding tower behind the panel access door.
3. After the instrument doors unlock, open the panel access door and unload the panel from the instrument.
4. Find the specimen or lot number, isolate number, and panel type on the bar code label for the unloaded
panel.
5. On the WalkAway Status tab, click the ID to WalkAway tab.
6. From the ID to WalkAway tab, click and drag the correct panel information over the corresponding bar
code read error symbol on the WalkAway Status grid.

Note: To cancel this step, click and drag the panel from the WalkAway Status grid back to the ID to
WalkAway tab.
7. Reload the panel into the corresponding tower slot in the WalkAway instrument. Repeat this procedure
for each panel with a bar code read error.
8. When you are finished loading and identifying panels to the WalkAway instrument, click Lock Door to
terminate access to the instrument.
9. After the WalkAway instrument finishes scanning the panel bar codes, click Send on the ID to
WalkAway tab.
10. Review the WalkAway Status grid to ensure that all bar code read errors have been resolved.
 If LabPro successfully transfers the panel information to the WalkAway instrument, the WalkAway
Status grid displays the current processing status for the panel.
 If the panel information is not transferred to the instrument—for example, if the instrument loses
communication with LabPro, is performing scheduled activities, or has not finished scanning bar
codes—the WalkAway Status grid displays the Manually Identified symbol until LabPro transfers
the information.
Important: If the panel access door is opened in front of a tower holding a panel that was manually
identified to the WalkAway instrument, LabPro displays the panel on the Exception Status tab with the
exception Verify Panel. To resolve this exception, wait until panel processing is completed, verify that the
correct panel is in the tower slot, and then save the panel data on the Results (or QC Results)
Summary and Edit dialog box.
Resolve Unread Panels

On the WalkAway Monitor, a panel remains on the Unread Panels dialog box if:
 The panel was not loaded into a WalkAway instrument.
 The bar code reader cannot read the bar code label on the panel (bar code read error).
 The panel was loaded into the instrument, but the bar code reader cannot detect the bar code.
It is recommended that you resolve all bar code read errors before resolving unread panels.
1. Make sure instrument access is granted.
2. On the WalkAway Monitor, click Unread List.
 To print the list of unread panels, on the Unread Panels dialog box, click Print.
3. Review and resolve each unread panel as applicable.
If Then
A panel was not loaded into a WalkAway 1. Close the Unread Panels dialog box.
instrument, and the interval between panel
2. Load the panel into a WalkAway instrument.
setup and the start of incubation has not
exceeded the following guidelines: 3. Terminate access to the instrument.
 Rapid and Synergies plus panels—15 Note: If you decide to read the panel manually or in an
minutes autoSCAN-4 instrument, LabPro abandons the panel
 Dried Overnight panels—one hour from WalkAway processing and removes it from the
Unread Panels dialog box.

If Then
A panel was loaded into the WalkAway 1. Close the Unread Panels dialog box.
instrument, but the bar code reader cannot find
2. To find the panel in the instrument:
a bar code on the panel.
 On the WalkAway Status tab, look for the cells
representing empty tower slots.
 In the WalkAway instrument, check the
corresponding tower slots. If a red LED light is on
but there is a panel in the slot, that panel is
unread.
Note: If you have two configured WalkAway
instruments, you may have to check both
instruments.
3. Remove the unread panel from the instrument.
4. If the panel was loaded with the bar code label
facing the front of the instrument, reload the panel
correctly.
5. If necessary, identify the panel manually to the
instrument, as follows:
 On the WalkAway Status tab, click the ID to
WalkAway tab.
 From the ID to WalkAway tab, click and drag the
correct panel data to an available tower slot
represented on the WalkAway Status grid.
 Load the panel into the corresponding tower slot
in the instrument.
6. Terminate access to the instrument.
7. After the WalkAway instrument finishes scanning
the panel bar codes, click Send.
You do not want to process a panel 1. From the Unread Panels dialog box, right click the
panel and click Delete on the shortcut menu.
2. When the Delete Isolate/Test Group dialog box
appears, click Delete Test Group.
3. To close the Unread Panels dialog box, click
Close.
This procedure removes the panel from the Unread
Panels dialog box and the LabPro database.
Japan Only: If LabPro is interfaced with another
information system, do not delete test groups;
delete isolates only.

Monitor Instrument and Panel Status
It is recommended that you keep the WalkAway Status tab displayed to alert you to changes in instrument
and panel status, new exceptions, unreviewed critical alerts, time-critical exceptions, and communication
failures. It is important to check this area periodically to identify and resolve errors promptly.
If you need more detailed panel information, or if you want to reorder, delete, or abandon a panel, you can use
the Load Status tab. From either tab, you can access the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog
box to review, edit, and/or save results for a panel with a Hold, Aborted–Available Data, Aborted–Stored
Data, or Complete status.
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the WalkAway Status tab.
2. Check the instrument status area in the upper-left corner for general status messages. If the message
Check Status appears, find the corresponding error messages in the Error conditions area.
Important: If you have two configured WalkAway instruments and Check Status appears for either
instrument, make sure to select that instrument in the WalkAway box before checking the status on the
WalkAway Status tab.
3. In the Error conditions area, review and resolve any of the following messages or instrument errors.
To resolve Do this
New Exceptions Exist Click the Exception Status tab to review the exceptions and clear this error
and Reported message. Depending on the type of exception, resolve the exception immediately
Interpretation or after panel processing is completed. For additional information, see “Resolve
Changed messages WalkAway Panel Processing Exceptions.”
Unreviewed Critical Double-click the panel slot on the WalkAway Status tab and review the critical
Alerts Exist messages alert message on the Results Summary and Edit dialog box. For additional
information, see “To remove the unreviewed symbols for critical alert
messages.”
Time-Critical Double-click the panel slot on the WalkAway Status tab and resolve the Very
Exceptions Exist Rare Biotype, Low Probability ID, or Indole Required exception on the Results
messages Summary and Edit dialog box. For details, see “Resolving Panel Processing
Alerts and Exception Messages.”
Communications Note the numeric value contained in the error message. Make sure that the
Failure messages instrument and the power are turned on, and check the GPIB cable connection
on the back of the instrument. The numeric values are defined as follows:
1 Send timeout
2 Received timeout
3 Send garbled
4 Received garbled
5 DLE timeout
6 GPIB mismatch
7 GPIB not found

To resolve Do this
8 GPIB locked by another process

9 WalkAway instrument is locked by another process
10+ General error or the WalkAway instrument is busy
If the communication failure persists, call the Customer Care Center.
A WalkAway For a detailed list of WalkAway instrument errors and troubleshooting
instrument error instructions, see “LabPro Error Conditions for the WalkAway Instrument.”
4. To determine the status of a panel in the WalkAway instrument, look at the color of the corresponding cell
in the WalkAway Status grid. The Legend tab identifies the color for each status.
5. To find the specimen or lot number, isolate number, ATCC number, and panel type, as appropriate, of a
panel in the WalkAway instrument, hold the pointer over the cell that represents that panel—do not click
the cell. The information appears near the pointer if the instrument has identified the panel.
6. Depending on the panel status, do the following as needed.
If status is Then
No Data No action is necessary.

Hold No action is necessary, but you can review, edit, and store partial results and
continue WalkAway processing for all panels except Synergies plus panels.
For Synergies plus panels, you can view the available MIC results, or you can
complete a clinical panel, edit the results, if desired, and then save the partial
results. However, when you manually complete a Synergies plus panel, the
WalkAway instrument stops processing the panel and LabPro reports an N/R
result for each unread antimicrobic. For details, see “Complete a Synergies plus
Panel.”
To work with panel results, double-click the cell that represents the panel—or
click the cell and press Enter. The Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
dialog box appears. To work with panel results, see Chapter 8.
Complete without You can unload the panel from the instrument at any time.
Exceptions
Complete with You can unload the panel from the instrument at any time. Click the Exception
Exceptions or Status tab to identify and resolve any exceptions, including those for aborted
Aborted panels. For instructions, see “Resolve WalkAway Panel Processing Exceptions.”
Abandoned by User You can unload the panel from the instrument at any time.
To reorder, delete, or abandon a panel, use the Load Status or Exception Status tab. For instructions, see
“Use the Load Status Tab.”
You can also view the panel results and reorder, delete, or abandon the panel on the Results (or QC Results)
Summary and Edit dialog box. However, if a panel has an Aborted, Abandoned, or No Data status, you
cannot access the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box for that panel.

Use the Load Status Tab
Use the Load Status tab to see more detailed panel information or to reorder, delete, or abandon a panel.
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the Load Status tab.
Note: When you click the Load Status tab, the panel information is updated. You can click Refresh at
any time to update the information again.
 To sort the information differently, click a column header.
 To print a Load Status Report, click Print.
3. To determine the status of a panel, look for the message in the Status column for that panel. Symbols in
the far left columns indicate specific conditions
This symbol Denotes
! An unreviewed critical alert
!! A time-critical exception
 An exception
4. Do the following as needed.
To Do this
Review, edit, and save the Double-click the row that represents the panel to display the available
results for a panel with a Hold, panel data. For details about working with panel results, see Chapter 8.
Complete, Aborted-Stored
Data, or Aborted-Available
Data status
Store partial results for a Double-click the row that represents the panel to display the available
clinical Synergies plus panel panel data. Click Complete and edit the results, if necessary. Click
after biochemical results are Save. LabPro stores the partial results, stops processing, and sets the
available panel status to Complete. Unread antimicrobics report as N/R.
Note: LabPro can be customized to automatically store Synergies plus
results as they become available, so preliminary interpretations can be
reported while the panels continue processing. For details, see “Select
Panel Processing Features.”
Reorder, delete, or abandon a Right-click the row and then click Reorder, Delete, or Abandon on the
panel shortcut menu. When the confirmation box appears, click OK.
Note: If a panel has an Aborted, Abandoned, or No Data status, you cannot access the Results (or QC
Results) Summary and Edit dialog box for that panel.
Unload Panels from the WalkAway Instrument

A panel can be unloaded if the panel status is Complete with or without exceptions, Aborted with or without
stored data, or Abandoned. You can determine which panels are ready to unload by looking at the red LED
light at the right of each tower slot.
1. Make sure that instrument access is granted. When the instrument doors unlock, open the panel access
door.

2. Look at the red LED light at the right of each tower slot.
 If the light is blinking, the slot contains a completed, aborted, or abandoned panel. You can unload
the panel from this slot.
 If the light is on, but is not blinking, the slot is empty.
 If the light is off, the slot contains a panel in process.
WARNING
If you open the panel access door and the LED status lights next to the tower slots are flashing at a
very fast rate, the door sensor may have failed to detect that the door is open.
Close the door, turn off the instrument, wait 30 seconds, and then turn the instrument on again. If the
lights are still flashing, call the Customer Care Center.
Tip: You can move a panel in process to another slot in the same tower or a different tower—for
example, you may want a tower to contain only panels still being processed. It is recommended that you
move the panel before terminating instrument access.
If you remove the panel from a tower slot and do not replace it before terminating access and before the
bar code scan begins, LabPro displays a Panel missing exception. You can resolve the exception by
placing the panel into any tower slot at that time.
3. Carefully and evenly grasp the panel and panel cover from a tower slot with a blinking red light.
4. Gently pull the panel and lid toward you until they are completely removed from the tower slot.
5. Repeat this procedure for each panel to be unloaded from the instrument. You may have to open and close
the panel access door and rotate the towers several times.
6. When you are finished unloading panels, close and lock the door to terminate access.
To lock the instrument doors, you may either press the Quick Access button on the front control panel or
click Lock Door on the WalkAway Monitor, regardless of the method that you used to open the doors.
Note: Quick Access is not available while the WalkAway instrument scans bar code labels.
Important:
WalkAway Monitor displays the message ACCESS OVERTIME in the Access area. Quickly close
any opened instrument doors, and then press the Quick Access button or click Lock Door to
terminate access.
 If you terminate access without closing all instrument doors, the WalkAway Monitor displays a
message in the Access area indicating which door must be closed. Quickly close the instrument
door, and then press the Quick Access button or click Lock Door to terminate access.
Resolve WalkAway Panel Processing Exceptions

It is important to check the Error conditions area of the WalkAway Status tab for alerts and exception
messages when panels are processing in a WalkAway instrument. Some exceptions must be resolved before
the instrument can continue panel processing; some can be resolved after the instrument completes panel
processing; and some exceptions cause the instrument to abort the panel.
This section describes a general procedure for resolving panel processing alerts and exception messages. For
specific messages, see the troubleshooting charts later in this chapter.

1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the Exception Status tab.
Note: When you click the Exception Status tab, the panel information is refreshed—that is, LabPro
updates the information with any new panel data from the selected WalkAway instrument. The Time last
refreshed message displays the current date and time. While this tab is displayed, you can click Refresh
to update the information.
 To sort the information differently, click any column header except Exceptions.
 To print an Exceptions Report, click Print.
3. To identify a panel exception, look for the message in the Exceptions column for that panel. If a panel
has more than one exception, click the Exceptions arrow to see all of the exception messages.
4. Check the messages in the Status column. If a panel has an Aborted–Available Data or Aborted–Stored
Data status, consider the following guidelines before resolving the exception.
Panel status Considerations and guidelines
Aborted–Available Data  Can you read the panel manually or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument?
 Has the panel incubated too long to accurately read the MICs and
all biochemicals? For example, the MICs have incubated longer
than 24 hours.
 Is the available data worth saving?

If the panel type can be read manually or in an autoSCAN-4
instrument and the MIC data is still valid, abandon the panel and
process accordingly using the Patient (or QC) Order Entry window.
If the panel cannot be read manually or in an autoSCAN-4
instrument, but you want to report the available panel results,
review or edit the results on the Results (or QC Results)
Summary and Edit dialog box and save the data.
If the available data is not worth saving, reorder or delete the panel.
Aborted—Stored Data For Rapid Fluorogenic panels, the stored data is the organism ID.
Reorder the panel.
For Synergies plus panels, the stored data can be the organism ID and
available MICs. Abandon the panel and read any unread MICs
manually.
For Dried Overnight panels, the stored data is usually MICs and
certain biochemicals from an ID/24 Hour Hold panel. Abandon the
panel and read the remaining results manually or in an autoSCAN-4
instrument. The biochemicals from the manual or autoSCAN-4
instrument read are combined with the MICs and the hold
biochemicals from the WalkAway instrument read.

5. To resolve an exception, do the following as needed. For details on how to resolve specific exceptions,
see the troubleshooting charts at the end of this chapter.
To Do this
Edit the panel data, review On the Exception Status, Load Status, or WalkAway Status tab,
alert messages and comments, double-click the panel to display the available data on the Results (or
or save the panel results QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box. For details, see Chapter 8.
Reorder, delete or abandon a On the Load Status or Exception Status tab, right-click the panel and
panel click Reorder, Delete, or Abandon on the shortcut menu. When the
confirmation box appears, click OK.
Important: The following exceptions require immediate attention. For details, see “Resolving Panel
Processing Alerts and Exception Messages.”
 Duplicate panel record (aborted)
 Oil dispense failed
 Panel missing
 Panel pickup failed (aborted)
 Reported Interpretation Changed
 Unrecognized (aborted)
 Unreviewed Critical Alert messages. For details, see the following procedure.
 Time-Critical Exceptions—Low probability ID, Very Rare Biotype, and Indole Required (Synergies
plus clinical panels only)
To remove the unreviewed symbols for critical alert messages

1. On the WalkAway Status tab, double-click the panel/tower slot overlaid with the Unreviewed Critical
Alerts symbol to display the available panel data.
2. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, review the critical alerts in the Alerts box. If desired, do
any of the following.
To Do this
Display alert comments In the Alerts box, click the plus symbol (+) next to the alert message.
Display the alert rule In the Alerts box, right-click the alert and then click View Rule in the
popup box.
View the alert history for this Click Record Alert Resolutions. If desired, add comments or print the
isolate or add alert resolution Panel Alert Report to document alert/exception messages and the
comments and free text associated resolution comments. For details, see “Add Alert Resolution
Comments and View the Isolate Alert History.”
Edit the panel data or save the See “Working with Summarized Panel Results.”
panel results
3. After completing the appropriate actions, click Mark Critical Alerts as reviewed and then click OK on
the confirmation dialog box.
LabPro removes the Unreviewed Critical Alerts Exist message and symbol for this panel from the
WalkAway Status tab and the !symbol from the Exception Status and Load Status tabs.

Processing Panels in an autoSCAN-4 Instrument
This section describes how to process MicroScan panels in an autoSCAN-4 instrument after a panel order has
been transmitted from a laboratory information system (LIS) or entered directly into LabPro.
The following workflow summarizes the tasks involved in processing MicroScan panels in an autoSCAN-4
instrument. In a typical non-LIS workflow, panel test groups are ordered as time permits, generally before the
panels are ready to be processed.
Enter a patient or QC order

Enter a patient or QC panel order in one of the following ways:
 Enter a patient order in an LIS and transmit the order to LabPro (or request a data transmission, if
required by your LIS).
 Add a patient or QC order directly to LabPro.
 Reorder an existing patient or QC panel in LabPro.
Set up the panel

For detailed information about MicroScan panels and panel setup procedures, see the MicroScan Panel
Procedural Manual shipped with each panel type.
Process the panel

 Perform any necessary maintenance on the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
 On the Patient or QC Order Entry window, initiate autoSCAN-4 processing. If prompted, run QC
diagnostics and calibrate the instrument.
 Select a panel processing option—Final Read, ID Hold Read, or 24 Hour Read.
 Load the panel into the autoSCAN-4 instrument and begin panel processing. If a panel processing
message appears, confirm the message, enter the results, or complete the steps described in “Responding
to autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages.”
Analyze the panel results and resolve alert messages

 Review the panel results on the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box. If the results
are acceptable and no panel alert messages appear, save the results.
 If panel alert messages appear, review and/or edit the panel results and save them. You may also: close
the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box without saving to “abandon” the current
panel results; delete the panel test group; or reorder the panel.
Report the results

 Print patient or QC reports or transmit the panel results to the LIS, as applicable.

Read a Panel in the autoSCAN-4 Instrument
This procedure describes how to read a patient panel in an autoSCAN-4 instrument beginning at the Patient
Order Entry window. You can use the same basic steps to read a QC panel by starting at the QC Order Entry
window. Instead of recalling a patient order and selecting an isolate/test group, you recall a panel lot number
and select an isolate/order. Thereafter, the procedures for reading the panel are identical.
Note: Most customers that have WalkAway and autoSCAN-4 instruments use the autoSCAN-4 instrument as a
backup system. Before you process a WalkAway panel in an autoSCAN-4 instrument, be sure to abandon the
panel on the WalkAway Monitor.
Important: When you initiate a panel read, the autoSCAN-4 instrument must pass QC diagnostic and
calibration tests before you can read panels. Make sure to warm up the instrument for at least one hour and
perform any required maintenance prior to processing panels.
Tip: If you are preparing to read several panels, you may want to use a patient query to create a worklist
before you begin. If the Worklist area is hidden, click Show/Hide Worklist and click Refresh/Run to
update the worklist, if applicable.
2. Do one of the following to display specimen and patient information.
 Type the specimen number and press Enter—or click the Specimen Lookup button and then double-
click a specimen in the Specimens table.
 On the Worklist, double-click a specimen.
3. In the isolates and test groups list, click a panel test group to select it.
4. Click autoSCAN-4 Read. The instrument drawer automatically opens.
Note: If the autoSCAN-4 Read function is not available:
 You selected a panel test group that cannot be processed in an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
or
 The isolate selected in the isolates and test groups list does not match the isolate displayed in the
Isolates area. Accept or clear the isolate and repeat steps 3 and 4.
Important: If the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box appears, click Run QC or
Calibrate as Required. The instrument drawer automatically closes, and LabPro begins QC diagnostics
or calibration. If all tests pass, click Read Panels on the autoSCAN-4 Calibration/QC Diagnostics
dialog box. For details, including troubleshooting instructions for failed test results, see Chapter 3.
5. When the autoSCAN-4 Read dialog box appears, select the Final Read processing option unless one of
the following conditions is true.
After incubating You want to Select
16–20 hours Read the antimicrobial wells and certain growth/no growth ID Hold Read
biochemicals on a Dried Overnight Combo or ID only panel
because:
 Biochemical reactions are not ready to read and reagents
have not been added.
 Panel incubation must continue after this instrument read.

After incubating You want to Select
24 hours Read a Dried Overnight Positive Combo panel to record the 24 Hour Read
oxacillin, vancomycin, and/or Streptomycin Synergy Screen
result when:
 The panel test group status is ID/24 Hour Hold.
 Biochemical reactions are not ready to read and reagents
have not been added.
 Panel incubation must continue after this instrument read.
Note: If you forget to read a panel at 24 hours to record an
oxacillin, vancomycin, and/or Streptomycin Synergy Screen
result, select the Final Read option. LabPro alerts you that the
results for these antimicrobial tests may not be valid.
6. Wipe the bottom of the panel with a non-abrasive, lint-free cloth to remove condensation and fingerprints.
7. Place the panel—with the MicroScan logo on the upper-left corner—on the panel block in the instrument
drawer.
CAUTION
If the panel does not fit properly on the block, do not force it. Instead, read the panel visually and enter
the results manually.
8. Press the Read button on the autoSCAN-4 instrument.

 The instrument drawer automatically closes. LabPro displays a progress indicator and the message
Reading panel while the panel is processing.
Important: If LabPro displays a panel processing message after reading the panel, take appropriate
action. For details, see “Responding to autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages.”
When results are available, the instrument drawer opens and LabPro displays the results on the Results
9. Review and resolve messages in the Alerts area as described in “Resolving Panel Processing Alerts and
Exception Messages.”
10. Click Record Alert Resolutions to add comments and free text indicating how alert messages were
resolved, if applicable. For details, see “Add Alert Resolution Comments and View the Isolate Alert
History.”

11. Click Save to store the results.
12. If the panel requires additional incubation, complete the applicable steps in the following table based on
the panel processing option you used to read the panel.
If you used this LabPro stores this information Complete the following steps
processing option
Final Read Biochemical results and any available None

antimicrobial susceptibilities.
Note: If the results of a Final Read Continue incubating the panel to

meet the criteria for holding oxacillin, 24 hours. Then read the panel again
vancomycin, and/or Streptomycin with a Final Read processing option to
Synergy Screen results, a 24 Hour record the oxacillin, vancomycin,
Incubation Required message displays and/or Streptomycin Synergy Screen
and the results for these antimicrobials results.
are not stored.
LabPro changes the panel status to 24
Hour Hold.
ID Hold Read Antimicrobic susceptibilities and any Continue incubating the panel overnight
growth/no growth biochemical results or until you can add the reagents. Read
the panel again with a Final Read
processing option to obtain the
remaining biochemical results.
Note: If the results of an ID Hold Read Continue incubating the panel to

meet the criteria for holding oxacillin, 24 hours, and read the panel again with
vancomycin, and/or Streptomycin a 24 Hour Read processing option.
Synergy Screen results, LabPro
displays a 24 Hour Incubation
Required message and the results for
these antimicrobials are not stored.
LabPro changes the panel status to
ID/24 Hour Hold
Under these same conditions, Follow the steps in “Resolving Panel
depending on how LabPro is Processing Alerts and Exception
customized, a 24 Hour Incubation Messages.”
Recommended message may display.
24 Hour Read Oxacillin, vancomycin, and Continue panel incubation overnight or
Streptomycin Synergy Screen results. until you can add the reagents. Read the
panel again with a Final Read option.

Responding to autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages
The following table lists messages that may appear after a panel is read in an autoSCAN-4 instrument but
before the results are available. For a list of alerts that may appear after results are available, see “Resolving
Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages.”
autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages

Message Possible cause Solution
Contaminated The control well may be Inspect the control well.
control well. Do contaminated.
If the well is contaminated and you decide to stop
you want to
processing the panel, click No.
continue
processing? If you decide to continue processing, click Yes.
When panel processing is complete, check the
results to confirm that the instrument read the panel
correctly.
Insufficient growth. The autoSCAN-4 Click OK.
Panel read instrument did not detect
Confirm insufficient growth in the growth well.
aborted. significant growth in the
growth well. If necessary, set up a new panel. You do not need
to reorder or delete the panel.
Instrument failed. The instrument Click OK.
Panel read malfunctioned while
Resolve the instrument problem and reprocess the
aborted. processing the panel—for
panel. For troubleshooting instructions, see
example, the lamp failed.
Chapter 3.
If you are unable to fix the instrument, read the
panel manually.
Invalid BNAC. Do The BNAC well was not Inspect the control well. If you decide to stop
you want to yellow. processing the panel, click No.
continue
If you decide to continue processing, click Yes.
processing?
correctly.
For descriptions of positive and negative
biochemical results, see the MicroScan Rapid Yeast
Identification Panel Procedural Manual or the
MicroScan Rapid Anaerobe Panel Procedural
Manual.
Invalid DCB The decarboxylase control Inspect the panel to determine the LYS, ARG, and
well was purple, and it ORN reactions. Make sure wells are overlaid with
should have been yellow oil. If oil is not present, discontinue panel
or gray. processing and delete or reorder the panel.
Enter the results and click OK.
decarboxylase results, see the MicroScan Dried
Gram-Negative Panel Procedural Manual.

autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages
Message Possible cause Solution
Invalid NPC. Do The NPC well was not Inspect the control well. If you decide to stop
you want to clear. processing the panel, click No.
continue
If you decide to continue processing, click Yes.
processing?
correctly.
biochemical results, see the MicroScan Rapid Yeast
Identification Panel Procedural Manual or the
MicroScan Rapid Anaerobe Panel Procedural
Manual.
Invalid OF/B The OF/B well was yellow, Inspect the panel to determine the OF/G reaction.
and it should have been
Enter the result and click OK.
blue-green to green.
For descriptions of positive and negative OF/G
results, see the MicroScan Dried Gram-Negative
Panel Procedural Manual.
Manual Call The instrument was not Inspect the panel to determine the biochemical
able to determine the reactions requested. Enter the results and click OK.
reaction of one or more For descriptions of positive and negative
biochemicals. biochemical results, see the appropriate MicroScan
Panel Procedural Manual.
The panel currently The instrument checks the Click OK.
in the instrument panel type by determining
 If the wrong panel type was inoculated, set up a
does not match the the position of the locator
new panel and process the panel in the
panel type selected well on the panel. The
autoSCAN-4 instrument.
to process. locator well position is
different than the panel  If the wrong panel type was ordered but the
test group selected on the correct panel type was inoculated, delete the
Patient (or QC) Order wrong panel and order the correct test group.
Entry window. You may  If the panel was loaded upside down, reposition
have: the panel correctly—with the MicroScan logo in
 Loaded the wrong panel the upper-left corner—and then press the Read
for the selected panel button on the instrument.
test group.  If the drawer was empty, place the panel in the
 Placed the panel upside drawer and press the Read button on the
down in the instrument instrument.
drawer.  If the panel test group in the order matches the
 Pressed the Read panel you inoculated, the locator well may not be
button without putting a dark enough. Darken the well—India ink works
panel in the drawer. well—place the panel in the instrument, and then
press the Read button on the instrument.

Entering Results Manually
This section describes how to manually enter test results for most patient and QC panels. You cannot
manually enter fluorogenic panel results or Synergies plus biochemical results.
All panel test results are entered manually via the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box.
These dialog boxes are identical to the dialog boxes you use to review and edit results while processing panels
in an autoSCAN-4 or WalkAway instrument. In fact, after you manually enter the panel results and process the
data, you actually use the same procedures to resolve alert messages, edit results, reorder panels, delete panels
and isolates, and save results.
1. On the Command Center, click Patient (or QC) Order Entry.
2. On the Patient (or QC) Order Entry window, recall or add the specimen and panel order (or lot and
isolate).
3. In the isolates and test groups (or QC Isolate/Order) area, click the panel to select it.
4. Click Manual Read.
Note: If the Manual Read option is not available and the selected isolate does not match the isolate
displayed in the Isolates area, click Clear Isolate or Accept Isolate and repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select a Final Read, ID Hold, or 24 Hour Read processing option. For details about these processing
options, see “Read a Panel in an autoSCAN-4 Instrument.”
The Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box displays the Panel tab.
6. On the Panel tab, click the Growth (G) well to show growth.
7. Click the biochemical wells that have a positive reaction.
 If you are processing an ID only panel, proceed to step 11.
8. Enter the antimicrobial MIC results as described in the following table.
To Do this
Add an MIC for each antimicrobial Double-click the last well that shows visible growth or
single-click the well that represents the MIC.
Report an MIC value greater than the Double-click the well with the highest antimicrobial
highest antimicrobial concentration concentration.
Report an MIC as less than or equal to the Click the well with the lowest antimicrobial concentration
lowest antimicrobial concentration to show no growth.
Include or exclude an antimicrobic MIC Right-click a well in the series, and then click Toggle N/R
from patient and epidemiology reports for Selected MIC. Red hatch marks indicate the
antimicrobic will not be reported.
9. Review the panel to be sure all MIC results have been added. Antimicrobial wells without results are
gray.
10. Click Process test group data to calculate the results.
 If a biochemical well appears with a yellow background, the result is atypical with a negative
reaction. If the well has a yellow background and a black dot, the result is atypical with a positive
reaction.
11. Review and edit the panel results as described in Chapter 8.

12. Click Save to store the results, or click Close to delete the results from the current read.
Entering Offline Test Results

The Results Summary and Edit dialog box for offline test entry has the same Isolate Results tab that is
available during panel processing and a unique Offline Tests tab that allows you to easily enter MIC results
and interpretations.
2. On the Patient Order Entry window, recall or add the specimen and offline test order.
3. In the isolates and test groups list, click the offline test group to select it.
4. Click Manual Read.
Note: If the Manual Read option is not available and the selected isolate does not match the isolate
displayed in the Isolates area, click Clear Isolate or Accept Isolate and repeat steps 3 and 4.
The Results Summary and Edit dialog box displays the Offline Tests tab. LabPro displays all offline
test groups ordered for the selected isolate in the Offline Test Groups area.
 To enter an MIC result, type a value in the Result cell and press Enter—or click the Result arrow
and select an MIC. You cannot enter MIC results for Kirby-Bauer and agar screen tests.
 To enter an interpretation, type a value in the Interp cell and press Enter—or click the Interp arrow
and select an interpretation.
6. Complete the following actions, if applicable.
 If more than one test exists for the selected offline test group, repeat step 5 for each test.
 If more than one offline test group exists, select the next test group in the Offline Test Groups area
and repeat steps 5 and 6.
7. Click Process test group data to calculate the results.
8. Review and resolve any messages in the Alerts area.
9. Click Save.
Resolving Panel Processing Alerts and Exception

Messages
The tables in this section describe common and uncommon alerts and exception messages that you may see
during WalkAway, autoSCAN-4, or manual panel processing. Additional messages that may appear after a
panel is read in an autoSCAN-4 instrument but before the results are available may be referenced in
“Responding to autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages.”
The LabPro AlertEX System generates additional alert messages when unusual test results meet the conditions
specified in system- and user-defined AlertEX System rules. For additional information, see the LabPro Alert EX
System Guide

Common Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages
autoSCAN-4 Instrument Only—Common Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages

Exception Cause Resolution
24 Hour Incubation The susceptibility for the Incubate the panel to 24 hours and read again using
Required – named drug is not the Final Read option.
(OX,VA, or STS) determined until the
or
panel has been
incubated 24 hours. If the panel processing option selected prior to the
instrument read was ID Hold Read, incubate the
panel to 24 hours and read again with a 24 Hour
Read processing option. Then, reincubate the panel
overnight—or until reagents can be added—and read
the panel a third time with a Final Read processing
option.
24 Hour Incubation It is recommended that Save the panel data including the oxacillin,
Recommended – the isolate be incubated vancomycin, or Streptomycin Synergy Screen result
(OX,VA, or STS) to 24 hours before without further panel incubation.
reading the oxacillin,
or
vancomycin, or
Streptomycin Synergy Do not report the drugs that should be held. On the
Screen. Panel tab of the Results Summary and Edit dialog
box, mark the drugs N/R—not reported. Save the
panel data and reincubate the panel to 24 hours.
On the Patient (or QC) Review and Edit window,
recall the specimen (or lot) and edit the results for
drugs that were reincubated.

Beta-lactamase The LabPro System Perform a beta-lactamase test.
required cannot determine the
1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box,
beta-lactamase result for
enter the correct reaction in the Beta-Lactamase
a Staphylococcus
box, click Process test group data.
because the penicillin MIC
is 0.06 or 0.12 mcg/ml. 2. Review the results, and then click Save.

Default processing While resolving an ID Synergies plus Panels Only
exception (Very rare
You can take any of the following actions:
biotype, Low probability
ID, Indole required, or an Allow the panel to complete at 16/18 hours. The
AlertEX System message Default processing exception will automatically
based only on the resolve at the 16/18-hour read without your
organism ID) you saved intervention.
an organism ID after the
first MIC result was or
available but before the 1. Display the Results Summary and Edit dialog
panel was complete. box.
or 2. Click Complete test group to complete the panel
After a communication with partial results.
failure between the 3. If desired, edit the results and print a Preliminary
WalkAway instrument and Panel Data report.
the LabPro computer has
been resolved and the Save the results. The WalkAway instrument
first MIC has been read, discontinues panel processing and unread
the WalkAway instrument antimicrobics report as NR.
will not accept an Important: To prevent this exception from occurring,
organism ID manually resolve the organism ID exception after the
stored in the database. instrument reads the ID (approximately 2 hours after
the panel begins processing) and before the
When the WalkAway instrument reads the first MIC (about 4.5 hours after
instrument continues panel processing begins).
default processing, all
antimicrobics with rapid
limitations dependent on
the organism will be read
at the 16/18-hour read.
Indole required The required rapid indole Perform an offline indole test, or manually add the
reagent was not rapid indole reagent to the panel indole well. If the
dispensed to a Rapid well turns green, the result is positive.
Fluorogenic Gram-
On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box,
Negative ID Panel.
enter the correct reaction in the Indole box, click
Process test group data, review the results, and
then click Save.
Important: (Synergies plus panels only)
If you are processing a Synergies plus panel, the
WalkAway instrument continues default processing
and LabPro flags the panel as time-critical (!!) when
the Indole required exception is generated. To
cancel default processing, you must enter an
organism before the WalkAway instrument reads the
first MIC value. If you miss this window of
opportunity, the organism name is saved but default
processing continues and MICs for antimicrobics
with rapid limitations are held for a 16/18–hour read.

Insufficient growth The WalkAway instrument Dried Overnight and Synergies plus Panels
did not detect significant
The ID is valid. The MICs are reported as N/R.
growth in the growth well
Visually check the panel.
at the final read.
 If you feel there is sufficient growth in the Growth
well, you can record the MIC values on the
Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
dialog box. Click Process test group data and
then Save.
 If the Growth well is not acceptable, reorder or
delete the test group.
Rapid Fluorogenic Panels
The ID portion is valid. For Rapid Combo and MIC
only panels, the MICs are reported as N/R. Consider
testing the isolate on a Dried Overnight MIC panel.
Note: You must delete the Rapid Combo panel test
group before ordering Dried Overnight MIC panel on
the same isolate. Keep in mind the organism
identification from the Rapid Combo panel and enter
it when ordering the new panel.
Low probability ID The first choice organism After confirming the organism ID on the Results
on the Probable Summary and Edit dialog box, do one of the
Organism List has a following:
probability less than 85%.
 If the first choice on the Probable Organism List
is acceptable, save the panel data.
 If the first choice is not acceptable, select an
alternate organism from the Probable Organism
List or the Organism table, and then click Save—
or delete or reorder the panel test group.
If you are processing a Synergies plus panel,
LabPro flags the panel as time-critical (!!) when the
Low probability ID exception is generated.
 If you are processing a Synergies plus Gram-
Negative panel, you must enter a valid organism
before the WalkAway instrument reads the first
MIC to obtain rapid results. If you miss this
window of opportunity, default processing
continues, and MICs for antimicrobics with rapid
limitations are held for a 16/18 hour read. Once
default processing is set, you must enter an
organism before MIC results can be stored.
Positive panel, LabPro must have a valid
organism ID to calculate the MICs.

To obtain rapid results, you must enter a valid
organism before there is enough growth in the
panel Growth well for the WalkAway instrument
to read the first MIC (generally at 4 ½ hours. If
you miss this window of opportunity, you can still
enter an organism before the panel is complete to
obtain 16/18 hour MIC results. If an organism is
not entered before the panel is complete, LabPro
reports all MICs as N/R.
Organism required When an MIC only panel On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box,
was ordered, the isolate enter an organism—or select an organism from the
organism was not Organism table—and then click Save.
entered. An isolate
organism is required to
determine drug
interpretations and store
panel results.
Out of control The actual test results for On the QC Results Summary and Edit dialog box,
a QC strain did not match review the panel results. Enter text as needed to
the expected values. document corrective actions, and then click Save.
Overtime (aborted) The instrument did not For Dried Overnight or Rapid Chromogenic ID
read the panel within the panels, you can do any of the following:
allotted time due to, for
 If results are available or stored, review, edit, and
example, a power failure,
save the results on the Results Summary and
jam, or failure to end
Edit dialog box.
instrument access.
 Abandon the panel and read the panel manually
or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
 Reorder or delete the panel on the Exception
Status tab.
Note: Aborted Rapid Chromogenic ID panels should
be read as close to 4 hours as possible, if
processing manually or in an autoSCAN-4
instrument.
For Rapid Fluorogenic panels, you can do any of the
following:
 Review and save any available results on the
Results Summary and Edit dialog box.
Status tab.
(continued)

For Synergies plus panels, you can do any of the
following:
Edit dialog box.
 Abandon the panel and manually read the MICs
only.
Reorder or delete the panel on the Exception
Status tab.
Oxidase required When the Dried Overnight 1. Perform an oxidase test.

Gram-Negative ID or
Combo panel was
enter the oxidase result, and click Process test
ordered, the oxidase
group data.
reaction defaulted to No
Test. 3. Review the results, and then click Save.
LabPro cannot
differentiate between
several potential
organisms without the
oxidase reaction.
Panel missing The instrument no longer Find the missing panel and reload it into the
recognizes a panel that is WalkAway instrument.
still processing. The panel
If the bar code reader could not find the bar code,
may have been removed
make sure that the bar code faces toward the inside
from the instrument
of the instrument or, if an actual bar code read error
prematurely or the bar
occurred, identify the panel to the instrument.
code reader may not be
able to read the bar code.
Reported LabPro or an operator On the Results Summary and Edit Isolate Results
Interpretation changed a reported tab or Patient Review and Edit Antimicrobic
Changed antimicrobic Results tab, look for the ^ symbol next to drug
interpretation. interpretations that have changed.
LabPro considers a drug If desired, print a Panel Alert Report or Preliminary
reported if it has been Panel Results Report to help document the changes.
printed on a chartable
Click Save or Save and Print CPSR.
report or transmitted
across the interface. Follow your laboratory’s procedures to report
corrected results.

Skipped wells A no-growth well was Dried Overnight and Synergies plus Panels Only
detected in a series of
1. Examine the panel to determine which drugs
growth wells, or a growth
contain skipped wells and confirm that the MICs
well was detected in a
are accurate.
series of no growth wells.
2. On the Results (or QC Results) Summary and
LabPro will still determine
Edit dialog box, edit the MICs if necessary or
an MIC value.
mark the drugs as N/R.
3. Save the panel data.
If the problem persists—or if no skipped wells are
apparent—print the Raw and Processed Panel Data
Reports and contact the Customer Care Center.
Note: For Synergies plus panels, do not visually
confirm or report MIC values until the panel has
incubated at least 16–20 hours.
Suspected ESBL LabPro is customized to There are three approaches to resolving this
display this message if an exception:
isolate qualifies as a
1. Leave the panel on the Exception Status tab.
suspected extended
spectrum beta lactamase 2. Set up the ESBL confirmation panel or test.
(ESBL) producer.
3. When the confirmation results are available,
select the panel from the Exception Status tab
and enter the ESBL value on the Results
4. Click Process test group data, save the results,
and report as final.
or
leave the result as Suspected.
2. Save the results. The results will be reported as
final, so you may want to add an isolate comment
indicating that further testing on the isolate is
pending.
3. Set up the ESBL confirmation panel or test.
4. Enter the result on the Patient Review and Edit
window and click Process test group data.
5. Save the results and send a corrected copy of
the report.
or
1. Do not perform an ESBL confirmation test.
leave the result as Suspected. Save the results
and report as final.

Unrecognized The WalkAway instrument Dried Overnight or Rapid Chromogenic ID Panels
(aborted) did not recognize the
1. Confirm that the correct panel type was loaded in
correct well position as
the instrument. If not, discard the panel and
the locator well. This
reorder.
exception occurs at the
initial read: 2. If the correct panel type was loaded:
 Dried Overnight panels  Confirm that the oil was overlaid on the
2 hours, 45 minutes correct wells (not applicable for Rapid Yeast
ID panels). If not, discard and reorder.
 Rapid and Synergies
plus panels—40  If the oil was correctly overlaid or the panel
minutes type was an MIC only panel, leave the panel in
the instrument until you are ready to resolve
 Yeast ID panels—30 the rest of the panel exceptions the following
minutes day. At that time, abandon the panel and read
 HNID panels—20 manually or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
minutes You may also reorder or delete the panel test
group on the WalkAway Monitor Exception
Causes for this exception: Status tab.
 The instrument Note: Aborted Rapid Chromogenic ID panels should
expected a different be read as close to 4 hours as possible if processing
panel type than was manually or on an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
actually loaded. Check
Rapid Fluorogenic Panels
the panel type on the
lower-right side of the Reorder or delete the panel test group and set up a
bar code. new panel.
 The bar code was Synergies plus Panels
placed on the wrong
It is best if you reorder and set up a new panel the
edge of the panel. It
same day the panel was aborted. Remember, the
must be attached on
panel was aborted only 40 minutes after it was
the long panel edge
loaded into the WalkAway instrument.
closest to the
MicroScan logo. or
 The fluorometric or If the exception is resolved the following day,
colorimetric lamp failed determine the organism identification using an ID
or the fluorometer was panel or other method, abandon the panel, and then
disabled prior to read the MICs manually. You may also reorder or
reading the panel. delete the panel test group on the WalkAway
Monitor Exception Status tab.
Very rare biotype The organism biotype On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box,
number is not in the enter an organism code (or select an organism from
standard LabPro the Organism table) and then save the panel data, or
database. delete or reorder the panel test group.
If you are processing a Synergies plus panel,
LabPro flags the panel as time-critical (!!) when the
Very rare biotype exception is generated.
Negative panel, you must enter a valid organism

before the WalkAway instrument reads the first
MIC to obtain rapid results. If you miss this
window of opportunity, default processing
continues, and MICs for antimicrobics with rapid
limitations are held for a 16/18 hour read. Once
default processing is set, you must enter an
organism before MIC results can be stored.
Positive panel, LabPro must have a valid
organism ID to calculate the MICs. To obtain
rapid results, you must enter a valid organism
before there is enough growth in the panel
Growth well for the WalkAway instrument to read
the first MIC (generally at 4 ½ hours. If you miss
this window of opportunity, you can still enter an
organism before the panel is complete to obtain
16/18 hour MIC results. If an organism is not
entered before the panel is complete, LabPro
reports all MICs as N/R.
Take the following steps as needed to resolve this
exception:
1. Check the purity plate.
2. Compare the actual panel results to the results
on the Results Summary and Edit dialog box. If
necessary, edit and reprocess the panel results.
3. Confirm that the correct oxidase result was
entered (Dried Overnight Gram-Negative ID and
Combo panels).
4. Confirm that the right family was selected. You
may be able to change the family for Dried
Overnight Gram-Positive panels on the Results
5. If processing in a WalkAway instrument, confirm
that the instrument added the correct reagents to
the panel.
6. If necessary, use the biotype lookup tool. On the
Utilities window, double-click System and then
Biotype Lookup.

Uncommon Panel Processing Alerts and Exception Messages
The tables in this section describe uncommon exception messages that you may see during panel processing.
Invalid BNAC, DCB, NPC, and OFB messages for the autoSCAN-4 instrument are not included in these
charts because they are considered panel processing messages and not alerts. For resolutions to these
messages, refer to “Responding to autoSCAN-4 Panel Processing Messages.”

Check MICs- The organism manually Synergies plus Panels
WalkAway/ stored in the LabPro
For any drugs with an N/R MIC, visually read the MICs
Stored IDs Differ database is different than
at 18-20 hours and record the changes using the
the organism used by the
WalkAway instrument to
determine which drugs
can be read rapidly.
Delayed Reagents were Remove the panel from the WalkAway instrument and
dispense—Verify dispensed too close to verify the panel results.
reactions the panel read.
On the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
dialog box, correct any biochemical reactions, click
Process test group data, and then click Save.
Delayed final read The final read was Dried Overnight and Synergies plus Panels
delayed by 2–8 hours
Verify the panel results, paying close attention to the
because of a jam or
H2S and Esculin wells on Dried Overnight panels. On
power failure.
the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
dialog box, edit the results if necessary, click Process
test group data, and then click Save.
Dispense failed The instrument was Remove the panel from the WalkAway instrument and
unable to dispense add the appropriate reagents for the panel type.
reagents to the panel.
dialog box, correct any biochemical reactions, click
Process test group data, and then click Save.
Duplicate panel Two or more panels were This exception occurs immediately after the bar code
record (aborted) loaded into the scan. On the WalkAway Monitor Exception Status
instrument with the same tab, reorder one of the duplicate panels to remove all
information, specimen of the duplicate panels from the WalkAway Monitor. Be
number, isolate number, sure to unload the aborted panels from the WalkAway
and internal panel ID. instrument.
For the panels that were not reordered, enter new
panel orders in Patient (or QC) Order Entry. Print and
affix valid bar code labels to the new panels, and load
the panels into the instrument.

Invalid BNAC BNAC well is not yellow. Review the reactions that use BNAC as the control
(WalkAway Only) well.
dialog box, edit the panel results, click Process test
group data, and then save the results or reorder or
delete the panel test group.
Invalid DCB DCB well is alkalinized Inspect the three decarboxylase wells—LYS, ARG,
(WalkAway Only) and was probably not and ORN—to be sure they were overlaid with oil.
overlaid with oil.
 If the wells were not overlaid with oil, reorder or
 If the wells were overlaid with oil, determine the
reactions.
dialog box, edit the results, click Process test group
data, and then click Save.
Invalid NPC The NPC well is not Review the reactions that use NPC as the control well.
(WalkAway Only) clear.
dialog box, edit the panel results. Click Process test
group data and save the results, or reorder or delete
the panel test group.
Invalid OF/B The OF/B well is yellow. Inspect the panel to determine the OF/G reaction.
(WalkAway Only)
dialog box, edit the panel results, click Process test
group data, and then save the results or reorder or
Invalid control well Insufficient light was Dried Overnight Panels Only
transmitted through the
Inspect the control well. If the well is grossly
control well.
contaminated, you can delete or reorder the panel.
If you choose to save the results after reviewing or
editing them, on the Results (or QC Results)
Summary and Edit dialog box, click Save.
The control well value Rapid Fluorogenic Panels Only
was out of range on a
Rapid Combo or MIC
dialog box, the organism ID is valid, if available. The
panel.
MIC values are not valid and display as N/R.
If not already stored, you can save the organism ID.
You can also reorder or delete the panel test group.
Check the storage conditions for the Rapid panels and
broths. (continued)

Insufficient light was Synergies plus Panels Only
transmitted through the
If available, the organism ID is valid.
control well. This can
occur at any of the After incubating 16–20 hours, visually check the panel
interim or final MIC MIC results and the control well. Compare the panel
reads. As soon as the MIC results with the available MICs on the Results
invalid control well is Summary and Edit dialog box.
detected, the panel is
 If acceptable, click Save.
added to the Exceptions
tab.  If not acceptable, reorder or delete the panel test
group.
Note: MICs read before
the exception occurs are
valid. Unread MICs and
MICs that were in the
process of being read are
held to the 16/18-hour
read.
Invalid Processed The instrument If this exception remains after the panel is complete,
Value designated overnight remove the panel from the WalkAway instrument and
processing for this panel. verify the panel results.
(Synergies plus
Gram-Positive The panel will be held for On the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
panels only) 16-18 hours and the dialog box, correct any results, click Process test
pending antimicrobic group data, and then click Save.
results will not be read
Contact the Customer Care Center.
rapidly.
Low Processed The instrument If the exception remains after the panel is completed,
Value-Visually designated overnight remove the panel from the WalkAway instrument and
check MICs processing for this panel. verify the panel results.
(Synergies plus The panel will be held for On the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
Gram-Positive 16-18 hours and the dialog box, correct any results, click Process test
panels only) pending antimicrobic group data, and then click Save.
results will not be read
Contact the Customer Care Center.
rapidly.
MICs Not LabPro does not support The WalkAway holds the panel for 16-18 hours.
Reported for susceptibility processing
Organism ID and reporting for the  If the organism ID was entered incorrectly, select a
organism ID on this panel reportable organism (Staphylococcus or
(Synergies plus Enterococcus) prior to the 16/18 hour read.
type (for example, S.
Gram-Positive
panels only)
pneumoniae).  If the organism is not a Staphylococcus or
or Enterococcus, use an alternate method for
susceptibility testing, if needed.
The panel completed
without an organism ID at
the 16-18 hour read.

A communication failure The WalkAway instrument holds the panel for 16-18
prevented LabPro from hours.
transmitting an organism
If the exception does not clear after the 16-18 hour
ID for this panel to the
read, MICs will be reported as N/R.
WalkAway instrument
before the first MIC read. Remove the panel from the WalkAway instrument and
read the MIC results manually.
Oil dispense failed The instrument did not Before the initial read (2 hours, 45 minutes for Dried
(WalkAway SI or dispense oil due to a Overnight panels and 20 minutes for HNID panels),
upgraded failure in the oil dispense remove the panel from the WalkAway instrument and
WalkAway models system. manually add oil to the underlined biochemical well(s).
only) Reload the panel into the instrument to continue
processing. When panel processing is completed, on
the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
dialog box, save the panel data. If you fail to add the
oil before the initial read, you can delete or reorder the
panel.
Panel pickup failed The instrument detected For Dried Overnight or Rapid Chromogenic ID panels,
(aborted) a failure during the panel you can do any of the following:
(WalkAway SI or pickup process.
upgraded  If results are available or stored, review, edit, and
WalkAway models save the results on the Results Summary and
only) Edit dialog box.
 Abandon the panel and read the panel manually or
in an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
Status tab.
For Rapid Fluorogenic panels, you can do any of the
following:
 Review and save any available results on the
Status tab.
For Synergies plus panels, you can do any of the
following:
Edit dialog box.
 Abandon the panel and manually read the MICs
only.
Status tab.

Power failed The instrument lost You can save or discard the panel results depending
power for at least two on the length of down time. Remember that the
hours but not long instrument maintains temperature and humidity for at
enough to abort the least two hours if the doors are not opened.
panel overtime.
dialog box, save, reorder or delete the panel test
group.
Record locked at While the instrument On the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit
store attempted to store panel dialog box, save the panel results.
results automatically,
LabPro was accessing
the same specimen or
isolate elsewhere in the
system.
Time critical The panel completed Abandon the panel and remove it from the WalkAway
exception not without an organism ID at instrument.
resolved—MICs the 16-18 hour read.
not read Visually read the MICs and record the results using
All of the MICs will be Manual Read on the Patient Order Entry (or QC Order
(Synergies plus reported as N/R. Entry) window.
Gram-Positive
panels only)
Verify panel The panel access door No immediate action is necessary. When panel
was opened in front of a processing is completed, verify that the correct panel
tower containing a panel is in the tower slot, and then, on the Results
manually identified to the Summary and Edit dialog box, save the panel data.

Working with Summarized Panel
Results
The Results Summary and Edit dialog box displays automatically after a successful panel read in an
autoSCAN-4 instrument. This dialog box allows you to review and edit the autoSCAN-4 instrument results
before storing them in the LabPro database.
Unlike the autoSCAN-4 instrument, the panel results from a panel read in a WalkAway instrument are
automatically stored in the LabPro database when no exceptions exist. Therefore, when processing panels in a
WalkAway instrument, you will most often use the Results Summary and Edit dialog box to resolve
exceptions that prevent the WalkAway instrument from storing results in the LabPro database.
You can also display the Results Summary and Edit dialog box from the Patient Order Entry window to
manually enter panel results.
Viewing Patient Panel Results

This section describes how to display and interpret isolate results on the Results Summary and Edit dialog
box. This dialog box is available after processing a panel in an autoSCAN-4 instrument or when a panel is still
in a WalkAway instrument—or on the Exception Status tab—and the panel has available or stored test
results. To view stored test results for one or more selected specimens or patients, see Chapter 10.
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, on the WalkAway Status, Load Status or Exception Status tab, double-
click a panel.
or
On the Patient Order Entry window, read a panel in an autoSCAN–4 instrument.
LabPro processes the available data and displays the appropriate dialog box for the patient.
 If you or someone in your laboratory previously modified one or more antimicrobic interpretations, a
dialog box displays providing an opportunity to clear the User results and display LabPro results
only. On the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to clear the user interpretations or No to retain them.
2. Use the following tables to interpret the results on the Isolate Results tab. Click any column heading to
change the sort order.
Note: Offline tests are interspersed with panel tests in alphabetical order on the Isolate Results tab.
Offline tests appear with a double asterisk (**) in the Offline column.
9020-7569, Rev. A Working with Summarized Panel Results  8-1

Column Descriptions
Column Content Description
Test Antimicrobial agent Antimicrobial agents display in alphabetical order.
test name
LabPro is customized to suppress the antimicrobial name and
interpretation from printing on patient reports. Contraindicated
drugs are always suppressed.
** ** Indicates an offline test result, for example—a Kirby Bauer test.
MIC Antimicrobial agent The lowest concentration of the antimicrobial that effectively
concentration inhibited organism growth.
Note: If LabPro has been customized to calculate and report a
predicted interpretation for an antimicrobial agent, the MIC for that
drug is always N/R.
System Interpretations Standard LabPro interpretations.
Expert Interpretations generated by AlertEX System rules.
Final Reported interpretations. Initially, Final interpretations match
Expert interpretations, if available, and System interpretations if
not. Final interpretations can be manually changed, if desired.
Origin User The interpretation in the Final column was entered manually.
AlertEX System The interpretation in the Final column was generated by an AlertEX
Rule Code System rule. To view the rule, right-click the rule code in the Origin
column and click View Origin Rule on the shortcut menu.
Pending A user interpretation in the Final column has been manually reset
but the results have not yet been processed.
Japan Only: If LabPro is customized to report JSC breakpoints and you entered a disease state as part of
the patient order, breakpoints based on the disease state appear in the JSC - IV, PO, IM column.
Interpretations
Interpretation Description
N/R  An N/R interpretation has been entered for an offline test.
 In very rare cases, the antimicrobic dilution scheme on a panel does not allow for a
definitive interpretation.
S Sensitive
I Intermediate
R Resistant
EBL? Suspected extended-spectrum beta-lactamase producing organism.
ESBL Confirmed extended-spectrum beta-lactamase producing organism.
8-2  Working with Summarized Panel Results 9020-7569, Rev. A

Interpretation Description
R*  The interpretation has been forced to resistant—regardless of the MIC value—
because the organism was confirmed as an ESBL producer.
 The interpretation for an MIC on a Synergies plus Gram-Positive panel is predicted to
be resistant based on other panel results.
 The interpretation was changed by a user or changed based on an AlertEX System
rule.
S*  The interpretation for an MIC on a Synergies plus Gram-Positive panel is predicted to
be susceptible based on other panel results.
 The interpretation was changed by a user or changed based on an AlertEX System
rule.
^ A panel interpretation changed after it was transmitted to an LIS or printed on a
Chartable Report.
N/A The interpretation was selected by a user.
TFG The organism is thymidine dependent, the antimicrobic tested is a sulfonamide, and the
interpretation cannot be reported.
IB The organism may produce inducible beta-lactamases.
Important: An IB interpretation indicates a possible treatment failure if a beta-lactam
antimicrobial is used.
BLAC LabPro generates a BLAC interpretation for penicillin and ampicillin if the beta-
lactamase result is positive.
3. To view the antimicrobial results and biochemical reactions, click the Panel tab.
4. Use the following charts to interpret the results on the Panel tab.
Antimicrobial Results
If an antimicrobial well has… It means...
A black dot on a white Growth was detected in the well.
background
A white background Growth was not detected in the well.
A red background in each well The instrument detected a well with no growth followed by growth in a
in an antimicrobial series well with a higher concentration of the antimicrobic. The panel has
skipped wells.
If you change the MIC, the
background color remains red.
Red hatch marks through the The antimicrobial is set to N/R—not reported—by the operator. The
box surrounding all drug MIC values and interpretations will not print on patient reports or
concentrations of an be included in certain epidemiology reports.
antimicrobial
A gray background The panel has an MIC Hold or 24 Hour Hold status and the well has not
been read by the instrument.
If you are entering results manually, the result has not been entered.

Biochemical Reactions
If the biochemical well has… The reaction is…
A white background with a black dot Positive.
A white background Negative.
A gray background The panel has an ID Hold status and the well has not
been read by the instrument.
A yellow background with a black dot Atypical* with a positive reaction.
A yellow background Atypical* with a negative reaction.
A red diagonal line Not modifiable.
Tip: To display the Panel Edit Legend, press F5 or right-click anywhere on the panel picture and click
Legend.
5. Check the Alerts area of the Results Summary and Edit dialog box for messages or exceptions that
require your intervention.
 If a + appears before an alert message, click the + to display alert comments. To view the AlertEX
System rule, right click the alert and click View Rule in the popup box.
 To view all alert/exception messages and resolution comments for this isolate, click Record Alert
Resolutions. For details, see “Add Alert Resolution Comments and View the Isolate Alert History.”
6. Click Save or Save and Print CPSR to store panel results without making any changes, or choose one of
the following actions.
To Do this
Edit the results See “Editing Patient Panel Data.”

Abandon any unstored panel Click Abandon. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK. Remove the
results and stop WalkAway panel and, if desired, read the panel manually or in an autoSCAN-4
panel processing instrument.
Note: To “abandon” autoSCAN-4 panel results, click Close to exit
without saving the results.
Delete a test group or isolate Click Delete. On the Delete Isolate/Test Group dialog box, click
Delete Isolate or Delete Test Group.
Japan Only: If LabPro is interfaced with another information system,
do not delete test groups; delete isolates only.
Reorder the same panel type Click Reorder. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
for the isolate
Let others know you have Click Mark Critical Alerts as reviewed. On the confirmation dialog
reviewed critical alerts box, click OK.
Complete a Synergies plus Click Complete. Edit the results, if necessary, and then click Save.
panel to store partial results
Note: LabPro can be customized to automatically store Synergies plus
and stop WalkAway panel
results so you can report preliminary interpretations and continue panel
processing
processing.

Editing Patient Panel Data
This section describes how to edit patient panel test results after reading a panel in an autoSCAN-4 instrument
or while a panel is processing in a WalkAway instrument. You will most often need to edit panel processing
results when exception or alert messages exist. To edit stored test results for panels that were previously
processed, see Chapter 10.
Note: You cannot edit Rapid panel results or the biochemical portion of a Synergies plus panel.
Additionally, unless LabPro is customized to store Synergies plus results as available, you cannot edit or store
partial MIC results from a Synergies plus panel without manually completing the panel first.
click a panel.
or
Read a panel in an autoSCAN–4 instrument.
 If you or someone in your laboratory previously modified an antimicrobic interpretation, a dialog box
displays providing an opportunity to clear the User results and display LabPro results only. On the
confirmation dialog box, click Yes to clear the user interpretations or No to retain them.
2. Check the Alerts area of the Results Summary and Edit dialog box for messages or exceptions that
require your intervention.
 If a + appears before an alert message, click the + to display alert comments. To view the AlertEX
System rule, right click the alert and click View Rule in the popup box.
 To view all alert/exception messages and resolution comments for this isolate, click Record Alert
Resolutions. For details, see “Add Alert Resolution Comments and View the Isolate Alert History.”
For a list of exceptions, alert messages, probable causes, and corrective actions, see “Resolving Panel
Processing Alerts and Exception Messages.”
Note: The LabPro AlertEX System generates additional alert/exception messages when unusual test results
meet the conditions specified in system- and user-defined AlertEX System rules. For details, see the
LabPro AlertEX System Guide.
3. Use the procedures in this section to edit panel results as necessary.
 If the message Processing Required appears in the upper-right corner after you edit test results, click
Process test group data to recalculate the organism identification or antimicrobial interpretations
and to reapply drug suppressions and AlertEX System rules, if applicable.
4. Review the recalculated results.
5. Check the Alerts area again for new exceptions or alerts generated from processing the edited data. If
new exceptions or alerts exist, repeat steps 3–5.
 If you decide to reorder a test group, abandon unstored results and stop WalkAway panel processing,
or delete a test group or isolate, see “Process Unwanted Panel Results.”
6. Click Save or Save and Print CPSR to store changes in the LabPro database.

To select or edit an organism
 On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, double-click an organism in the Probable Organism
List, or click the Organism Lookup button and double-click an organism in the Organism table.
 If one or more interpretations have been manually changed, a dialog box displays providing an
opportunity to clear the User results and display LabPro results only. On the confirmation dialog box,
click Yes to clear the user interpretations or No to retain them.
 If MICs are available, LabPro automatically calculates the antimicrobial interpretations and reapplies
drug suppressions and AlertEX System rules, if applicable, based on the selected organism. If LabPro
changes an organism identification based on an AlertEX System rule, the rule code appears to next to
the organism name. To view the rule, click the code.
 If the selected organism was not in the Probable Organism List, the biotype appears as – – –.
 If organisms in the Probable Organism List are low probability organisms, you can display and print
additional tests, footnotes, and special characteristics for all organisms in the list. To do so, on the
Probable Organism List, on the right side of the Organism heading, click the Organism
Information Report button. On the Organism Information Report window, click Print. For additional
information, see the MicroScan Systems Microbiologics Information Manual.
To edit biochemical wells

The following procedure applies to all biochemical wells and single antimicrobial wells such as Cl4 or K4 that
are used for identification. To display a panel legend, press F5 or right-click on the panel and click Legend.
1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, on the Panel tab, click the well to toggle between a
positive and negative reaction. A black dot in a biochemical well indicates a positive reaction.
Note: When you change an atypical biochemical well, the yellow background in the well does not change
until you choose the Process test group data command.
2. Click Process test group data to recalculate the organism and, if applicable, the interpretations.
To edit the MICs

The following procedure applies to wells used to establish MIC values. You cannot edit the following:
 MIC results that have been previously stored for a panel with an ID Hold or 24 Hour Hold status.
 MIC wells for Rapid Fluorogenic panels.
 MIC wells for Synergies plus panels unless the panel status is Complete, Aborted–Available Data, or
Aborted–Stored Data.
 MIC indicator wells on Synergies plus panels.
Important: If LabPro is not customized to store MIC results for Synergies plus panels as the results become
available, you cannot edit or store partial MIC results from a Synergies plus panel without manually
completing the panel first. For details, see “Complete a Synergies plus Panel.”
1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, click the Panel tab.

2. Choose one or more of the following actions.
To Do this
Change an MIC Double-click the last well that shows visible growth or single-
click the well that represents the MIC.
Report an MIC value greater than the Double-click the well with the highest antimicrobial
highest antimicrobial concentration concentration. LabPro adds a growth indicator (a black dot) to
all wells in that antimicrobial series.
Report an MIC as less than or equal to Click the well with the lowest antimicrobial concentration to
the lowest antimicrobial concentration show no growth. LabPro removes the growth indicator from all
wells in that antimicrobial series.
Exclude or Include an antimicrobic Right-click any well in the antimicrobial series and click
MIC from patient and epidemiology Toggle N/R for Selected MIC. Red hatch marks on all wells in
reports the series indicate the MIC will not be reported.
Note: You can view any available MICs from the original reads in Patient Review and Edit.
3. Click Process test group data to recalculate the interpretations.
Note: When you edit an MIC result in an antimicrobial series that has one or more skipped wells, the
exception Skipped wells is not cleared until you save the results.
Important: When a panel has a 24 Hour Hold status, the instrument does not read all of the antimicrobial
wells at the 16/18-hour read. The results for these unread wells are not determined until the 24-hour read.
You can manually enter MIC values for the unread antimicrobials prior to the 24-hour read but, if you do,
LabPro displays a confirmation message indicating that the 24-hour hold will be cancelled. If the panel is
processing in a WalkAway instrument, the panel is abandoned.
To change a final interpretation

LabPro MIC interpretations appear in the System column on the Isolate Results tab. If a LabPro
interpretation changes based on an AlertEX System rule, that interpretation appears in the Expert column and
the AlertEX System rule code appears in the Origin column. LabPro reports the AlertEX System result unless
you enter a different interpretation in the Final column.
Note: The Final column may be password protected to prevent modifications to the LabPro System and
Expert interpretations.
1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, on the Isolate Results tab, click an interpretation in the
Final column. Click the Final arrow, and select an interpretation.
 If the result in the Final column was generated by an AlertEX System rule and you want to review the
rule, right-click the rule code in the Origin column, and click View Origin Rule on the shortcut menu.
 If the Final column is password protected, right-click on the grid, and click Unlock Final Column on
the shortcut menu. Type the password and click OK.
2. When the message Do you really want to change the final interpretation? displays, click OK.
Note: If you are changing an interpretation that was previously modified, this message does not display.
3. Click Process test group data. When the message Do you want processing to clear user
interpretations? displays, click No to retain the modified interpretations, or click Yes to restore the
original LabPro results.

LabPro processes the data associated with the isolate and displays the recalculated MIC interpretations,
drug suppressions, and AlertEX System messages, if applicable.
To edit additional isolate information

You can enter or edit additional isolate information whenever the text box is available. You cannot edit the
family if any of the following is true:
 The panel is a Fluorogenic Rapid Gram-Positive panel.
 A Gram-Positive MIC only and ID only panel are both ordered for the same isolate, and one of the panels
is still processing.
 The panel is still processing in a WalkAway instrument.
1. To add or edit additional isolate information, enter the code as described in the following table—or click
the Lookup button and then double-click an item in the corresponding table.
Text box Code Description

Family
Dried Overnight 1 Streptococcaceae
Gram-Positive 2 Staph/Related Genera
panels
Rapid Anaerobe 1 Gram-Negative Bacilli
panels 2 Gram-Positive Bacilli
3 Cocci
4 Clostridia
Beta-hemolysis + Positive
- Negative
Beta-lactamase, * No Test
Oxidase, and + Positive
Indole - Negative
ESBL ? Suspected ESBL producing organism but not confirmed
- Not an ESBL producing organism
+ Confirmed ESBL producing organism
2. Click Process test group data to recalculate the organism and/or antimicrobial susceptibilities.
Add Alert Resolution Comments and View the Isolate Alert History
You can use the Alert Resolution dialog box to add comments and free text explaining how you resolve any
or all alert/exception messages. The Alert History area of the Alert Resolution dialog box includes all
alert/exception messages generated for an isolate. Informational messages—such as 24 Hour Incubation
Required, Possible Overtime, and Confirm Results—are not shown or retained
1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, click Record Alert Resolution on the toolbar.
The Alert Resolution dialog box displays past and current alerts and exception messages for the isolate.
Messages display in priority sequence—not in the order of occurrence.

2. In the Alert History box, click an alert or exception to select it.
LabPro displays comments and free text for the selected alert or exception, if any were entered.
 To view comments for an AlertEX System rule, click the plus (+) symbol next to the rule.
 To view the AlertEX System rule, if any, that caused LabPro to generate the alert message, right-click
the alert and click View Rule.
3. To add a comment for the selected alert or exception, in the Code column on the first blank line of the
Alert Resolution Comments grid, type a valid comment code and press Enter—or, click the Lookup
button and double-click a comment on the Alert Resolution Comments table.
Note: The Lookup button is visible only in the selected row.
 To remove an alert resolution comment, right-click the alert comment and click Remove.
 To remove comments and free text for all alerts and exceptions, click Remove All.
4. To add descriptive text, type the text in the Alert Resolution Free Text box.
5. Complete any of the following actions.
To Do this
Accept changes Click OK.
Note: Changes entered on the Alert Resolution dialog box are not
actually saved in the LabPro database until you save the panel results. If
you exit from the Results Summary and Edit dialog box without
saving, changes to alert resolution comments and free text are lost.
Print a Panel Alert Report Click Print. The Panel Alert Report displays. On the toolbar, click Print.
Click Close to exit.
Exit without accepting Click Cancel.
changes
Process Unwanted Panel Results

The procedures in this section explain how to abandon, delete, or reorder panel results.
To abandon a WalkAway panel

You can abandon WalkAway panels to discontinue panel processing and discard panel data from the most
recent instrument read. Abandoning a panel does not delete the test group or stored panel results, so you can
read the panel manually or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument. The alert history, if applicable, is also retained
when you abandon a panel.
Note: The Abandon command is not available for panels processed manually or in an autoSCAN-4
instrument. However you can “abandon” these panels by closing the Result (or QC) Summary and Edit
dialog box without saving the current panel data.

 Choose one of the following actions:
To abandon a panel Do this
On the WalkAway Monitor On the Load Status or Exception Status tab, right-click the panel and
click Abandon on the shortcut menu. When the confirmation dialog box
appears, click OK.
On the Results Summary If necessary, on the WalkAway Status, Load Status or Exception
and Edit dialog box Status tab, double-click a panel to display the Results Summary and
Edit dialog box. Click Abandon and then click OK on the confirmation
dialog box.
To delete a panel test group or isolate

You can delete a panel from an isolate or an isolate from a specimen. You will most often delete a panel from
an isolate when:
 You want to discard the panel results and you have no plan to repeat the test.
 The test results indicate the isolate is a duplicate.
To Do this
Delete a panel on the On the Load Status or Exception Status tab, right-click the panel and
WalkAway Monitor click Delete on the shortcut menu. When the confirmation box appears,
click OK.
Delete a panel or isolate on If necessary, on the WalkAway Status, Load Status or Exception
the Results Summary and Status tab, double-click a panel to display the Results Summary and
Edit dialog box Edit dialog box. Complete steps 2 and 3.
2. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, click Delete.
The Delete Isolate/Test Group dialog box appears.
 To delete the panel, the results from the current read and any stored results, click Delete Test Group.
LabPro deletes all references to the test group except the alert history, if applicable.
Japan Only: If LabPro is interfaced with another information system, do not delete test groups;
delete isolates only.
 To delete the isolate and all associated panel and offline test groups and results, click Delete Isolate.
LabPro deletes the isolate from the database and removes all references to the isolate.
If a WalkAway instrument is currently processing one or more panels for the isolate, LabPro abandons the
selected panel or all panels for the isolate.

To reorder a panel test group
You can reorder a panel or user-defined test group if it becomes necessary to retest a panel or repeat user-
defined tests. When you reorder a WalkAway panel, LabPro deletes all stored and unstored panel data except
the alert history.
It is only necessary to reorder panels processed manually or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument if there is stored
panel data associated with the test group. Otherwise, you can close the Results Summary and Edit dialog
box without saving to remove panel data from the current read. You can then recall the specimen and isolate
when you are ready to read the new panel.
CAUTION
When retesting QC panels, do not routinely use the Reorder command. Reorder deletes all stored panel
data, including your documentation of the original out–of-control results and any corrective action entered.
Instead, using QC Order Entry, select the QC strain to be retested from the specific QC strain list.
 Choose one of the following actions:

To reorder a panel Do this
On the WalkAway Monitor On the Load Status or Exception Status tab, right-click the panel and
click Reorder on the shortcut menu. When the confirmation dialog box
appears, click OK.
On the Results Summary If necessary, on the WalkAway Status, Load Status or Exception
and Edit dialog box Status tab, double-click a panel to display the Results Summary and
Edit dialog box. Click Reorder test group and then click OK on the
confirmation dialog box.
Review Results for Panels with Critical Alert Messages

The colored cell on the WalkAway Status tab is overlaid with an unreviewed critical alerts symbol when the
following conditions occur:
 A WalkAway panel has results that meet the conditions defined by an AlertEX System rule with a Critical
priority.
 A panel interpretation changed after it was transmitted to an LIS or printed on a Chartable Report.
You can display the results and use the Mark Critical Alerts as reviewed command—or edit and save the
panel results—to remove this symbol and the Unreviewed Critical Alerts Exist message from the WalkAway
Status tab. These actions also remove the ! symbol from the Load Status and Exception Status tabs.
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, on the WalkAway Status, Load Status, or Exception Status tab, double-
click the panel. The panel results display on the Results Summary and Edit dialog box.
 To retain a record of all alert/exception messages, print a Panel Alert Report.
 Click Mark Critical Alerts as reviewed and then click OK on the confirmation dialog box.
 Edit the results and click Save or Save and Print CPSR.

Complete a Synergies plus Panel
You can customize LabPro to store Synergies plus panel results as they become available, so you can report
preliminary panel results while the panel continues to process. If LabPro is not customized to store Synergies
plus panel results, you must manually complete the panel to report the available results. When you manually
complete a panel, the WalkAway instrument stops processing the panel and MICs are not identified for the
remaining antimicrobics.
1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, click Complete Test Group.
The message Complete Pending displays in the top-right corner until you save the results.
2. Review and edit the results, if necessary.
3. Choose one of the following options:
 To store partial results, clear all exceptions, and stop WalkAway processing, click Save or Save and
Print CPSR. The panel status changes to Complete and LabPro reports all unread antimicrobics as
N/R.
 To exit without storing the changes and continue processing the panel, click Close. The panel is not
completed and the status does not change.

Printing Reports
This chapter describes how to print instrument, panel, patient and epidemiology reports. To print quality
control reports, see “Performing Quality Control.”
Printing Instrument Data and Panel Reports

You can print the following instrument data and panel reports from the WalkAway Monitor and from the
Report General Information
Comprehensive Panel Status The CPSR contains results obtained directly from the WalkAway instrument
Report (CPSR) and any patient panel results stored in the LabPro database for a single
panel. Use the Results Summary and Edit dialog box to print a CPSR for
one panel. Use the WalkAway Monitor to print reports for all panels in the
WalkAway instrument, all panels with alerts or exceptions, or all panels on
the Troubleshooting window.
Preliminary Panel Data You can print a Preliminary Panel Data Report for any patient panel
Report processing in a WalkAway instrument that has available data or is listed on
the Exception Status tab.
Preliminary Panel Data Reports are not Chartable Reports, but rather printed
copies of partial panel results. It must be emphasized that the information
contained on these reports is preliminary and subject to change. All drugs
have not been completed and all potential alert rules and drug suppressions
may not have been applied.
Panel Alert Report You can print a Panel Alert Report for patient panels that have alerts,
exceptions, or certain hold messages. Panel Alert Reports include current
panel alerts and exceptions as well as an alert history for the isolate.
Raw and Processed Panel The Customer Care Center may ask you to print one or both of these reports
Data Reports to troubleshoot problems with biochemical and MIC misreads.
9020-7569, Rev. A Printing Reports  9-1

Print Reports from the WalkAway Monitor
Use the Print command to print a CPSR, Load Status, Exceptions, QC Diagnostics, or Panel Alert Report for
all appropriate panels processing in the WalkAway instrument. Use the Troubleshoot command to print
CPSR or Raw and Processed Data Reports for one or more selected panels.
To print reports using the Print command

1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click Print.
2. On the Print dialog box, click Load Status Report, Exceptions Report, QC Diagnostics Report, or
Panel Alert Report—or, under Comprehensive Panel Status Report, click All Panels in WalkAway or
Panels with Exceptions.
3. Click Print.
To print a CPSR or Raw or Processed Panel Data Report using the Troubleshoot
command
1. On the WalkAway Monitor, click Troubleshoot.
2. On the WalkAway Troubleshooting window, click the panel to select it.
 To print reports for multiple panels, press Ctrl while selecting panels.
3. Click Print.
4. On the Print dialog box, click Comprehensive Panel Status Report, Raw Panel Data Report, or
Processed Panel Data Report, and then click Print.
Print Reports from the Results Summary and Edit Dialog Box
Use the following procedures to print Raw Panel Data, Processed Panel Data, Comprehensive Panel Status,
Panel Alert, and Preliminary Panel Data reports for the panel displayed. You can also view and print a list of
probable organisms, additional tests, footnotes, and special characteristics.
To print all Results Summary and Edit reports

1. On the Results (or QC Results) Summary and Edit dialog box, on the Data menu, click Print.
2. Select the check box for each report you want to print.
3. Click OK.
Note: You can also use the following procedures to save and print the CPSR or print the Panel Alert
Report from the Alert Resolution dialog box.
To save and print a CPSR

 Click Save and Print CPSR.
9-2  Printing Reports 9020-7569, Rev. A

To print an Organism Information Report
1. On the Probable Organism List, on the right side of the Organism heading, click the Organism
Information Report button.
2. On the Organism Information Report window, click Print.
For additional test and footnote information, see the MicroScan Systems Microbiologics Information
Manual.
To view the alert history and print a Panel Alert Report

1. On the Results Summary and Edit dialog box, click Record Alert Resolution.
2. On the Alert Resolution dialog box, click Print. The Panel Alert Report displays.
3. On the toolbar, click Print.
4. Click Close to exit.
Printing Patient, Lab, and Query Summary Reports

This section describes how to print the following report types. Depending on how LabPro is customized, the
report selection lists for Chartable, Lab, and Query Summary Report types may or may not include user-
defined reports.
 Chartable Reports are designed for the physician’s review and become part of the patient’s chart. These
reports contain microbiology results for all isolates associated with a single specimen. System-defined
Chartable Reports include the Long Patient Report–Standard Format which provides LabPro
interpretations, and the Long Patient Report–Expert Format which provides LabPro interpretations and
AlertEX System interpretations.
Hint: When you print preliminary antimicrobic interpretations on a Chartable Report or transmit the
interpretations to an LIS, LabPro flags the interpretations as Reported while the panel continues
processing. You can avoid flagging preliminary interpretations as Reported by printing a Lab Report
instead of a Chartable Report.
Japan Only: If LabPro is customized to report JSC breakpoints and a disease state is entered for each
specimen, you can use two additional system-defined Chartable Reports to show JSC IV, PO, and IM
breakpoints based on a disease state or a disease state and a related disease state.
 Lab Reports are custom reports designed for laboratory use only.
 Short Format Reports are typically stored as part of a laboratory’s record or sent as a results report to
ancillary departments such as infection control. Short Format Reports include detailed information about
one or more specimens and corresponding isolates, sorted according to your specifications. One printed
page may contain more than one specimen.
 Query Summary Reports provide a specimen list based on the search criteria specified in a query. You
can use the system-defined Query Summary Report–Standard Format or create your own custom reports.
Query Summary Reports are useful for testing a new query or reviewing a stored query before editing.
Japan Only: Query Summary Report selections include a Specimen Log.

1. On the Command Center, click Print Reports and the Print Reports window appears.
The Patient tab and the last selected report are the default selections.
2. To print a different report, in the Reports Types area, click a report type.
3. In the Report Options area, click a standard or custom report format.
4. If you selected Chartable Reports, Lab Reports, or Short Format Reports in step 2, complete the
following actions, as applicable.
 Click the Primary Sort Order arrow and select an option. If desired, click the Secondary Sort Order
arrow and select an option.
 To include any isolates previously printed on the same Chartable Report or Lab Report, select the
Include specimens already printed check box.
LabPro displays the required search criteria for that option at the right of the Search Type area.
Search type Search criteria
Collect Date From and To dates.

Select Include blank value, to include specimens with no collect date.
Patient Query Rules A stored patient query.
If desired, you can define a new query.
Specimen Number From and To specimen number range.
Note: A range selects data that is greater than or equal to the start of the
range and less than or equal to the end of that range.
Test Group Status/Date Status or Status and From and To dates.
Note: From and To date shortcut codes are described in “Enter Dates.”
6. Enter the specific search criteria for the selected search type.
 If a search option requires dates, you can click the From and To Calendar buttons and then double-
click the desired dates. To specify a single date instead of a range, type the From date only. Press
Enter.
 If search criteria can be selected from a table, you can click the Lookup button and double-click an
entry to select it. Press Enter.
 To select a status, click the Complete, No Data, ID Hold, MIC Hold, ID/24 Hour Hold, 24 Hour
Hold, or Preliminary check box. Press Enter—or, add a date range and then press Enter.
After you add the search criteria and press Enter, your selections appear in the Selected List.
Note: To delete any entry in the Selected List, right-click the entry and then click Delete on the shortcut
menu.

7. To generate the report, click Print.
Note: If you are printing a Short Format Report or Query Summary Report, you can click Print Preview
to view the report before printing.
Tip: If you are printing a Chartable Report or Short Format Report and you see the message No record
found, a Chartable Report or Short Format Report may already have been printed for all of the selected
specimens, or there are no active specimens within the selected range. Click the Include specimens
already printed check box and then click Print again. Also check that the active specimen range is set
correctly. For details, see “Setting the Active Specimen Range.”
8. On the Print dialog box, select the number of copies and click OK.
Printing Epidemiology Reports

The procedure in this section describes how to select a query and print one or more of the following reports
for epidemiology.
 Antimicrobic % Interpretive Reports are useful for trending final results from the patient database. You
can print sensitive, intermediate, and/or resistant percentages for each antimicrobic and organism
combination tested in the laboratory, including offline tests and antimicrobics suppressed by drug
suppression rules. This report also includes the total number of isolates for each species as well as the
number of each species tested against a specific antimicrobic. Non-formulary drugs can be included or
excluded.
The pharmacy can use this report to determine if an antimicrobic in their formulary is performing as
expected or to evaluate a potential antimicrobic addition to their formulary. The infection control
committee uses this report to identify patterns of increased resistance for organisms isolated in the
facility. The medical staff uses this report as a guide for empirical treatment of patients.
Antimicrobic % Interpretive Reports print the percentage of susceptible, intermediate, and/or resistant
organisms for each antimicrobic and organism combination tested in the laboratory, including offline tests
and antimicrobics suppressed by drug suppression rules. This report also includes the total number of
isolates for each species as well as the number of each species tested against a specific antimicrobic.
Note: If an antimicrobic was tested but is not appropriate for a particular organism, then double dashes
(--) print in place of the percentage and the number of isolates tested is zero (0). For the purpose of this
report, IB is considered a susceptible interpretation, Blac, ESBL, EBL?, and I are considered resistant,
and TFG is considered as not tested.
 The Cumulative % Inhibited by Antimicrobic Level Report indicates increases in resistance by organisms
against certain antimicrobics. Generally, as the MIC 90% column increases, so does resistance. Also, if
the MIC 90% for a particular organism is at a dilution in the intermediate or resistant interpretation range,
that antimicrobic is probably not an appropriate treatment for the organism species.
The Cumulative % Inhibited by Antimicrobic Level Report shows the number of organisms isolated and
the percent inhibited at each concentration of an antimicrobic tested. If an epidemiology organism group
appears on the report, these numbers reflect the cumulative total of all organisms that are members of the
group. This report does not include any offline antimicrobic test results, but does include panel
antimicrobics suppressed by the drug suppression rules. MIC values of not reported (N/R) are not
counted. Non-formulary antimicrobics can be either included or excluded.

 The Bacterial Incidence Report is helpful in determining which areas of a facility may be having
problems with their infection control. The report can also be used to monitor outbreaks and resulting
treatments.
 Query Summary Reports list the results of a database search in log-type format. These reports provide
specific patient and specimen information you can use in conjunction with the epidemiology reports.
Note: To set the criteria for excluding duplicate isolates on epidemiology reports, on the Command Center,
click Utilities and then double-click Customization and Reports.
Important: You can use the epidemiology segmentation feature to separate data on epidemiology reports.
You can select a single segment for the Antimicrobic % Interpretive Profile and Cumulative % Inhibited by
Antimicrobic Level Reports, or select one, two, or three segments for the Bacterial Incidence Report.
However, it should be noted that, depending on the report, segmented reports may become quite lengthy and
even hundreds of pages long. This is especially true for the Antimicrobic % Interpretive Profile Report. You
can reduce the number of pages printed on a segmented Bacterial Incidence Report by selecting fewer
segments. If you are printing a Bacterial Incidence Report or a Cumulative % Inhibited by Antimicrobic Level
Report, you can further reduce the number of pages printed by eliminating page breaks.
1. Click Print Reports on the Command Center. On the Print Reports window click the Epidemiology tab.
2. Select the check box for each report you want to print, and complete the following actions accordingly.
If you select this report Do this
Antimicrobic % Select the Include % Sensitive, Include % Intermediate, and/or

Interpretative Report Include % Resistant check boxes, as applicable, to include specific
results.
If desired, click the Segment 1 arrow and select a segment, or click the
blank space at the top of the list to remove a segment selection.
Cumulative % Inhibited by If desired, click the Segment 1 arrow and select a segment, or click the
Antimicrobic Level Report blank space at the top of the list to remove a segment selection.
To insert a page break each time a new Segment 1 selection appears on
the report, click the Page Break arrow and then click Segment 1. To
eliminate page breaks, click None.
Bacterial Incidence Report Click the Segment 1 arrow and select a segment.
To subdivide data within the primary segment, click the Segment 2
arrow and select the second segment. If additional segmentation is
desired, click the Segment 3 arrow and select the last segment.
To insert a page break each time a new Segment 1 selection appears on
the report, click the Page Break arrow and then click Segment 1. To
eliminate page breaks, click None.
Query Summary Report Click the Report Format arrow and select a standard or custom report
format.
Important: Segmented epidemiology reports can potentially be hundreds of pages long. If you are
concerned about the length of a segmented report, make sure the report is the only report selected or the
uppermost report selected on the Epidemiology tab before completing steps 3 through 9.
3. In the Report Name box, type a title for the report or reports—for example, 1st Quarter.
4. To query the database and select a specific set of information for the report, click the Stored Queries
Lookup button and select a query on the Patient Query Rules window.

Important: You cannot print an epidemiology report without selecting a stored query. It is recommended
that the selected query contains—at a minimum—a date range parameter. If you print multiple reports
during the same print session, remember that the query you select will apply to each of the reports.
5. To exclude duplicate isolates from the report, select the Exclude Duplicate Isolates check box.
6. To include non-formulary drugs on the report, clear the Exclude Non-formulary Drugs check box.
7. To report data at the epidemiology organism group level, select the Use Epidemiology Organism
Groups check box. Statistics at the organism group level reflect the cumulative total of all organisms that
are members of the group. These organisms do not print individually on the selected reports.
8. Click Print to display the Windows Print dialog box.
Important: If one report was selected in step 2, the Page range area of the Print dialog box shows the
number of pages for that report. If multiple reports were selected, the page count is for the uppermost
report selected only and not a combined page count for all reports selected. Be sure to check the page
count before proceeding to step 9. If you decide not to print the report(s), click Cancel.
9. On the Print dialog box, select the number of copies desired and then click OK to print the report.
Note: LabPro includes isolate results from finalized specimens only in epidemiology reports. Also, if the
Exclude from Epidemiology check box is selected for an isolate on the Patient Order Entry window or
Patient Review and Edit dialog box, the results for that isolate are not included in epidemiology reports.
Export Selected Data to a File

The LabPro Export feature allows you to select a set of data from the LabPro database and export that data to
a text file. You can then import the text file into another software program—for example, Microsoft Excel—
to analyze the data and create custom reports and charts.
Important: If the Exclude from Epidemiology check box is selected for an isolate on the Patient Order Entry
or Patient Review and Edit window, the results for that isolate are excluded from standard epidemiology
reports but not from exported files. To exclude these isolates, add an Excluded from Epidemiology
parameter and an Isolates not excluded condition to the selected patient query.
2. On the Print Reports window, click the Epidemiology tab.
3. In the Report Types area, click Export to File.
4. In the Report Types area, click the Export Configuration Lookup button.
5. On the Export Configurations window, double-click a stored configuration to select the configuration and
return to the Print Reports, Epidemiology tab.
 To create a new export configuration, see "Create an Export Configuration."
6. In the Data Selection Criteria area, click the Stored Queries Lookup button.
7. On the Patient Query Rules window, double-click a stored query to select the query and return to the
Print Reports, Epidemiology tab.
 To create a new patient query, see "Defining Queries and Drug Test Suppression Rules."
 To exclude duplicate isolates from the exported file, in the Data Selection Criteria area, select the
Exclude Duplicate Isolates check box.
8. Click Export. The Save As dialog box displays.
 To change the file location, click the Save in arrow and select an alternate location.

 To change the name of the file, select the text in the File name box and type the new file name.
9. Click Save to create the file.
10. When a message displays indicating the data has been exported, click OK to return to the Print Reports
window.
11. To exit the Print Reports window, click Close.
Create an Export Configuration

You must select a query and an export configuration to export LabPro data to a file. The export configuration
described in this section specifies which items of information, relative to the query, to include in the exported
file.
LabPro data is exported as a string of characters and text. This string of text is separated into individual units
of information by the delimiter and qualifier selected in the export configuration. A delimiter separates, or
marks, the start and end of a unit of data in an exported text file. A qualifier separates units of data in an
exported file when one or more of the units include the delimiter specified in the export configuration.
Important: LabPro defaults to a comma delimiter without a qualifier. However, if commas have been typed in
LabPro text boxes or tables during data entry for any unit of information selected in your export configuration,
select a double quote qualifier in addition to the delimiter.
2. On the Print Reports window, click the Epidemiology tab.
3. In the Report Types area, click Export to File.
4. Also in the Report Types area, click the Export Configuration Lookup button.
5. On the Export Configurations window, click Add.
6. On the Export Configurations - Add dialog box, type a code and description for the configuration you
are creating—for example MRSA and MRSA 1.
7. In the Available Data box, click + next to any data category—for example, Specimen Data—to display
the related items of information.
 To collapse a related item list, click - next to the category.
Tip: You can also click and drag items from the Available Data box to the Selected Data box or to
change the order of selected items.
8. Click a related item of information to select it—for example, Specimen—and then click Add>> to move
the item to the Selected Data box.
 To add all of the related items of information in a category, click a category and then click Add>>.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 as needed to select additional items—for example, Source, Collect Date, Ward of
Isolation, and Attending Physician.
 To change the order of an item in the Selected Data box, click the item and then click Move Up or
Move Down. These items appear as column headings, in the same sequence, when the LabPro file is
imported into a spreadsheet.
 To exclude a selected item of information, click the item and then click Remove<<. The item returns
to the Available Data box.
 To remove all items of information from the Selected Data box, click Clear All at any time.

10. If applicable, choose any of the following actions.
To Do this
Export codes instead of descriptions for the In the LabPro Data Format area, click Code.
selected data items—for example, export ICU
instead of Intensive Care Unit.
Use tabs instead of commas to separate the In the Delimiter area, click Tab.
selected items of information in the exported
file
Separate items of information when the items Make sure the selected Text Qualifier is “(Double
include commas and the comma delimiter is Quote).
selected in the export configuration
11. Click Save.
12. Repeat steps 5 - 11 of this procedure to enter additional configurations, or click Close to return to the
Export Configurations window.
13. On the Export Configurations window, click Close to return to the Print Reports window, and then click
Close to exit.
Tip: When importing a LabPro file into another software program, be sure to select the same import delimiter
and qualifier as specified in the export configuration. For example, if you select a Comma delimiter for an
exported file and then import the file into a software program that defaults to a Tab delimiter, change the Tab
delimiter to a Comma to separate the data correctly.
Merge LabPro Databases to Produce a Consolidated Epidemiology

Report
The LabPro Merge feature is designed primarily to restore clinical and QC data and interface and LabPro
customization settings from a database backup after you install a new version of LabPro software. You can
also use the merge feature to integrate multiple databases prior to generating epidemiology reports. However,
to avoid the unanticipated loss of data, read this section thoroughly and follow the procedure exactly—do not
select alternate options.
CAUTION
To avoid merging duplicate records that should not be overwritten by information on the destination
computer, make sure:
 The customization in both databases is identical.
 Both databases include the same name and detailed information for each patient ID.
 The specimen number and collect date combinations in each database are unique.
1. Complete the following steps before initiating the merge process:

 Complete all panels processing in the WalkAway instrument.
CAUTION
If you back up a database while WalkAway panels are still processing, exception and alert
messages and unstored test results will be lost when you merge databases.

 Back up the source database.
CAUTION
It is strongly recommended that you also back up the destination computer prior to merging
databases. If necessary, you can use the backup to restore the original settings on the destination
computer.
 Close all opened LabPro windows and dialog boxes. On the Command Center, click Exit LabPro
System.
2. If you are merging a backup file from an external storage device—for example, a CD or flash drive—
insert the device into the appropriate drive.
3. On the Windows Taskbar, click Start, point to Programs, point to MicroScan LabPro, and then click
Merge. The LabPro Merge window appears.
4. Click the LabPro backup Lookup button, navigate to the proper location, and then double-click the
backup file to select it.
5. In the Log comment box, type the text you want to appear at the top of the Merge Log, if any.
6. Use the following selections when merging databases for epidemiology:
Options Select Clear
All patient, QC and customization data X

 Exclude Interface data X
 Exclude non-table customization and X

configuration
 Reorder unprocessed WalkAway panels X
 Exclude Alert Rules and Alert Comments X
Duplicate Handling Options
Invalidate duplicate data X
7. Click Execute to start merging databases. A warning displays reminding you to backup the destination
database.
 If you did not backup the destination database in step 1 of this procedure, click Cancel and back up
the database now.
 If you previously backed up the database, click Continue to proceed with the merge.
8. When you see the message Progress Complete at the bottom of the window, click Close to exit, or click
Merge Log to view or print merge results.
Note: You can click Cancel to stop the merge process, but all records that have been merged up to that
point remain in the destination database.
9. On the Merge Log window, click Print.
10. On the Print dialog box, click OK.
11. Click Close and then click Close again to exit LabPro Merge.

Working with Stored Data
After patient and specimen data are stored in the LabPro database, you can review, edit, and finalize the
stored data. Results for panels still processing in the WalkAway instrument may not be available in Review
and Edit but may be available from the WalkAway Monitor. You can look for active or inactive specimens
using a search type—for example, Collect Date or Patient—or you can use a patient query to perform
sophisticated searches.
Retrieving Stored Specimens

This section describes how to search for and retrieve stored specimen records to review, edit, and finalize
patient, specimen, isolate, and test group data. You can also use this feature to respond to physician inquiries,
apply the current list of drug suppressions to all isolates for selected specimens, and print Long and Short
Format Reports.
1. On the Command Center, click Patient Review and Edit. The Patient Review and Edit – Search window
appears.
LabPro displays the required search criteria for that option at the right of the Search Type area.
Note: In some searches, you can include or exclude blank values. For example, if you click Collect Date
and select Include blank value, the search results will include specimens with no collect date in the
database.
3. Select or clear the Active Specimens Only check box.
Note: If you selected the Patient Query Rules search type, the Active Specimens Only check box is
unavailable because Active is a parameter in the query.
4. Enter the specific search criteria for the selected search type in any of the following ways:
 Click the From and To Calendar buttons and double-click the desired dates. To specify a single date
instead of a range, type the From date, and then press Enter. To review special codes for date ranges,
see “Enter Dates.”
 Click the Lookup button and double-click an item on the associated table to select it. To select more
than one item, press Ctrl, click each item, and then press Enter.
After you enter the search criteria, your selections appear in the Selected List.
Note: To delete any entry in the Selected List, right-click the entry, and then click Delete on the shortcut
menu.
9020-7569, Rev. A Working with Stored Data  10-1

5. To find stored specimen data for all selections in the Selected List, click Find on the toolbar. The results,
if any, appear in the Search Results list.
 To sort the specimens differently, click a column heading.
6. Do any of the following as needed:
Note: To select more than one entry from the Search Results list, if applicable, press Ctrl and click each
desired entry. To select all entries in the list, right-click anywhere in the list, and then click Select All on
the shortcut menu. The multiple select feature is not available for reviewing and editing specimen data.
To Do this
Review and edit the specimen In the Search Results list, double-click the specimen. The Patient
data resulting from your Review and Edit window appears. See “Reviewing and Editing Stored
search Specimen Data.”
Apply the current list of drug Select one or more specimens from the Search Results list, right-click
suppressions and AlertEX the specimen, and click Reprocess on the shortcut menu. When the
System rules to all isolates for confirmation dialog box appears, click OK to clear all User
the selected specimens interpretations and reprocess the results, or click Cancel to exit without
reprocessing the results.
CAUTION
After recalculating suppressions and rules it may be necessary to send a
corrected report to the physician if new suppression or AlertEX System
rules have been applied to past stored patient data.
Print a report of specimen data Select one or more specimens from the Search Results list, click Print,
and click a standard or custom report format. On the Windows Print
dialog box, click OK.
Clear all search criteria, Click Clear.
Selected List entries, and
search results
Find Stored Specimen Results Using the Patient’s Name

1. On the Patient Review and Edit – Search window, in the Search Type area, click Patient.
2. When the Patient ID box appears, click the Lookup button.
3. When the Patient table appears, click the Last Name column header to sort the table by patient last name.
Make sure the column header displays a , indicating that the last names are sorted in ascending order.
4. In the Lookup box, type as much of the last name as you know. The arrow in the left column of the table
points to the name that best matches what you typed.
5. Find the patient name and double-click the entry to select it. LabPro returns to the Patient Review and
Edit – Search window and displays the patient’s name and ID number in the Selected List.
6. Click Find on the toolbar. The specimen results, if any, appear in the Search Results list.
10-2  Working with Stored Data 9020-7569, Rev. A

Reviewing and Editing Stored Specimen Data
This section describes how to review and edit data after it has been stored in LabPro.
Review Stored Specimen Data

After you retrieve specimens on the Patient Review and Edit – Search window, you can select one specimen
at a time to display the associated patient, specimen, and results data.
1. On the Patient Review and Edit – Search window, double-click one of the specimens in the Search
Results list. An isolate number, status, date, and organism identification, if applicable, appear on the
Isolate Tests tab for each isolate associated with the selected specimen.
Note: The symbol  next to an isolate on the Isolate Tests tab indicates that alerts exist or that the
isolate requires processing.
 To view specimen test results, click the Specimen Tests tab and click a specimen test. To edit
specimen test results, see “Edit Specimen Test Results.”
 To view isolate details and the associated panel and offline test groups, click the isolate on the Isolate
Tests tab. Details and test groups display on the Isolate Details tab. To view test results, click the
Antimicrobic Results tab. If necessary, refer to the following result guidelines.
The Antimicrobic Results tab displays MIC values and interpretations for all antimicrobics for the
selected isolate. Results include panel and offline tests. Test results may include standard LabPro
System interpretations, Expert interpretations generated by the AlertEX System, and Final
interpretations.
Japan Only: If LabPro is customized to report JSC breakpoints, and you entered a disease state as
part of the patient order, breakpoints based on the disease state appear in the JSC - IV, PO, IM
column.
Note:
 The symbol Ø next to an antimicrobial indicates that LabPro is customized to suppress the
antimicrobial drug from appearing on patient reports.
 The symbol ** indicates an offline test.
 The notation N/R indicates the antimicrobic is not reported or the result is pending panel
completion.
 The notation N/R [MIC value] indicates the antimicrobic was manually set not to report. LabPro
retains the MIC value.
 An interpretation prefixed by a caret (^)—for example, ^ R—depicts a panel interpretation that
changed after it was transmitted to an LIS or printed on a Chartable Report.
 S* indicates the interpretation is predicted to be susceptible based on other panel results, or the
interpretation was changed by a user or changed based on an AlertEX System rule.
 R* indicates the interpretation is predicted to be resistant based on other panel results; the
interpretation has been forced to resistant—regardless of the MIC value—because the organism

was confirmed as an ESBL producer; or the interpretation was changed by a user or changed
based on an AlertEX System rule.
3. Do any of the following, as applicable.
Important: If an alert exists, you must resolve the condition by editing and reprocessing the results,
reordering the panel, deleting the data, saving the results, or closing the window without saving any
changes.
To Do this
Display AlertEX System messages Click Process. AlertEX System messages display again if the
conditions that caused the original messages to display on the
Results Summary and Edit dialog box still exist.
View the AlertEX System rule that On the Isolate Tests tab, in the ID Origin column, right-click
changed an organism identification the rule code, and click View Origin Rule on the shortcut menu.
View the AlertEX System rule that On the Antimicrobic Results tab, in the Origin column, right-
changed a System interpretation click the rule code, and then click View Origin Rule on the
shortcut menu. If this column is locked, click Unlock Final
Column and enter the password.
Edit isolate, panel test group, patient, See the appropriate procedures later in this section.
and/or specimen data
Review the alert history for this isolate Click Record Alert Resolution. For detailed information, see
or add alert resolution comments and “Add Alert Resolution Comments and View the Isolate Alert
free text History.”
Reorder a test group On the Isolates Details tab, right-click the panel test group, and
then click Reorder Test Group. When the confirmation dialog
box appears, click OK.
LabPro reorders the test group and sets the status to Ordered
(WalkAway panels) or No Data (non-WalkAway panels).
Note: If you reorder a panel that is processing in a WalkAway
instrument, LabPro abandons that panel from WalkAway
processing and adds the new panel to the WalkAway Bar Codes
window. LabPro retains any alert history for the isolate.
Delete a specimen, isolate, or test Click Delete, and then click Delete Specimen, Delete Isolate,
group or Delete Test Group, respectively. When the confirmation
dialog box appears, click OK. If you delete a test group, LabPro
retains the alert history for the isolate.
Japan Only: If LabPro is interfaced with another information
system, do not delete test groups; delete isolates only.
Close the Patient Review and Edit Click the Close button to return to the Patient Review and Edit –
window Search window.
Tip: To delete or finalize a test group, you can also right-click a test group on the Isolate Details tab,
and then click Delete Test Group or Finalize Test Group, respectively, on the shortcut menu.
To delete or finalize an isolate, you can right-click an isolate on the Isolate Tests tab, and then click
Delete Isolate or Finalize Isolate on the shortcut menu.

Edit Stored Isolate Details
1. On the Patient Review and Edit dialog box, on the Isolate Tests tab, click an isolate to select it.
2. On the Isolate Details tab, type the new information in an available box—or click the Lookup button and
select the information from the table.
Important: If you edit information in the Organism box, LabPro automatically recalculates all MIC
interpretations and reapplies drug suppression and AlertEX System rules for the new organism. If you edit
the Beta-Lactamase, ESBL, or Thymidine Free Growth boxes, LabPro:
 Clears all drug suppressions and MIC interpretations for system-defined tests on the Antimicrobic
Results tab.
 Requires processing to recalculate the organism identification or MIC interpretations. Processing
Required appears in the upper-right corner of the window. The changes cannot be saved until the
information is reprocessed.
If Processing Required appears, click Process. LabPro processes the data associated with the isolate and
displays the organism, the recalculated interpretations and drug suppressions, and new AlertEX System
messages, if applicable. Outstanding AlertEX System messages also display if the conditions that caused
the original alert messages still exist.
3. Select or clear the Exclude from Epi and Nosocomial check boxes as needed.
To Do this
Edit isolate antimicrobic results, panel See the appropriate procedures later in this section.
test group results, and/or patient and
specimen demographics
Finalize the data See “Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test
Group.”
Save your changes and exit Click Save.
Review the alert history and view/edit Select an isolate and click Record Alert Resolution. For
alert resolution comments detailed information, see “Add Alert Resolution Comments and
View the Isolate Alert History.”
Close the Patient Review and Edit Click the Close button.
window
Edit Stored Isolate Antimicrobic Results

This section describes how to edit antimicrobic results after the results are stored in the LabPro database. If
the LabPro AlertEX System is installed, interpretations based on LabPro AlertEX System rules may appear in
the Expert column next to the LabPro System interpretations. When available, LabPro reports Expert
interpretations as Final unless you enter a different result in the Final column.
Japan Only: If LabPro is customized to report JSC breakpoints and you entered a disease state as part of the
Patient Order, breakpoints based on the disease state appear in the JSC - IV, PO, IM column.
Tip: Antimicrobic results are sorted by test. To sort differently, click a column heading to sort by that topic.

1. On the Patient Review and Edit dialog box, on the Isolate Tests tab, click an isolate to select it.
2. To edit panel or offline test (**) MIC values for an isolate, on the Antimicrobic Results tab, select any
of the following actions:
 Position the pointer in the cell, click the Result arrow, and then click a value.
 Right-click in the cell to display the shortcut menu. Click Toggle N/R to change the MIC value to
N/R [MIC] or the N/R [MIC] result to the MIC value. When you change an MIC value to N/R [MIC],
LabPro retains the original `MIC but reports the antimicrobic result as N/R.
3. To report an interpretation that differs from the Expert and/or System result, click an interpretation in the
Final column, click the Final arrow, and then click an interpretation.
 If the result in the Final column was generated by an AlertEX System rule and you want to review the
rule, right-click the code in the Origin column, and click View Origin Rule on the shortcut menu.
 If the Final column is password protected, right-click anywhere in the grid, and click Unlock Final
Column on the shortcut menu. Type the password and click OK.
When the message Do you really want to change the final interpretation? displays, click OK.
Note: If you are changing an interpretation that has already been modified, this message does not display.
4. Click Process. LabPro processes the data associated with the isolate and displays the recalculated MIC
interpretations, drug suppressions, and AlertEX System messages, if applicable.
 If you entered one or more interpretations in the Final column, the message Do you want processing
to clear user interpretations? displays. Click No to keep the interpretations you entered, or click Yes
to clear the interpretation and restore the LabPro results.
To Do this
Edit panel test group results and/or See the appropriate procedures in this section.
patient and specimen demographics
Finalize the data See “Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test
Group.”
Review the alert history Select an isolate and click Record Alert Resolution. For
and view/edit alert resolution detailed information, see “Add Alert Resolution Comments and
comments View the Isolate Alert History.”
Close the Patient Review Click the Close button.
and Edit window
Use the Panel Editor to Change Stored Panel Results

You can edit panel test group results in the Panel Editor dialog box. This dialog box is used primarily to edit
biochemical reactions to determine the organism ID, although you can also edit MIC values using this
method.
Note: You cannot edit the biochemicals or MICs on Rapid Fluorogenic panels or the biochemicals on
Synergies plus panels.

The Panel Editor dialog box is not available if:
 The panel status is Ordered, Barcoded, or No Data.
 The test group is an offline test.
 The isolate has no panel test groups.
 The specimen has no isolates.
To edit panel results

1. On the Patient Review and Edit window, on the Isolate Tests tab, select an isolate.
2. On the Isolate Details tab, double-click the panel.
3. On the Panel Editor dialog box, click to select or clear the biochemical and/or MIC wells, and enter new
information in any available Additional Information boxes, as needed.
As you make changes to the identification wells, LabPro processes the results, displays the new biotype
number in the Biotype area, and displays probable organisms in the probability list below the panel
graphic. The original organism in the Isolate Organism box does not change.
Note: If a message appears in the Alerts area, you can:
 Change the identification reactions until the message disappears. If the message is Low Probability
ID, you can also select the desired organism from the probability list.
 Enter the required data if the message prompts you for additional isolate information—for example,
Oxidase.
4. To change the original organism, in the probability list, double-click an organism—or, click the Isolate
Organism Lookup button, and then double-click an organism in the Organism table.
Note: If the organism in the Probable Organism List is a low probability organism, you can display and
print the organism list including additional tests, footnotes, and special characteristics. To do so, click the
Organism Information Report button located next to the Organism heading in the first column of the
Probable Organism List. On the Organism Information Report window, click Print. For additional
information, see the MicroScan Systems Microbiologics Information Manual.
5. To save the edited information, click OK.
If one or more LabPro interpretations have been changed manually, the message Do you want processing
to clear user interpretations? displays. Click No to retain the user interpretations, or click Yes to clear the
interpretations and restore the LabPro results. LabPro displays the updated isolate organism, MICs, and
interpretations.
To Do this
Edit patient and specimen See the next procedure in this section.
demographics
Close the Patient Review and Edit Click the Close button to return to the Patient Review and Edit –
window Search window.

Edit Specimen Test Results
1. On the Patient Review and Edit dialog box, on the Specimen Tests tab, click a specimen test to display
free text or observation and quantitation results.
2. To edit the results, complete any of the following actions.
To Do this
Edit free text Use basic text editing features. Right-click in the free text area to display a
shortcut menu.
Edit observations, Type a code or date in the column—or, press F3 or click the Lookup button to
quantitations, and display a table or calendar, and then select a code or date. Press Enter to move
result dates to the next column.
Note: You can press Tab to move from column to column, but Lookup buttons
do not display. If you prefer to use the Tab key, press Enter while positioned in
a cell or click inside a cell to display the Lookup button.
 To add a row above the pointer position, press Insert. To add a row after the
last row, press Ctrl + Insert.
 To delete a specimen test result, right-click the row, and click Delete on the
shortcut menu. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
3. To change a Final or Preliminary specimen test status or delete a specimen test, right-click the specimen
test and select Toggle Specimen Test Status or Delete Specimen Test on the shortcut menu.
4. To save your changes and exit, click Save.
Edit Patient and Specimen Demographics

CAUTION
When you exit from the Patient Demographics dialog box, LabPro reprocesses the results for all isolates
associated with the specimen and reapplies drug test suppression and AlertEX System rules. Manually
entered interpretations (that is, results in the Final column with a User Origin) are cleared when results are
reprocessed.
1. On the Patient Review and Edit window, click Patient Demographics. When the warning message
displays, click OK to continue.
2. On the Patient Demographics window, choose one of the following actions:
 To edit the Patient ID for the subject specimen only, on the Data menu, click Clear Patient. In the
Patient ID box, type the new patient ID and press Enter—or click the Lookup button and select the
patient ID from the Patients table.
Note: When you click Clear Patient, LabPro clears the existing patient ID number and all patient-
related boxes. You must enter a patient ID number in the Patient ID box to continue editing or to
close the Patient Demographics window.
 To edit the patient ID for all specimens associated with that patient ID, click Change Patient ID.
When the Change Patient ID dialog box appears, type the new patient ID, and then click OK.
3. Click Close. LabPro reprocesses the edited data and displays it on the Patient Review and Edit dialog box.

To Do this
Edit other specimen or isolate Enter the new information in an available box, or click the associated
data Lookup button, if any, and select the information from the table.
Finalize the data See “Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test Group.”
Close the Patient Review and Click the Close button.
Edit dialog box
Note: On the Patient Review and Edit window, if you click Save and you previously edited information
on the Patient Demographics window that may be used in a drug suppression or AlertEX System rule, the
Modified Patient dialog box displays. This dialog box shows how many other specimens may be affected
by the change to patient demographics. To print a list of these specimens, click Print. To recalculate drug
suppressions and interpretations for any or all of the specimens, return to the Patient Review and Edit –
Search window. Find the specimens, select the appropriate specimens in the Search Results list, and
choose Reprocess on the Data menu.
Finalize a Specimen, Specimen Test, Isolate, or Test Group

LabPro automatically finalizes specimen data when no additional test results are expected. You can manually
finalize data under the following conditions.
 A panel test group can be finalized if the status is set to ID Hold, ID/24 Hour Hold, 24 Hour Hold, or
MIC Hold.
 An offline test group can be finalized if the status is set to Preliminary.
 An isolate can be finalized if no test groups are ordered.
 Depending on the specimen test type, a specimen test can be finalized if free text or at least one
observation has been entered.
 A specimen can be finalized if there are no associated isolates and all specimen tests have been finalized.
1. On the Patient Review and Edit window, click the Isolate Tests or Specimen Tests tab, as appropriate.
2. Click Finalize, and then click Finalize Specimen, Finalize Isolate, Finalize Test Group, or Toggle
Specimen Test Status.
Note: You can also finalize an isolate, test group, or specimen test by right-clicking the item and selecting
an option on the shortcut menu.
3. If a confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
If the panel for a selected test group is processing in a WalkAway instrument, LabPro abandons the panel
from WalkAway processing when the test group is finalized.

Performing Quality Control
Each time you receive a new panel shipment, it is recommended that you run quality control tests prior to
using the panels for patient testing. After running the initial quality control tests, you may also need to
periodically test antimicrobials on the panels. For additional quality control and testing frequency guidelines,
see the CLSI Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing and the MicroScan Panel
Procedural Manuals.
When testing panels for quality control, most laboratories use the strains of bacteria or yeasts with known
performance characteristics recommended by MicroScan. QC strains and setup procedures are provided in the
MicroScan Panel Procedural Manuals for the panel types used in your laboratory. Preparation and
maintenance procedures for QC organisms are described in the Quality Control Organism document
packaged with the organism.
The following illustration depicts a common workflow for processing QC panels.
 Print & apply bar  Access the WalkAway

code labels instrument
WalkAway WalkAway
Bar Codes Monitor
Receive new lot
window
or panel
shipment
Yes Load and process

panels in
the WalkAway
instrument
Process in a
QC Order
WalkAway
window
instrument?
 Add panel lot

demographics.
 Select test batteries or No
QC strains.
Out-of-control
 Save the QC order. No
results?
QC Order
 Click autoSCAN-4 window
or Manual Read. Print Reports
Yes QC Tab
Manual Read AS-4 Read
 Print QC Panel
reports.
QC Results
QC Results Read panel in
Summary and
Summary the autoSCAN-4
Edit window
and Edit instrument
window
 View QC panel results.
 Enter panel results  Resolve out-of-control
for a visual read. results.
 Process panel  If necessary, enter corrective
results. action.
9020-7569, Rev. A Performing Quality Control  11-1

Entering and Editing QC Orders
Before you can read QC panels, you must create a QC order to record the lot number, panel type, and the
received date. You must also order the appropriate test batteries and/or individual QC organism strains.
Add a New QC Order

1. On the Command Center, click QC Order Entry and the QC Order Entry window appears.
2. Type the lot number in the Lot # box and press Enter.
LabPro checks if the lot number exists in the database.
 If the lot number does not exist, the pointer positions in the Panel Type box.
 If one matching lot number is found, the information for that lot appears. Make sure you entered the
lot number correctly. If not, click Clear on the toolbar, type the lot number, and press Enter. The
pointer positions in the Panel Type box.
Note: If the lot number is correct, and you want to add a new QC order with the same lot number but
a different panel type or received date, on the Data menu, click New Lot/Shipment. LabPro clears all
data except the lot number and positions the pointer in the Panel Type box.
 If more than one QC order with the same lot number is found, the Duplicate Lot Numbers dialog
box appears. Select the desired lot number—or click New Lot/Shipment to add a new QC order with
the same lot number.
3. In the Panel Type box, type the panel code and press Tab—or click the Panel Type Lookup button,
double-click a panel in the Test Groups table.
4. In the Received Date box, type the date the panel shipment was received—or click the Calendar button
and then double-click a date.
Note: Although Received Date is not a required entry, it is highly recommended. The consistent entry of
a received date each time you add a new QC order makes it easier to locate and recall the order after it is
saved.
To Do this
Order QC strains so you can test panels See “Add QC Organism Strains to an Existing QC
Order.”
Save the QC lot data Click Save.
Clear the QC Order Entry window without Click Clear. On the confirmation message, click No.
saving the order
Tip: If you want to change a panel type, do so before saving the lot demographics. Otherwise, you must
delete the QC order, and then create a new QC order with the correct panel type.
11-2  Performing Quality Control 9020-7569, Rev. A

Add QC Organism Strains to an Existing QC Order
The LabPro administrator usually defines the appropriate QC test batteries for each panel used at your site.
Test batteries provide an easy way for you to order the appropriate QC strains for a specific panel type.
1. Complete the previous procedure—or, do one of the following:
 Type a Lot # and press Enter to recall an existing order.
 Click the Lot # Lookup button and double-click an item on the Panel Lots list.
 Click Reload Last Panel Lot to populate the window with information from the last QC order saved
or recalled.
2. To order a test battery, click an available test battery in the QC Order area, and then click Accept Order
on the toolbar.
To test Click
Antimicrobials MIC Test Battery.

Identification substrates Identification Test Battery.
Identification substrates and Identification and MIC Test Battery.
antimicrobials
LabPro creates an isolate for each organism in the selected test battery and adds the isolates to the QC
Isolate/Order list. If the QC order has existing isolates, LabPro numbers the new isolates sequentially in
descending order.
 If a test battery in the QC Order area is unavailable, test batteries have not been customized for the
panel type. Use a specific organism strain or add the QC test battery.
3. To add an order for a specific organism, click Specific QC Strain in the QC Order area. Then, click the
Specific QC Strain Lookup button and double-click an organism in the QC Strain table—or, type the QC
strain code in the Specific QC Strain box and press Enter.
Note: Unlike test batteries, you do not have to click Accept Order to add a specific QC strain to the QC
Isolate/Order list.
4. Select one of the following actions.
To Do this
Store the QC Order Click Save.

Store the order and read a QC panel Click an isolate to select it, and then click Manual Read or
manually or in an autoSCAN-4 autoSCAN-4 Read.
instrument
5. Process QC panels in much the same manner as patient panels. For details, see “Processing Panels.”

Edit or Deleting a QC Order
The following procedure explains how to edit and delete information in a QC order.
Important: You cannot edit the panel type after you save a QC order. To correct a panel type error, you must
delete the QC order and then create a new QC order with the correct panel type. Similarly, you cannot edit
isolate data after the isolate appears in the QC Isolate/Order list. To correct an isolate order, you must delete
the isolate from the QC Isolate/Order list and then add a new test battery or specific QC strain with the correct
information.
1. On the QC Order Entry window, in the Lot # box, type the panel lot number and press Enter to recall the
order—or, click the Lot # Lookup button and double-click an item on the Panel Lots list.
To Do this
Edit a lot number Position the pointer in the Lot # box and type the new number.
Edit the received date Position the pointer in the Received Date box and type a new date—or
click the Calendar button and double-click a day on the calendar.
Delete an isolate order Right-click the isolate in the QC/Isolate Order list, and then click
Delete Isolate on the shortcut menu. On the confirmation message,
click OK.
Delete the entire QC Order Click Delete on the toolbar and then click Delete Lot. On the
3. Click Save to store changes.
Viewing QC Panel Results

Results for quality control panels include the expected QC values for biochemical reactions and MIC ranges
for each MicroScan panel class. A panel inoculated with a known ATCC strain should produce test results
with these expected values when processed in a MicroScan instrument. Results outside expected values are
considered out-of-control.
click a panel.
or
On the QC Order Entry window, read a panel in an autoSCAN–4 instrument.
The QC Results Summary and Edit dialog box displays.
2. Review the panel results. A Ø symbol indicates an out-of-control MIC.
Note: The tested value for an antimicrobic in a Hold state is N/R and the out-of-control value is blank.
The tested value and the out-of-control value for a biochemical in a Hold state—a 42-hour biochemical—
are blank.

3. Choose one or more of the following actions.
To Do this
Enter a corrective action In the Corrective Action box, type any text. To enter extensive text,
click the Editor button.
Save QC panel results Click Save to store the results.
Display the reagents used On the Data menu, click Reagent Lots.
during panel processing
Edit the results—or reorder, Follow the same procedures used for patient panels.
delete, or abandon the panel.
Note: If you need to edit the QC strain, save the panel results and then
edit the strain using the QC Review and Edit window.
Print a QC Report See “ Printing QC Reports.”
CAUTION
When retesting QC panels, do not routinely use the Reorder test group command. Reorder test group
deletes all stored panel data, including documentation of the original out–of-control results and any
corrective actions. Instead, using QC Order Entry, select the QC strain to be retested from the
specific QC strain list.
Retrieving Stored QC Results

Before you can review or edit stored QC data, you must find the QC results in the LabPro database. On the
QC Review and Edit – Search window, you can look for stored QC results using a search type or a stored QC
query.
1. On the Command Center, click QC Review and Edit. The QC Review and Edit – Search window
appears.
Note: If you click Received Date and select Include blank value, the search results will include lot
numbers with no received date.
3. Enter the search criteria for your search type in any of the following ways:
 Click the From and To Calendar buttons and double-click the desired dates. To specify a single date
instead of a range, type the From date. Press Enter. For information on From and To date codes, see
“Enter Dates.”
 Click a Lookup button to display a table. Double-click one item, or press Ctrl and click multiple
items, and then press Enter.
Note: To remove an entry from the Selected List, right-click the entry and click Delete on the shortcut
menu.

4. To find stored QC lot numbers for all items in the Selected List, click Find. The results, if any, appear in
the Search Results list. If desired, click a column heading to select a different sort order.
 If more than one lot number appears in the Search Results list, click a lot number to display
associated isolates in the QC Isolates for Lot# list. If desired, click a column heading to select a
different sort order.
5. On the QC Isolates for Lot# list, do any of the following:
To Do this
Review and edit the data Double-click an isolate. See “Reviewing and Editing Stored QC Data.”
resulting from your search
Print a QC Panel Report Click one isolate to select it or press Ctrl and click multiple isolates.
Click Print.
Note: To select all isolates in the list, right-click anywhere in the list and
click Select All on the shortcut menu.
Delete a lot number In the Search Results list, right-click the lot number, and then click
Delete Lot on the shortcut menu.
Clear all search criteria, Click Clear.
Selected List entries, and
search results
Reviewing and Editing Stored QC Data

QC Review and Edit is designed for the review and edit of QC panel data already stored in the LabPro
database. Results for panels still processing in the WalkAway instrument may not be available in QC Review
and Edit but may be available via the WalkAway Monitor.
After you retrieve QC results you can review and edit stored QC lot and isolate data, reorder a panel test
group, or delete an isolate. You can also edit biochemical or antimicrobic results and reprocess to re-evaluate
the results and out-of-control values.
Review Stored QC Data

1. Complete the previous procedure to retrieve QC lot and isolate data.
2. On the QC Review and Edit – Search window, in the QC Isolates for Lot# list, double-click an isolate.
3. On the QC Review and Edit window, review the information, and then do any of the following as needed:
To Do this
Edit the data See the appropriate procedures later in this section.
Delete an isolate Click Delete Isolate. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
Reorder a panel Click Reorder. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
LabPro reorders the panel and sets the status to Ordered (WalkAway panels) or
No Data (non-WalkAway panels). If you reorder a panel that is processing in a
WalkAway instrument, LabPro also abandons the original panel.

To Do this
CAUTION
When retesting QC panels, do not routinely use the Reorder command. Reorder
deletes all stored panel data, including documentation of the original out-of-
control results and any corrective action. Instead, using QC Order Entry, add the
specific QC strain to be retested to the isolate list.
Close the QC Review Click the Close button. LabPro returns to the QC Review and Edit – Search
and Edit window window.
Edit Stored QC Data

1. On the QC Review and Edit window, enter information for the selected isolate in any of the available
boxes, as described in the following table:
To edit Do this
Lot # Select the lot number and then type the new lot number. LabPro assigns the new
number to all isolates in the lot.
Received Date Type the date and press Enter, or click the Calendar button and double-click the
desired date on the calendar.
QC Strain Click the QC Strain Lookup button to access the QC Strains table and double-
click an entry to select it. If applicable, LabPro re-evaluates the biochemical and
antimicrobic results for the new organism and indicates any out-of-control
values with a Ø symbol.
Note: If the panel type is a Rapid Positive MIC or Combo, you can edit the
organism only within the same family.
Corrective Action Type the desired information.
Biochemical and Do one of the following:
Antimicrobic Results
 In the Biochemical or Antimicrobic list, select the result and type a new
valid result in the appropriate Tested cell—or position the pointer in the
Tested cell, click the arrow, and then click one of the options. If an
antimicrobic is used for biochemical and drug testing, you can only edit the
result in the Antimicrobic list.
or
 Click Panel Editor. When the Panel Editor dialog box appears, click the
appropriate wells on the panel graphic, and then click OK. LabPro processes
the changes and displays them on the QC Review and Edit window. You
cannot edit Rapid Fluorogenic panel results or the biochemical results for
Synergies plus panels. The Panel Editor dialog box is not available if the
panel status is Ordered, Barcoded, or No Data.
When all edits are complete, click OK. If Processing Required appears on the
QC Review and Edit window, click Process Data. LabPro recalculates the
results and displays new out-of-control values, as applicable.

2. Click Save to save the changes or click Close to exit.
Printing QC Reports
The QC Panel Report documents that quality control testing was performed on each lot of MicroScan panels.
The report includes the lot number, panel type and received date; that is, the date when the QC panel lot was
received in the lab. All available ID and MIC quality control panel results print regardless of the test battery
selected (ID or MIC quality control) in QC Order Entry.
When a QC panel is processed, LabPro compares QC test results with the expected ranges to identify out-of-
control values. Any biochemical or MIC value that does not match the expected value or that does not fall
within the expected range for a specific QC organism strain is marked on the report. Corrective actions, if any
are also printed. The QC Panel Report also includes the reagent lot numbers stored in the database at the time
the QC panels were read. Before using a reagent from a new lot number, be sure to update the reagent lot
numbers in LabPro as described later in this section.
Follow quality control guidelines as directed by the agency regulating or inspecting your laboratory.
Note: You may find it necessary to review stored quality control data to uncover past incidences of out-of-
control QC testing. You can then determine if the current QC problem is part of a pattern or just an isolated
occurrence. By designing an appropriate QC query and displaying the query results in a QC Query Summary
Report, you can easily and efficiently search through large amounts of data to uncover evidence of ongoing
QC issues.
1. Click Print Reports on the Command Center and the Print Reports window appears.
2. Click the QC tab.
3. The QC Panel Report is selected by default. If desired, click QC Query Summary Report.
 If available, you can select the Include QC Isolates already printed check box to include any
isolates previously printed on a QC Panel Report.
4. In the Search Type area, click a search type.
5. Enter the search criteria for the selected search type.
 If a search option requires dates, you can click the From and To Calendar buttons and double-click
the desired dates. To specify a single date instead of a range, enter the From date only. Press Enter.
For details on From and To date codes, see “Enter Dates.”
 If search criteria can be selected from a table, click the Lookup button, and then double-click an item
to select it. Press Enter.
 To select a status, click the Complete, No Data, ID Hold, MIC Hold, ID/24 Hour Hold, or 24 Hour
Hold checkbox. Press Enter—or, add a date range and then press Enter.
 Your selections appear in the Selected List.
Note: To delete any entry in the Selected List, right-click the entry and then click Delete on the shortcut
menu.
6. Click Print or Print Preview to view a QC Query Summary Report.
 If you clicked Print, on the Print dialog box, select any options and click OK.
 If you clicked Print Preview click Print to print the QC Query Summary report or click Close.

Update Reagent Lot Numbers
Reagent lot numbers appear on the QC Panel Report. Therefore, be sure to maintain accurate lot numbers in
LabPro.
To update reagent lot numbers for manual and autoSCAN-4 panel processing
Use the following procedure to update lot numbers before you begin using reagents from a new reagent lot to
process a panel manually or in an autoSCAN-4 instrument.
1. On the Command Center, click QC Order Entry.
2. On the Read menu, click autoSCAN-4/Manual Reagent Lot Numbers.
3. Position the pointer in the appropriate reagent box and type the new lot number. Repeat this step to add or
edit additional reagent lot numbers.
4. Click OK to save the new reagent numbers and return to the QC Order Entry window.
To update reagent lot numbers for WalkAway Panel Processing

Use the following procedure to update lot numbers when you replace or refill a WalkAway instrument reagent
bottle with reagent from a new lot number.
1. On the Command Center, click WalkAway Monitor.
2. On the WalkAway Monitor, click the Maintenance tab.
3. Position the pointer in the appropriate reagent box and type the new lot number. Repeat this step for each
new reagent lot.
Note: LabPro saves each reagent lot number when you move the pointer out of the reagent box.

Backing Up and Optimizing the
Database
It is important to perform daily backups of the database, which includes all patient and quality control records
and all LabPro and interface customization data. You can use the data from your last backup to restore
information to the LabPro database in case you experience a catastrophic hardware failure.
Many laboratories customize LabPro to automatically back up the database at a time when LabPro is not
busy—for example, very early in the morning before personnel arrive. If scheduled backup is disabled, you
must use the procedure in this section to back up manually.
Performing a Manual Backup of the LabPro Database

If scheduled backup is disabled, you must use the following procedure to back up manually.
1. Close all LabPro windows except the Command Center.
2. Insert the backup disk or device, as applicable.
CAUTION
Make sure you have the correct backup disk or device to prevent overwriting an archived file with the
same name.
3. On the Command Center, click Utilities. The Utilities window appears.

4. Double-click System and then double-click Backup. The Backup dialog box appears.
 If other applications are running from the Command Center, LabPro displays a message. Click OK.
Exit from the Utilities window, close the applications, and repeat steps 2 and 3.
When the Backup dialog box appears, the default drive and the file name display in the Destination box.
 If you selected a different destination for your last backup, LabPro displays the last selected drive,
path, and file name.
 To select a new destination, type the path in the Destination box or use the Browse button to select a
new destination.
 If you do not have a CD-RW drive or an external device, the destination defaults to C:\LabProDB.
You can leave the drive unchanged and make a copy of the database on the C: drive, if desired.
CAUTION
If you back up to your C: drive and have a hardware failure, you could lose the entire database
copy and remain unable to recover the data. A CD-RW drive or an external device is strongly
recommended for daily backups.
9020-7569, Rev. A Backing Up and Optimizing the Database  12-1

5. Click Backup.
LabPro checks the destination disk or device before beginning the backup process. Respond to any error
or confirmation messages.
When the backup process begins, LabPro displays the following text messages:
Process Message
Prior to initiation No message displayed.

During backup Shrinking database…
Sweeping database ...
Compressing database…
Backup complete Backup complete.
or
Backup was not completed successfully.
The bar in the Percentage Complete box shows how the backup is progressing.
If the backup process fails, LabPro displays a message indicating the reason for failure. Backup messages
and the appropriate corrective actions are similar in content to the messages described in “Resolve
Scheduled Database Backup Failures.” Use the information in the problem resolution chart to respond to
any messages before you continue with the backup process.
Note: LabPro automatically appends an .mcp extension to the file name—for example, LabProDB.mcp.
6. When you finish backing up the database, click Close.
7. On the Utilities window, click Close.
8. Remove the backup disk or external device, as applicable.
Working with Scheduled Backup

If the administrator has configured LabPro to perform scheduled backups, LabPro automatically performs a
backup of the database once a day at the scheduled time. This function is usually planned for a time when
LabPro is not routinely used—for example, during the night. It is important that you prepare LabPro properly
before the scheduled backup time. Make sure all LabPro windows are closed except the WalkAway Monitor
and the Interface Monitor and that the backup media has adequate capacity and is properly labeled, if
applicable.
Once the scheduled backup begins, you cannot edit or terminate the scheduled backup process. If an error
occurs during a scheduled backup and LabPro stops the backup, you must resolve the problem and back up
the database manually, if necessary.
CAUTION
Make sure you have the correct backup disk or device to prevent overwriting an archived file with the same
name.
12-2  Backing Up and Optimizing the Database 9020-7569, Rev. A

Resolve Scheduled Database Backup Failures
1. Review the message in Windows Notepad and determine why the scheduled backup failed.
2. Resolve the problem.
3. Back up the database manually.
The following messages display when a LabPro scheduled backup fails to complete successfully:
Message/Problem Possible Cause Solution

A specified directory does not The directory specified in the Enter a valid drive and directory.
exist. Destination box does not exist.
Cannot backup database. The selected backup drive does Insert a new backup disk or device,
Insufficient disk space on not have enough free space to or delete one or more files from the
destination drive. Delete one or accommodate the backup file. backup disk or device.
more files and try again.
Estimated total space needed for
backup: <#>
Cannot backup database. LabPro started the backup but Insert a new backup disk or device.
Insufficient disk space on could not continue because the
destination drive. Total space backup disk is full.
needed for backup <#> bytes.
<Drive> is not accessible. The drive in the Destination box Enter the correct destination drive,
does not exist. and if applicable, the correct
directory.
<drive> is not accessible. The drive indicated in the Enter the correct destination drive
The device is not ready. Destination box does not exist and, if applicable, the correct
or does not contain a backup directory.
disk.
or
Insert the backup disk in the external
drive.
LabPro database scheduled LabPro has not been prepared to Prepare LabPro for a backup as
backup was unsuccessful. perform a scheduled backup. follows:
 Make sure the Command Center
is running, and all LabPro
windows—except the WalkAway
Monitor and Interface Monitor—
are closed.
 Make sure the backup disk is
ready.
Unable to backup data. The The destination drive contains Remove the write-protection from the
location you want to backup to is backup media that is write- backup media.
write-protected. protected.
9020-7569, Rev. A Backing Up and Optimizing the Database  12-3

Optimize LabPro Databases
You may notice a slow down in system performance over time due to an increase in LabPro records. You can
use the LabPro Database Optimizer to improve the speed and efficiency of LabPro databases. It is
recommended that you optimize LabPro databases on a regular basis to maintain optimal system
performance. The frequency of optimization depends on system use. A monthly optimization is recommended
for most customers, but large volume laboratories may need to optimize LabPro databases more often.
Important: Although most databases complete within five minutes, databases that need extensive
optimization may take up to an hour.
1. Close all software applications including LabPro. To exit from LabPro, close all LabPro windows and
then click Exit LabPro System on the Command Center.
Note: You cannot run the LabPro Database Optimizer if LabPro is running.
2. On the Windows taskbar, click Start. Point to Programs, point to MicroScan LabPro, and then click
Database Optimizer.
The LabPro Database Optimizer dialog box appears.
3. Click Execute.
4. On the Confirm dialog box, click OK to begin optimizing the LabPro databases. Progress is displayed as a
percentage complete in the progress indicator.
Important: During the optimization process, the progress indicator pauses occasionally while LabPro
analyzes the database structure. Some pauses may last for an extended time period. Running the
optimizer on a regular basis reduces this time.
Note: After optimization begins, if you click Cancel and then click Yes on the Confirm dialog box, your
computer will restart without further warning.
CAUTION
Do NOT start any software programs or shut down your computer while optimizing LabPro databases.
5. When the progress indicator shows Progress 100%, the databases have been optimized. Click Close.
6. Double-click the Command Center icon on your desktop to restart LabPro.
12-4  Backing Up and Optimizing the Database 9020-7569, Rev. A

Appendix A: WalkAway Instrument
Components and Specifications
This appendix includes component information and technical specifications for the WalkAway instrument.
Optical Systems
The WalkAway instrument uses two optical systems under computer control to detect bacterial growth in the
wells of MicroScan panels. For MICs, the intensity of light transmitted through each well is inversely
proportional to the concentration of bacteria in that well. Additionally, under the fluorometric system, the
intensity of the fluorescence in each well is proportional to the concentration of bacteria in that well. Selected
wells also contain biochemical substrates that exhibit a color change or fluorescence in the presence of certain
bacteria.
A colorimetric or fluorometric measurement yields information about the solution in the well. The optical
information generates a corresponding electrical signal (voltage) which is then converted to computer-
compatible (digital) form and stored in computer memory. The digital information is used by the central
processing unit (CPU) control circuitry.
After the entire panel has been optically read and the values stored, each test well reading is compared with a
threshold value. The threshold is a fixed number that represents a certain percentage of relative absorbance or
fluorescence corresponding to clinically significant growth. In this way, the MIC or qualitative susceptibility
of each antimicrobic is determined.
The computer also processes this data to provide information for use as a reference by the physician when
determining patient therapy.
For identification, the electrical signals corresponding to light intensity passing through, or fluorescence from,
each biochemical well are converted to a series of digital values indicating that a change did or did not occur.
These values are also stored in computer memory and compared to the fixed data. Based on the results—
either positive or negative—from each of the biochemical wells, the computer calculates a biotype number
that reflects these results and identifies the unknown organism.
Fluorometric System
The fluorometric system is capable of scanning the 96 wells of a panel and providing a quantitative measure
of the amount of fluorescence in each well. The system consists of a tungsten-halogen lamp, a 365nm-
excitation filter, an optical system to focus the excitation and emission, a 450nm-emission filter, and a
photomultiplier tube. The photomultiplier tube generates an electrical signal that is proportional to the
emission, which is converted to digital information for processing by the CPU.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix A: WalkAway Instrument Components and Specifications  A-1

Colorimetric System
The colorimetric system consists of a tungsten-halogen light source, collimation lenses, color wheel,
interference filters, fiber-optics cabling, and photodiodes. A tungsten-halogen lamp provides a stable,
broadband white light source. The collimation lenses concentrate the light emitted from the tungsten-halogen
light source into a parallel beam. A Hot Mirror blocks the infrared spectrum before passing through the
lenses. Glass interference filters are arranged on a rotating wheel, called the color wheel, which enables
selecting any one filter of a specific wavelength (color) of light at a time. The filters have extremely stable
optical properties.
The fiber-optics bundle in the WalkAway instrument consists of 12 separate optical fiber channels. The light
coming from an interference filter is guided up to each of the well locations of a MicroScan panel
simultaneously through the fibers.
The photosensor A/D board converts the light energy emitted from each well of the panel under test to a
usable electrical signal. There are 12 photodiodes on the circuit board in the WalkAway instrument, one for
each column of wells on the panel.
When a panel is read using the light that passed through the interference filter, the photodiode produces a
current (signal) relative to the amount of light reaching it. The electrical signals pass from the photosensor
A/D board in a serial manner. High speed multiplexing circuitry selects photodiodes individually.
Panel Positioning Assemblies

This section describes the instrument’s main mechanical systems that position panels for processing: the
carousel and tray towers, the grabber assembly, and the panel detection system.
Carousel and Tray Towers

The carousel is a circular platform that rotates around a vertical axis assembly. Sensors located in the front
left inner face of the carousel and on each tower constantly monitor the carousel position. Eight towers attach
to the carousel.
Grabber Assembly
The grabber assembly, located in the center of the read head assembly, consists of a drive motor, drive belt,
lead screw, grabber plate, opto sensor, and related hardware. The grabber assembly positions panels at the
colorimetric or fluorometric read station or under the reagent dispense head, depending on the operation being
performed.
Panel Detection System

The panel detection system determines the presence of a panel as the grabber assembly pulls the panel out of a
tower. If the panel is not detected or is in the wrong position, the instrument tries again to pick up the panel. If
the retry fails, the system flags the panel and the instrument moves on to process the next panel.
Note: Only the WalkAway SI and upgraded WalkAway instruments have the panel detection system.
A-2  Appendix A: WalkAway Instrument Components and Specifications 9020-7569, Rev. A

Bar Code Reader
The bar code reader is mounted on the rear left side of the vertical axis assembly facing the towers. As the
carousel rotates the towers in front of the bar code reader, the reader digitally scans the label affixed to each
panel for patient identification, panel type, and specimen information. If towers were accessed through the
panel access door, panels in those towers are scanned. If the service hatch was opened, panels in all towers
are scanned.
Reagent and Oil Dispense Systems
Reagent Dispense System

The reagent dispense system consists of the reagent bottles, dispense lines and tips (dispense head), waste
funnel, and waste bag. The reagent dispense system distributes a controlled amount of up to 10 reagent liquids
to appropriate panel wells during panel processing.
The reagent dispense system is located inside the lower front section of the instrument, behind the reagent
dispense door. When the dispense head is not in use, it is located in the top of the waste funnel. The reagent
waste bag is attached to the bottom of the funnel.
The pressure pump and regulator system maintains a constant pressure on the reagent bottles, and the
solenoids control the flow of reagents. When a solenoid is energized, the pressure in the bottle pushes the
reagent through the solenoid and tubing to the dispense head and into the appropriate panel well. When no
panel read or dispense activity is underway, the pressure pump automatically turns off and the pressure is
relieved through a bleed solenoid.
Oil Dispense System

Although not a part of the reagent dispense system, the automated oil dispense system also resides behind the
reagent dispense door and uses the reagent dispense head. The oil dispense system consists of the oil bottle,
dispense line, and oil syringe. The oil dispense system distributes a controlled amount of MicroScan oil to
underlined wells on appropriate panel types during panel processing.
Note: Only the WalkAway SI and upgraded WalkAway instruments contain the automated oil dispense
system.
Panel Preparation System

The panel preparation system—available only on WalkAway SI and upgraded WalkAway instruments—
optimizes the solubility of rehydrated components in Synergies plus panels.
Humidifier and Heater Assembly

The humidifier and heater assembly, located below the card cage assembly, maintains the incubator
temperature and humidity within established limits required for optimum growth of organisms. The
humidifier and heater are physically attached yet operate independently under software-control.
The humidifier assembly contains a float-controlled water reservoir, an ultrasonic humidifier transducer, and a
humidifier printed circuit board that provides power to the fill solenoid and ultrasonic transducer.

The solenoid valve controls the humidifier tank water level. When the water level in the humidifier is low, the
float is in the down position, which closes the switch. The humidifier printed circuit assembly then sends a
signal to the solenoid valve, which opens and allows water into the humidifier reservoir. As the water level
rises, the float rises to the up position, which opens the switch.
The heater, attached to the top of the humidifier, consists of a heater duct, a circulation fan, two heating
elements and two thermal switches. If the air temperature within the heater duct exceeds 140 º F, the thermal
switches open and shut down the heater to protect the instrument from overheating.
The incubator temperature must remain at 35º C, ±1º C. The humidifier is set to maintain 30 percent
humidity. However, humidity is acceptable within the following ranges:
 25 to 70 percent humidity for the WalkAway SI instrument.
 40 to 70 percent for earlier WalkAway models.
Humidity is necessary to prevent panels from drying out; therefore, out-of-range humidity is underlined on
the WalkAway QC Diagnostics Report.
Internal Computer
The WalkAway instrument contains an internal computer that consists of a master central processing unit
(CPU), CPU support, and random access memory (RAM). The master CPU controls the environment and
scheduling, CPU support controls the motor functions, and the instrument hard drive stores raw panel data.
LabPro also stores the panel data for raw and processed panel data reports.
WalkAway Instrument Technical Specifications

Note: The following information applies only to the WalkAway instrument and not to the LabPro computer
system or printers.
Physical
Dimensions WalkAway-40 SI
Dimensions: 29" H  38" W  29" D
Weight: 375 lbs.
WalkAway-96 SI
Dimensions: 37" H  38" W  29" D
Weight: 400 lbs.
Color Two-tone gray with green trim
Communications Protocol IEEE 488/1978
Interface Connector Parallel Interface Connector
GPIB conforming to IEEE-488/1978 and ANSI MC1.1 (with capabilities
of SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, RL0, DC0, DT0, E2, C0).
or
Serial Interface Connector (2)
Daisy chained RS 232. “In” port toward computer, “out” port away from
computer.

Power Requirements
Line Voltage 100V/120V/220V/240V AC selected by internal jumpers.
Line Frequency 50/60 Hz 5%
Line Current 8A (Nominal) 10A (Maximum) for 100/120 VAC operation; 4A
(Nominal) 5A (Maximum) for 220/240 VAC operation.
Power Loss Protection Circuitry provided to ensure fail-safe operation. Power interruption will
not result in a hazard. Automatic restart.
Recommended Laboratory Environmental Conditions
Temperature (operating) 15° to 27° C
Humidity 30 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Safety Requirements
Ground Impedance 0.1 Ohms (Max.)
Dielectric Withstand No Dielectric Breakdown (at 1400 VDC, for 1 minute)
Voltage
Leakage Current without <5 MA
Line Conditioner
Leakage Current with Line <.5 MA
Conditioner
Removable Power Cord 3-conductor, 16 AWG Shielded
Interlocks Provided on panel access door, reagent dispense door, and service hatch
Line Conditioner Power NEMA Type 5-20P
Plug
Overcurrent Protection
250 volt 10A type F (100/120V)/5A 250 volt type F (220/240V) fuse
and internal fusing
Light Source
Tungsten-Halogen Lamp, 20 watt, 11.75 volts (WalkAway-40/96)
Tungsten-Halogen Lamp, TL 2 1/2, 15 watt, 9.75 volts
Performance
Panel Capacity for 40 MicroScan panels with 96 wells each of any type compatible with the
WalkAway-40 SI incubator environment—up to 8 panel towers with 5 panels each.
Panel Capacity for 96 MicroScan panels with 96 wells each of any type compatible with the
WalkAway-96 SI incubator environment—up to 8 panel towers with 12 panels each.
Incubation Temperature ±1° C

Stability

Performance
Reagent Type Capacity 10 reagents total.
Reagent Dispense Volume 15 to 75, depending on reagent dispensed.
(l)
Oil Dispense Volume (l) 60 to 150
Panel Types All currently manufactured 96-well panels.
Accommodated
The WalkAway instrument cannot process panels whose MIC wells have
been supplemented with HTM broth.
Operator Interface Front panel controls and PC keyboard, monitor, and LabPro software.
Display
2-line, 20-character alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent display.
Temperature Control
Set by computer at 35° C ±1° C
Bar code: Code 39
Standard Conformance

Appendix B: autoSCAN-4
Instrument Components and
Specifications
This appendix includes component information and technical specifications for the autoSCAN-4 instrument.
Colorimetric Optical System

Lamp
The tungsten halogen lamp provides a stable, broadband white light source for the colorimetric system.
Mirror and condensing lenses

The mirror deflects infrared rays and can be very hot. The internal fan removes the heat deflected from the
mirror. The condensing lenses are designed to narrow the beam of light for the fiber optics bundle.
Color wheel and interference filters

The color wheel contains the optical components necessary to produce visible wavelengths of light for the
analysis of MicroScan panel results. The color wheel rotates to read each panel well at each wavelength.
The tungsten halogen lamp and six narrow bandwidth interference filters can create six separate wavelengths
of light.
Fiber optics bundle

The fiber optics bundle contains 105 fiber optic cables. Each cable channels the light coming from a specific
interference filter to the 96 wells on each panel, to two reference photodiodes, and to the scanning indicator.
Photodiode board
The photodiode board—also called the photo board—converts light energy emitted from each panel well to a
usable electrical signal. The board contains 98 photodiodes (transducers)—96 over the panel wells and two
for reference. Each photodiode measures the transmitted light and generates a current proportional to the light
intensity emitted from each of the fiber optic cables below the well.
Other Components
Diffuser plate
The diffuser plate is a glass shield, frosted on one side that diffuses the light intensity in the optical path. It is
located directly under the panel block.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix B: autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications  B-1

Aperture plate
The aperture plate is located under the panel block when a panel is inside the autoSCAN-4 instrument. This
plate contains alternating rows of large and small holes. It moves forward and backward to align the holes
beneath the panel wells.
The instrument initially reads panels using the large holes of the aperture plate and all six wavelengths. After
the plate shifts position, the instrument reads the panel again using the small holes and the 590-nanometer
wavelength filter. The small holes use pinpoint light to facilitate reading the MIC wells where turbidity may
be faint.
Photodiode shield
The plastic photodiode shield, located directly under the photodiode board, protects the photodiodes from
caustic reagent fumes.
Fan
The fan, located at the rear of the instrument, cools the lamp, mirror, and various electronic components in the
instrument.
Electronics
Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter board

The A/D board converts the analog electrical signals generated by the photodiode board into digital electrical
signals. The instrument transmits the digital information to the CPU board for processing and storage.
Central processing unit (CPU)

The autoSCAN-4 instrument contains an internal computer that consists of a central processing unit (CPU),
random access memory (RAM), and related electronics to accept and transfer electronic signals to and from
LabPro.
System Power Supply

This component supplies + 12 volts to the power board. The power used in this system is a switching power
supply rated to develop 150 watts. The supply has over-voltage protection circuitry to protect the circuit
boards in the system if a power surge of sufficient magnitude occurs.
The autoSCAN-4 (serial number 6500 or higher) has an auto sensing power supply and can run from a 115 or
230 VAC power source. This configuration is acceptable from power sources ranging between 92 VAC to
127 VAC.
CAUTION
For instruments with serial numbers less than 6500 that must utilize a 230 VAC power source, the
instrument power supply must be reconfigured. With this modification, the acceptable range in which the
instrument will operate is 207 VAC to 253 VAC.
The line frequency supplied to the reader must be a constant periodic signal (no fluctuations), but may be in
the range of 47 Hz (Hertz) to 440 Hz.
B-2  Appendix B: autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications 9020-7569, Rev. A

autoSCAN-4 Instrument Technical Specifications
Physical
Dimensions Width 19 inches, Height 10 inches, Depth 23 inches.
Weight 40 lbs.
Power Cord Length 6' 5"
Cable to Computer Length 8' 5"
Digital Interface RS-232C (9600 Baud)
AC Power Plug Type 5-15P
Power
Line Voltage 105/115/230 VAC 10 %

Line Frequency 60/50 Hz 10 %
Line Current 2.00A max. (115V), 1.25A max. (230V) (Fuses)
Heat Generation 630 BTU/hr
Leakage current Less than 500 uA
Optical System
Light Source Tungsten halogen lamp, 3500 hrs. life
Abridged filter photometer with six interference filters
(wavelengths in nanometers (nm): 440, 470, 505, 560, 590, 620)
Spectral Bandwidth 10 nm
96-channel fiber optics harness
Analyzer
System Panel Capacity 1 panel/reading
Automatic panel loading
Read Time Less than 5 seconds
System digital resolution .1% of reading
Transmittance range 100/1
Computer interface RS-232
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix B: autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications  B-3

Safety Requirements
Ground Impedance 0.1 Ohms maximum
Dielectric Withstand No dielectric breakdown (@ 1000 VAC 60 Hz for 1 minute)
Voltage
Power Cord 3-conductor, 16 AWG industrial grade SJT
Overcurrent Interrupter 1.60A (115V), 0.80A (220V)
Leakage Current Less than 500 uA
Environmental Conditions
Temperature Operating: 16° C to 32° C
Storage: -30° C to 40° C
Humidity 0 to 95% (no condensation)
B-4  Appendix B: autoSCAN-4 Instrument Components and Specifications 9020-7569, Rev. A

Appendix C: Instrument
Certifications
General Code Compliance Information

Safety Compliance
The WalkAway SI and autoSCAN-4 instruments have been designed and tested to comply with safety
standards EN61010 and EC61010-1 under the following environmental conditions:
Temperature 5° to 40° C
Humidity Maximum 80% at 31° to 50% at 40° C
Altitude Maximum 2,000M
Mains Supply 115+/-10% or 230 +/-10% VAC
Overvoltage Category II
Pollution Degree Degree 2, normal indoor laboratory environment. Air contains only
nonconductive pollutants with occasional condensation.
Emission Compliance
The WalkAway SI and autoSCAN-4 instruments have been designed and tested to comply with standard
EN61326.
WARNING
The user is hereby informed that if the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer,
the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix C: Instrument Certifications  C-1

C-2  Appendix C: Instrument Certifications 9020-7569, Rev. A
Appendix D: Instrument
Decontamination
This appendix describes what to do if you suspect that the WalkAway or autoSCAN-4 instrument is
contaminated.
WARNING
Before proceeding with the decontamination process, exit from LabPro, and turn off and unplug the
WalkAway or autoSCAN-4 instrument. The presence of hazardous voltages makes these precautionary
steps necessary to reduce the risk of electrical shock.
WARNING
Wear protective laboratory coat, gloves, and eyewear while performing the decontamination procedure.
You can decontaminate WalkAway and autoSCAN-4 instruments by wiping the surfaces with 70% isopropyl
alcohol. Use of amphyl, chlorine bleach, or other alcohol types can damage certain components of the
system—for example, the optical system—and should not be used. After cleaning the inside of the system
with any chemical, it should be allowed to air dry with the service hatch or lid open and the instrument
powered off for a period of time to prevent fumes from being trapped inside the instrument.
WARNING
The materials used to wipe the instrument are a biohazard. Use your laboratory’s safe biohazard waste
disposal procedures for contact with and disposal of these materials.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix D: Instrument Decontamination  D-1

D-2  Appendix D: Instrument Decontamination 9020-7569, Rev. A
Appendix E: Creating a New Water
Blank File
Water blank calibration is performed on each autoSCAN-4 instrument before shipping. If any major
component in the optical path—such as the halogen lamp—must be replaced, or if the drawer must be
realigned, it is recommended that you create a new water blank file and a backup copy of the new file.
Before beginning, be sure to have the following supplies on hand:
 An autoSCAN-4 Water Blank Panel Kit (Part No. 3280-1160) consisting of 12 panels with different mold
types
 RENOK Rehydrator/Inoculator
 10 tubes of inoculum water with PLURONIC (Part No. B1015-7) or 10 bottles of Prompt Inoculum
System-D (Part No. B1026-10D)
 10 dried panel inoculators (Part No. B1013-4)
Prepare the Water Blank Panels

1. Perform any required maintenance and let the autoSCAN-4 instrument warm up for at least one hour. If
necessary, have an FSE perform preventive maintenance or instrument alignment.
2. Inspect the panels to ensure that each is clean and free from any contamination.
3. Prepare the panels using PLURONIC-D water or Prompt according to instructions shipped with the
panels.
4. Stack 10 water blank panels on top of one of the extra empty trays.
5. Cover the stack using a second extra tray.
6. Allow the panels to equilibrate at least one hour before use.
Important: Use these panels within 18 hours.
Perform Water Blank Calibration

Complete this procedure after preparing the water blank panels.
2. On the Utilities window, double-click Configuration, and then double-click autoSCAN-4.
3. Double-click Water Blank File. If a password is required, enter the appropriate password.
When the confirmation dialog box appears, verify that the autoSCAN-4 instrument is on, and then click
OK.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File  E-1

4. The autoSCAN-4 Water Blank window appears. If a current water blank file exists, the water blank panel-
reading grid shows 96 averaged values. If the grid is blank, you must create a new water blank file.
You can also click the Water Blank Data arrow and click Calibration Data to view the last calibration
values.
5. On the autoSCAN-4 Water Blank window, click New.
Note: If the instrument requires QC Diagnostics and/or has not been calibrated, the autoSCAN-4
Calibration/QC Diagnostics dialog box appears. Run QC Diagnostics and Calibration, and click Read
Panels to begin water blank calibration.
6. Wipe any condensation from the bottom of the first water blank panel.
7. Insert the panel into the instrument drawer, and press the Read button on the instrument.
The water blank calibration begins. During the calibration process, LabPro displays the hourglass symbol
and progress messages on the autoSCAN-4 Water Blank window.
 If calibration is successful, a progress message appears instructing you to insert the next water blank
panel and press the Read button on the instrument.
 If calibration fails, the water blank panel reading grid displays unacceptable values in red, and the
following message appears:
Panel values exceed tolerances.
To discontinue the water blank file creation, click Cancel.
8. If the panel fails the water blank calibration, rotate the panel 180°, insert the panel in the drawer and click
Retry.
Tip: You can rotate a water blank panel to use it twice. As you read the panels, you may want to mark
the top of each panel to indicate that you have used the panel once and to know where to begin rotating
180°.
 If an error occurs while re-reading this panel, discard that panel and insert another water blank panel.
An error on a second attempt to read the panel usually means that the panel is damaged or optically
distorted, or it has contamination in the wells.
9. If the water blank calibration succeeds for a panel, repeat this procedure with subsequent water blank
panels until the instrument reads all 10 panels successfully.
Important: If more than 2 minutes elapses between water blank panel readings, an autoSCAN-4
communication error occurs and the water blank calibration will terminate. QC Diagnostics and
Calibration must be performed before starting the water blank calibration again.
 After the instrument reads all 10 water blank panels successfully, LabPro creates the water blank file
and displays the new average data on the grid.
10. To cancel the water blank calibration at any time, click Cancel Reads on the Data menu.
11. To print a Water Blank File Report, on the autoSCAN-4 Water Blank window, click Print.
E-2  Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File 9020-7569, Rev. A

Back Up and Restore the Water Blank File
You can create a backup copy of a successfully created water blank file and restore the file if needed.
To back up the water blank file

1. On the autoSCAN-4 Water Blank window, click Backup. The Backup autoSCAN-4 Water Blank File
dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired backup drive and select or type a file name for the backup.
Note: The water blank file is small and can be copied to a floppy disk.
3. Insert an appropriately labeled backup disk or device and click Save.
LabPro closes the Backup autoSCAN-4 Water Blank File dialog box and copies the water blank file
onto the backup disk.
4. When copying is complete, remove the backup disk.
To restore the water blank file

1. Insert the water blank file backup disk or device into your computer.
3. On the Utilities window, double-click Configuration, and then double-click autoSCAN-4.
4. Double-click Water Blank File. If a password is required, enter the appropriate password.
5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, verify that the autoSCAN-4 instrument is on, and then click
OK.
6. On the autoSCAN-4 Water Blank window, click Restore. The Restore autoSCAN-4 Water Blank File
dialog box appears.
7. Select the water blank file on the backup drive, and click Open.
Note: Respond to any confirmation or other messages that appear during the restore process.
LabPro closes the Restore autoSCAN-4 Water Blank File dialog box and copies the water blank file
from the backup disk or device to your computer.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File  E-3

E-4  Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File 9020-7569, Rev. A
Appendix F: ESBL Screen and
Confirmation Test
LabPro software includes two different sets of rules for screen and confirmation testing for ESBL producing
organisms on Dried Overnight Gram-Negative and Synergies plus panels; however, the software features and
reports generated share the same functions.
 If the ESBL screen is enabled and the panel being tested contains ESBL confirmation antimicrobial
agents, the ESBL confirmation rules take precedence. (A negative ESBL confirmation test takes
precedence over a suspected ESBL screen test).
 ESBL interpretations, if enabled, take precedence over inducible beta-lactamase (IB) interpretations.
To enable or disable the ESBL screening mechanism

1. Double-click Utilities, Customization, Panels, and Processing.
2. In the Interpretations area, select the ESBL Flagging-Urine sources and/or ESBL Flagging Non-urine
sources check boxes.
3. Click OK. LabPro will screen for ESBL based on source when each panel is processed.
The following information describes software rules for the ESBL screen and confirmation test. Scenarios for
suspected and confirmed ESBL results are provided at the end of this appendix.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix F: ESBL Screen and Confirmation Test  F-1

Software Rules
ESBL Screen
The following table provides a condensed version of software rules for the ESBL screen.
IF User customizes for “ESBL notification” for source of specimen
AND Dried Overnight Gram-Negative Panels

AND Identification = one of the following: E. coli, K. oxytoca, K. pneumoniae*
AND One of the following MIC conditions applies:
CPD, if dilution of 1, then >1

or if dilution of 1-2, then 2
ESBL-a if dilutions of 0.5-4 or 1-4 or 4, then >4
if BP dilutions of 2-4 or 2-x, then >4 OR
AZT, if BP dilutions of 8-16, then 16

(E.coli, K.oxytoca,
K.pneumoniae only) if dilutions of 1-32 or 1-16, then 2
if dilutions of 2-16 or 1, 4-8 or 32, then 4
if dilutions of 4-16 or 4-32 or 1, 8-16, then 8 OR
CFT, if BP dilutions of 8, 32, then 32

if dilutions of 4-32, then 8
if dilutions of 2-64, then 4 OR
CAZ, if BP dilutions of 8-16, then 16

or if dilutions of 1, 8-16 or 4-32, then 8
ESBL-b if dilutions of 1, 4-16 or 2-16, then 4
if dilutions of 1-16 or 1-32 or 1-128, then 2
if dilution of 1 then >1 OR
CAX, if BP dilutions of 8, 32, then 32

(E.coli, K.oxytoca,
K.pneumoniae only) if dilutions of 8-32, then 16
if dilutions of 4-32 or 1, 8-32, then 8
if dilutions of 2-32 or 2-64, then 4
THEN The results do not store or transmit. The organism appears on the WalkAway System exception list as a
Suspected ESBL. Non-WalkAway System users are prompted when the panel is read. The user selects
Positive (ESBL Scenario), Negative (normal SIR rules apply), or Suspected ESBL (EBL? Scenario).
Phenotypic confirmation of ESBL presence requires an alternate method other than the use of MicroScan
panels with single screening antibiotics, e.g. the MicroScan ESBL plus ESBL Confirmation Panel.
(continued)
F-2  Appendix F: ESBL Screen and Confirmation Test 9020-7569, Rev. A

(continued)
IF User customizes for “ESBL notification” for source type of specimen
AND Synergies plus Gram Negative Panels

AND Identification = one of the following: E. coli, K. oxytoca, K. pneumoniae.*

 ESBL-a1 (Cpd), >4 OR
 ESBL-b (Caz), >1
THEN ESBL-a and ESBL-b results do not store or transmit. Beta-lactam drugs will receive standard SIR
interpretations until ESBL-a and ESBL-b are read and processed. The organism appears on the
WalkAway System exception list as a Suspected ESBL. The user selects Positive (ESBL Scenario),
Negative (normal SIR rules apply), or Suspected ESBL (EBL? Scenario). Phenotypic confirmation of
ESBL presence requires an alternate method other than the use of MicroScan panels with single screening
antibiotics, e.g. the MicroScan ESBL plus ESBL Confirmation Panel.
* Refer to panel procedural manuals for additional information regarding ESBL-producing organisms.
1
For E. coli, K. oxytoca, K. pneumoniae: Panels containing a dilution of 4 g/ml cefpodoxime will follow ESBL
rules based on NCCLS (CLSI) M100-S15. Panels with dilutions of 1 g/ml or 1-2 g/ ml cefpodoxime will
follow NCCLS (CLSI) M100-S9. For P. mirabilis, panels with dilutions of 1 g/ml or 1-2 g/ ml cefpodoxime
will follow NCCLS (CLSI) M100-S15; some panels may utilize cefpodoxime at 4 g/ml for the screen.
ESBL Confirmation
The following table provides a condensed version of software rules for ESBL confirmation.
IF ESBL confirmation antimicrobial agent(s) are on the panel being tested:
AND Dried Overnight Gram-Negative Panels and Synergies plus Gram Negative Panels
AND Identification = one of the following: E. coli, K. oxytoca, K. pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis.*
MIC for Cefotaxme/ K. Clavulanate is >= 3 doubling dilutions less than the MIC for
Ceftotaxime OR
MIC for Ceftazidime/ K. Clavulanate is >= 3 doubling dilutions less than the MIC for
Ceftazidime OR
Note: For all MIC conditions, the software must be able to determine 3 doubling dilutions for the
organism to be confirmed as an ESBL. For example, if the MIC for Caz is >128 and the MIC
for Caz/CA is >32, the difference between MICs cannot be determined and the software will not
confirm this organism as an ESBL. If the panel contains nonsequential doubling dilutions (e.g.
Caz dilutions are 1,4,8, 16, >16) and the software cannot determine a 3 doubling dilution
difference, the software will not confirm this organism as an ESBL, and reports the result as
negative.
THEN The organism is considered a confirmed ESBL (Positive) and the ESBL scenario applies.
Non-WalkAway System users are prompted when the panel is read.
* Refer to panel procedural manuals for additional information regarding ESBL-producing organisms.
9020-7569, Rev. A Appendix F: ESBL Screen and Confirmation Test  F-3

ESBL Scenarios
EBL? indicates a suspected ESBL
 The antibiotic(s) within the screening set that meet the conditions will have the MIC reported and the
interpretation EBL?.
 The other screening antibiotics that do not meet the conditions will have the MIC reported with normal
SIR interpretations.
 All other antimicrobics will have the MIC reported with normal SIR interpretations.
 The EBL?, ESBL, and R* footnotes will appear on the patient report form.
 The LabPro interface transmits the interpretations EBL?.
 The pharmLINK software for Windows will store EBL? interpretations as E?.
ESBL indicates a confirmed ESBL

Phenotypic confirmation of ESBL presence requires confirmation testing. Other options include the
MicroScan ESBL plus ESBL Confirmation Panel or Dried Gram Negative Panels with streamlined ESBL
dilutions. These panels contain doubling dilutions of ceftazidime with ceftazidime/clavulanate; and
cefotaxime with cefotaxime/clavulanate as per current CLSI recommendations for confirmation of ESBL-
producing isolates.
 The antibiotic(s) within the screening set that meet the conditions will have the MIC reported and the
interpretation ESBL.
 The other screening antibiotics that do not meet the conditions will have the MIC reported and the
interpretation R*.
 All other cephalosporins and penicillins will have the MIC reported and the interpretation R*.
 The EBL?, ESBL, and R* footnotes will appear on the patient report form.
 The carbapenem (imipenem and meropenem), beta-lactam/beta-lactamase inhibitor combinations, and all
other antimicrobics will have normal MICs and SIR interpretations.
 The LabPro interface will transmit the interpretations ESBL and R*.
 The V3.7 pharmLINK software for Windows will store ESBL interpretations as EB and R* interpretations
as R*.
 The V4.0 pharmLINK software for Windows will store ESBL interpretations as ESBL and R*
interpretations as R*.
F-4  Appendix F: ESBL Screen and Confirmation Test 9020-7569, Rev. A

Index
24 Hour Hold automatic

editing MICs 8-6 data transmissions 5-5
test group status 7-14, 7-18, 8-3, 8-7 database backups 4-5
24 Hour Read, panel processing option 7-18 monitoring for data transmissions 5-4
report printing 4-6
A requests for data 5-4
Auto-Monitor 5-4
abandoned panels, identifying 7-13 Auto-Request 5-4
abandoning a panel 8-9 autoSCAN-4 instruments
Aborted panel status 7-15 calibrating 3-5
accessing configuring the serial port 4-2
LabPro 1-4 to 1-5 maintaining 3-6
WalkAway instruments safety and precautions 3-2
loading/unloading panels 7-5 serial numbers 1-3
maintenance 2-9 start up and shut down 3-4
Quick Access 2-6, 7-5 technical specifications B-3
troubleshooting, access overtime 2-26 troubleshooting 3-12 to 3-18
active specimen range, setting 4-3 water blank files 4-2, E-1
adding. See also entering autoSCAN-4 panel processing
oil to dispense systems 2-15 adding patient orders 6-3
reagents to dispense systems 2-11 reading panels 7-17
water to the water reservoir 2-8 resolving alert messages 7-23 to 7-36
additional information, panel results 8-8 responding to panel processing messages 7-20
air intake filter, checking 2-22 workflow 3-1, 7-16
alarm, WalkAway instruments 2-3, 2-8 Auto-Transmit 5-5
alert resolution comments/history 7-15, 8-8, 10-4
alert/exception messages, resolving 7-23 to 7-36
B
AlertEX System
adding rules See LabPro Alert System Guide backups
antimicrobic interpretations, described 8-2 LabPro databases
applying rules to reprocessed data 6-8, 10-8 manual backups 12-1
changing Final interpretations 8-7, 10-5 resolving scheduled backup failures 12-3
displaying rules scheduled backups, automating 4-5
for alert messages 8-4, 8-5, 8-9 water blank files E-3
for changed organism IDs 8-6, 10-4 Bacterial Incidence Reports, printing 9-6
for Expert interpretations 8-7, 10-4, 10-6 bar code labels
reprocessing data to apply rules 10-2, 10-9 affixing to panels 7-4
resolving alert messages 7-23 to 7-36 printing 7-3
reviewing critical alerts 7-15, 8-11 reprinting 7-4
antimicrobials. See panel results resolving read errors 7-7
Antimicrobic % Interpretive Reports, printing 9-5 simulating 7-5
troubleshooting 2-29, 2-33
9020-7569, Rev. A Index  I-1

bar code printers Cumulative % Inhibited by Antimicrobic Level
label alignment 7-4 Reports, printing 9-5
malfunction 7-5 custom reports
batteries, QC 4-5 adding and copying 4-15 to 4-26
biochemicals. See panel results printing sample reports 4-26
biotype numbers, described A-1 customer support 1-3
customization, safeguarding settings 4-26
C customizing LabPro
adding
calibrating instruments codes and groups to tables 4-7 to 4-9
autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-5 custom reports 4-15 to 4-26
WalkAway instruments 2-7 QC test batteries 4-5
checklist, WalkAway maintenance 2-6 queries and rules 4-10
cleaning instrument components. See maintaining specimen test and isolate orders 4-9
instruments automating
Code Not Found errors, suppressing 5-9 database backups 4-5
codes, customizing tables 4-7 report printing 4-6
Command Center, access and exit 1-4 to 1-5 reporting
comments, alert resolution 8-8 JSC breakpoints 4-4
communication failure messages, WalkAway preliminary MIC results 4-5
instruments 7-11 selecting
completing Synergies plus panels 8-12 panel processing features 4-4
components, described panel types for WalkAway processing 4-3
autoSCAN-4 instruments B-1 setting the active specimen range 4-3
WalkAway instruments A-1
Comprehensive Panel Status Reports
D
described 9-1
printing 9-2 data transmissions
configuration, safeguarding 4-26 requesting and transmitting data manually 5-5
configuring resolving transmission problems 5-14 to 5-18
autoSCAN-4 serial ports 4-2 stopping 5-7
LabPro interface 5-3, 5-10 troubleshooting
WalkAway instruments 4-1 interface issues 5-10
contaminated instruments D-1 Interface Log errors and messages 5-18 to 5-29
control panel messages, WalkAway instruments transmission problems 5-14 to 5-18
2-26 to 2-30 viewing and printing Interface Logs 5-8
converting databases, LabPro
CDOS customization 1-5 backing up 12-1
DMS cross-reference tables 5-12 optimizing 12-4
copying queries and user-defined rules 4-13 dates
corrective actions, QC results 11-5 entering date range codes 1-6
creating. See also entering entry formats 1-6
export configurations 9-8 interface format errors 5-11
exported files for epidemiology 9-7 setting the WalkAway control panel 4-1
QC test batteries 4-5 deactivate codes 4-8
queries and rules 4-10 decontaminating instruments D-1
water blank files E-1 deleting
worklists for patient order entry 6-2 isolates/QC organisms
critical alerts, reviewing 7-15 from QC orders 11-4
cross-reference tables, DMS conversions 5-12 from stored QC results 11-6 to 11-7
I-2  Index 9020-7569, Rev. A

deleting (continued) enabling (continued)
specimens, isolates, or test groups on the scheduled backup 4-5
WalkAway Bar Codes window 7-3 entering. See also customizing
specimens, specimen tests, isolates, or test alert resolution comments 8-8
groups from patient orders 6-9 dates and times 1-5 to 1-6
unwanted WalkAway panel results 8-10 patient orders 6-3
delimiters, field and string 5-10, 5-11 quality control orders 11-2
disabling reagent lot numbers 11-9
active specimen ranges 4-3 specimen tests and observations 6-5
automated report printing 4-7 test results, manual entry
Auto-Monitor 5-4 offline tests 7-23
Auto-Request 5-4 patient panels 7-22
Auto-Transmit 5-5 epidemiology reports
fluorometers 4-2 excluding duplicate isolates 9-7
disease states and JSC breakpoints 6-4, 10-3 exporting data to a file 9-7
dispense systems, maintaining printing 9-5
oil 2-14 to 2-16 error conditions, WalkAway instruments 7-10
reagent 2-10 to 2-14 errors in data transmissions
DMS, converting cross-reference tables 5-12 Code Not Found errors 5-9
document conventions 1-1 errors and messages, Interface Logs 5-18 to 5-29
doors, WalkAway instrument Interface Logs, using 5-8
described 2-4 problem resolution 5-10 to 5-18
locking and unlocking 2-9 ESBL. See extended-spectrum beta-lactamase
requesting access exception messages and alerts, resolving
for maintenance 2-9 general procedure 7-13
for panel processing 7-5 resolution tables 7-23 to 7-36
drug suppression rules excluding duplicate isolates from epidemiology
defining 4-10 reports 9-7
printing 4-14 export configurations, creating 9-8
recalculating stored results 6-8, 10-1 to 10-2, exporting LabPro data to a file 9-7
10-9 extended-spectrum beta-lactamase
troubleshooting 4-14 flagging 4-4
interpretations 8-2
E scenarios F-4
screen and confirmation test, described
editing F-1 to F-3
panel lot numbers
in QC orders 11-4
F
in stored QC results 11-5 to 11-6
panel results 8-5 to 8-8 field delimiters, interface 5-10, 5-11
patient orders 6-6 field service engineer (FSR) 1-2
queries and user-defined rules 4-13 final interpretations, changing 8-7
stored data Final Read, panel processing option 7-17
patient 10-5 to 10-9 finalizing specimens, specimen tests, isolates, and
QC 11-7 test groups
enabling patient orders 6-9
active specimen range 4-3 stored data 10-9
automated report printing 4-7 fluorometer, disabling 4-2
Auto-Monitor 5-4 formats, dates and times
Auto-Request 5-4 data entry 1-5 to 1-6
Auto-Transmit 5-5 interface errors 5-11
9020-7569, Rev. A Index  I-3

front tower, removing 2-17 isolate results. See panel results
FSE. See field service engineer isolates, adding to patient orders 6-5
fuses, autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-9
J
G
jams, WalkAway instruments 2-26 to 2-30
Gram-stain observations, entering 6-5 Japan
Group Level ID, selecting 4-4 interface field and string delimiters 5-11
JSC breakpoints
H customizing LabPro 4-4
disease states in patient orders 6-4
hold 24-hours stored test results 10-3
panel read option, autoSCAN-4 instruments 7-17 using Auto-Monitor 5-4
selecting panel processing options 4-4
status, MIC editing restrictions 8-6
L
humidity, WalkAway instruments
acceptable range A-4 LabPro
troubleshooting 2-24 accessing and exiting 1-4 to 1-5
databases
I backing up 12-1
optimizing 12-4
ID Hold messages. See messages
panel read option, autoSCAN-4 instruments 7-17 software, version number 1-3
status, MIC editing restrictions 8-6 working with 1-3
identifying panels to WalkAway instruments 7-5 lamps, autoSCAN-4 instruments, removing and
improving LabPro performance 12-4 installing 3-10 to 3-11
inducible beta lactamase (IB) flagging 4-4 loading panels, WalkAway instruments 7-6
installation policy 1-2 locking doors, WalkAway instruments 2-10
instrument problems. See troubleshooting Lookup buttons and boxes 1-4
Interface Logs lot numbers
errors and messages 5-18 to 5-29 panel
viewing 5-8 deleting from stored QC results 11-6
interface, LabPro editing in QC orders 11-4
configuring 5-3 reagent, updating 11-9
patient order worklists 6-2
requesting and transmitting data manually 5-5
M
troubleshooting
interface issues 5-10 maintaining instruments
Interface Log errors and messages 5-18 to 5-29 autoSCAN-4 instruments
transmission problems 5-14 to 5-18 diffuser plates 3-6
viewing and printing Interface Logs 5-8 fans 3-9
workflow 5-3 fuses, replacing 3-9
interpretations. See also panel results lamps, removing and installing 3-10 to 3-11
changing final interpretations 8-7, 10-6 photodiode shields 3-8
entering offline test results 7-23 WalkAway instruments
N/R (MIC Value) 10-3 air intake filters 2-22
predicted, Synergies plus 8-3, 10-4 checklist 2-6
recalculating 10-1 to 10-2 oil dispense systems 2-14 to 2-16
selecting ESBL and IB flagging 4-4 reagent dispense systems 2-10 to 2-14
unlocking the Final Column 8-7, 10-6 reference disks and shields 2-17 to 2-22
requesting access 2-9
temperature and water levels 2-8
I-4  Index 9020-7569, Rev. A

manual oxacillin, 24-hour hold processing option 4-4
data transmissions 5-6
database backups 12-1 P
isolate/test group entries 6-5
requests for data 5-5 panel access doors, WalkAway instruments 2-4
results entry Panel Alert Reports
offline tests 7-23 described 9-1
patient panels 7-22 printing 9-2
merging interface customization 5-13 panel detection system, WalkAway SI models 2-6
messages panel lot numbers
autoSCAN-4 instruments deleting from stored QC results 11-5 to 11-6
general instrument problems: 3-14 to 3-16 editing in QC orders 11-4
LabPro 3-16 to 3-18 panel orders. See patient orders, quality control
panel processing 7-20 orders, and orders, customizing
QC diagnostics 3-12 to 3-14 panel processing options, selecting 4-4
LabPro Interface Logs 5-8, 5-18 to 5-29 panel processing. See autoSCAN-4 panel
panel alerts and exceptions 7-23 to 7-36 processing, WalkAway panel processing, and
WalkAway instruments manual results entry
control panel 2-26 to 2-30 panel results
general instrument problems 2-31 to 2-33 abandoning 8-9
LabPro 2-33 to 2-36 editing 8-5 to 8-8
QC diagnostics 2-23 to 2-25 quality control. See quality control results
microbiology reports. See patient reports reordering a panel 8-11
minimum inhibitory concentrations 2-2, 3-1 resolving alerts/exceptions 7-13, 7-23 to 7-36
monitoring for data transmissions 5-4 stored. See panel results, stored
viewing and interpreting 8-1
panel results, stored
N
editing 10-5 to 10-9
N/R (MIC Value) in stored results 10-3 finalizing 10-9
N/R, do not report MICs quality control. See quality control results, stored
completing Synergies plus panels 8-12 retrieving 10-1 to 10-2
insufficient growth on rapid combo panels 7-26 reviewing 10-3
skipped wells exceptions 7-29 panel spills
autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-15
O decontaminating instruments D-1
WalkAway instruments 2-32
offline tests panel types, selecting for WalkAway processing
entering results 7-23 4-3
panel orders 4-9 password protected interpretations 10-6
oil dispense systems, maintaining 2-14 to 2-16 patient orders
optimizing LabPro databases 12-4 adding 6-3 to 6-6
orders, customizing 4-9 deleting a specimen, specimen test, isolate, or
orders. See patient orders, quality control orders, test group 6-9
and orders, customizing disease states and JSC breakpoints 6-4
organism identification, editing editing 6-6
panel results 8-6 finalizing a specimen, specimen test, or isolate
stored patient data 10-5 6-9
Organism Information Reports 8-6, 10-7 using a worklist 6-2
out-of-control QC results
panel processing 11-4
stored data 11-7
9020-7569, Rev. A Index  I-5

patient query rules quality control orders
copying and editing 4-13 adding
defining 4-10 panel lot data 11-2
printing 4-14 QC organism strains 11-3
patient reports, printing 9-3 editing and deleting 11-4
port assignment, autoSCAN-4 instrument 4-2 updating reagent lot numbers 11-9
power failure workflow 11-1
autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-16 quality control results
WalkAway instruments 2-33 printing panel reports 11-8
predicted interpretations, Synergies plus 8-3, 10-4 recording corrective actions 11-5
Preliminary Panel Data Reports stored. See quality control results, stored
described 9-1 viewing 11-4
printing 9-2 quality control results, stored
pressure, reagent dispense 2-12 deleting
printing isolates 11-6 to 11-7
bar code labels 7-3 panel lot numbers 11-5 to 11-6
epidemiology reports 9-5 editing 11-7
instrument data and panel reports 9-1 retrieving 11-5
Interface Logs 5-8 reviewing 11-6
lab reports 9-3 queries
Organism Information Reports 8-6, 9-3, 10-7 copying and editing 4-13
patient reports 9-3 defining 4-10
QC Diagnostics Reports printing 4-14
autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-5 Query Summary Reports, printing 9-3, 9-6
WalkAway instruments 2-7 Quick Access 2-6, 2-10, 7-5
QC panel reports 11-8
queries and rules 4-14 R
Process command, described 8-5
Prompt, selecting QC strains for batteries 4-5 Raw and Processed Panel Data Reports
PSI, reagent dispense pressure described 9-1
acceptable range 2-12 printing 9-2
out of range 2-27, 2-34 read options. See panel processing options
purging read panels. See autoSCAN-4 panel processing,
oil lines 2-16 WalkAway panel processing, or manual
reagent dispense lines 2-12 results entry
read time, selecting 16 or 18 hours 4-2
reagent dispense systems
Q
access doors 2-4
QC diagnostics configuring Auto Purge 4-2
autoSCAN-4 instruments maintaining 2-10 to 2-14
printing reports 3-5 troubleshooting 2-23 to 2-36
running 3-4 reagent lot numbers
troubleshooting 3-12 to 3-14 updating 11-9
WalkAway instruments viewing reagents for QC panel results 11-5
printing reports 2-7 recalculating drug suppressions 10-1 to 10-2
troubleshooting 2-23 to 2-25 recording
QC orders. See quality control orders alert resolution comments 8-8
QC Panel Reports, printing 11-8 corrective actions for QC results 11-5
QC Query Summary Reports, printing 11-8 reference disks and shields, maintaining
QC test batteries, adding 4-5 2-17 to 2-22
I-6  Index 9020-7569, Rev. A

related documentation 1-1 reviewing panel results
removing and installing lamps, autoSCAN-4 alert resolution history 8-4, 8-5, 8-8
instruments 3-10 to 3-11 critical alerts 7-15
removing the front WalkAway tower 2-17 panel results 8-1 to 8-4
reordering panels 8-11 QC panel results 11-6
replacing stored panel results 10-3
fuses, autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-9 stored QC results 11-6 to 11-7
lamps, autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-10 to 3-11 rules
reagent waste bags 2-14 copying and editing 4-13
report printing, automatic 4-6 defining 4-10
reporting preliminary MIC results, Synergies plus printing 4-14
4-5, 8-12 recalculating stored data 10-1 to 10-2
reports, printing troubleshooting drug test suppression rules 4-14
epidemiology reports 9-5
instrument data and panel reports 9-1 S
Organism Information Reports 8-6, 9-3, 10-7
patient reports 9-3 safeguarding customization settings 4-26
QC Diagnostics Reports safety and precautions
autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-5 autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-2
WalkAway instruments 2-7 WalkAway instruments 2-4
reprinting bar code labels 7-4 search types
reprocess isolate results 6-8, 10-1 to 10-2 patient reports 9-4
requesting stored patient data 10-1
data transmissions stored QC data 11-5
configuring Auto-Request 5-4 selecting
manually requesting data 5-5 16 or 18 hour panel read times 4-2
WalkAway instrument access active specimen ranges 4-3
for maintenance 2-9 multiple table items 1-5
for panel processing 7-5 panel processing options 4-4
resolving panel types for WalkAway processing 4-3
alerts and exception messages 7-23 to 7-36 serial numbers, instrument 1-3
autoSCAN-4 instruments serial ports, autoSCAN-4 instruments 4-2
instrument problems 3-12 to 3-18 service hatch 2-4
panel processing messages 7-20 setting dates and times on WalkAway instruments
data transmission problems See interface, LabPro 4-1
WalkAway instruments shutting down
bar code read errors 7-7 autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-4
error conditions 7-10 to 7-11 LabPro 1-5
exceptions, general procedure 7-13 WalkAway instruments 2-5
instrument problems 2-23 to 2-36 slow system performance, improving 12-4
unread panels 7-8 software versions, LabPro 1-3
restoring specimen data. See patient orders and panel results
LabPro data 1-5 specimen tests and results
water blank files E-3 adding to patient orders 6-5
results. See panel results, specimen tests and editing
results, or quality control results in patient orders 6-8
retrieving in stored data 10-8
stored QC results 11-5 finalizing
stored specimen data 10-1 in patient orders 6-9
reusing specimen numbers 4-3 in stored data 10-9
9020-7569, Rev. A Index  I-7

starting up troubleshooting
autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-4 autoSCAN-4 instrument problems 3-12 to 3-18
LabPro 1-4 drug test suppression rules 4-14
WalkAway instruments 2-5 interface
statuses, WalkAway instruments data transmission problems 5-14 to 5-18
display messages 2-26 to 2-30 error and warning messages 5-18 to 5-29
error conditions 7-10 to 7-11 issues 5-10
panels 7-12 panel processing
stored QC results. See quality control results, alerts and exceptions 7-23 to 7-36
stored messages, autoSCAN-4 instruments 7-20
stored specimen data. See specimen tests and WalkAway instrument problems 2-23 to 2-36
results, or panel results, stored
streptomycin, select 24-hour hold option 4-4 U
string delimiters, interface 5-10, 5-11
support, customer 1-3 unloading WalkAway panels 7-12
suppressing unlocking WalkAway doors 2-9
Code Not Found errors 5-9 unread panels, resolving 7-8
drug test results 4-10 updating reagent lot numbers 2-12, 11-9
symbols, instrument and product labeling vi
Synergies plus panels V
panel preparation system failure 2-36 vancomycin, 24-hour hold option 4-4
reporting preliminary MIC results 4-5, 8-12 very rare biotype, exception resolution 7-30
storing partial MIC results 7-11, 8-12 viewing Interface Logs 5-8
viewing. See retrieving and reviewing panel
T results
tables
customizing 4-7 to 4-9 W
using 1-5 WalkAway instruments
technical specifications communication failure messages 7-11
autoSCAN-4 instrument B-3 components A-1
WalkAway instruments A-4 configuring 4-1
temperature, WalkAway instruments 2-8 control panel messages 2-26 to 2-30
test results. See panel results or specimen test doors 2-4, 2-10
results LED lights 7-5 to 7-6
time-critical exceptions 7-10 maintaining. See maintaining
times safety precautions 2-4
entry formats 1-5 serial numbers 1-3
interface format errors 5-11 starting up and shutting down 2-5
setting WalkAway control panels 4-1 technical specifications A-4
tower, removing 2-17 troubleshooting 2-23 to 2-36
transferring files for WalkAway processing 4-3 WalkAway models, earlier
transmitting results oil dispense systems 2-14
configuring Auto-Transmit 5-5 panel detection systems A-2
manually transmitting results 5-6 summary of key differences 2-6
sending a request for data 5-5
troubleshooting, interface. See troubleshooting.
Troubleshoot command, printing a CPSR 9-2
I-8  Index 9020-7569, Rev. A

WalkAway panel processing warming up instruments
loading panels 7-6 autoSCAN-4 instruments 3-4
monitoring instrument/panel status 7-10 to 7-12 WalkAway instruments 2-5
operating the instrument 2-2 warranty iii
printing bar code labels 7-3 to 7-5 water blank files
requesting instrument access 7-5 backing up and restoring E-3
resolving creating E-1 to E-2
alerts and exception messages 7-23 to 7-36 water reservoirs, maintaining 2-8
bar code read errors 7-7 workflows
exceptions, general procedure 7-13 autoSCAN-4 panel processing 7-16
instrument error conditions 7-10 to 7-11 interface 5-3
unread panels 7-8 to 7-9 patient orders 6-1
unloading panels 7-12 quality control orders 11-1
workflow 2-1 WalkAway panel processing 2-1, 7-1
WalkAway statuses. See statuses, WalkAway worklists, patient orders 6-2
instruments
9020-7569, Rev. A Index  I-9

I-10  Index 9020-7569, Rev. A

LabPro Operator's Guide-9020-7569 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

LabPro Operator's Guide-9020-7569 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Operator’s Guide

Simple Solutions Are A Click Away.

©1987-2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation. All rights reserved.

© 2015 Beckman Coulter, Inc. All rights reserved.

9020-7569, Rev. A Warranty statement  iii

iv  Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols 9020-7569, Rev. A

"Use By" date in year-month-day format

Consult Instructions for Use

Antimicrobial Agent Abbr.

Full / Maximum filling level

Gas lift spring lock / unlock

9020-7569, Rev. A Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols  v

vi  Instrument Safety Labels and Key Symbols 9020-7569, Rev. A

Getting Started ______________________________________________________ 1-1

Operating and Maintaining a WalkAway Instrument _______________________ 2-1

9020-7569, Rev. A Contents  vii

Operating and Maintaining the autoSCAN-4 Instrument ____________________ 3-1

Customizing LabPro _________________________________________________ 4-1

viii  Contents 9020-7569, Rev. A

Using the LabPro Interface ____________________________________________ 5-1

9020-7569, Rev. A Contents  ix

Processing Panels __________________________________________________ 7-1

Working with Summarized Panel Results________________________________ 8-1

Printing Reports ____________________________________________________ 9-1

x  Contents 9020-7569, Rev. A

Working with Stored Data ____________________________________________ 10-1

Performing Quality Control ___________________________________________ 11-1

Backing Up and Optimizing the Database_______________________________ 12-1

Appendix A: WalkAway Instrument Components and Specifications _________ A-1

9020-7569, Rev. A Contents  xi

Appendix C: Instrument Certifications __________________________________ C-1

Appendix D: Instrument Decontamination _______________________________ D-1

Appendix E: Creating a New Water Blank File ____________________________ E-1

Appendix F: ESBL Screen and Confirmation Test_________________________ F-1

Index _______________________________________________________________ I-1

xii  Contents 9020-7569, Rev. A

Find Information in Related Documentation

This format Indicates

9020-7569, Rev. A Getting Started  1-1

1-2  Getting Started 9020-7569, Rev. A

Working with LabPro

9020-7569, Rev. A Getting Started  1-3

Access the Command Center

1-4  Getting Started 9020-7569, Rev. A

To exit the Command Center

Work with Tables

9020-7569, Rev. A Getting Started  1-5

Display the previous or next month

To enter a date range

The current month CM

The previous month PM

The current quarter CQ

A quarter in the current year Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4

The current year CY

The previous year PY

The last 12 months (“Rolling 12”) R12

You can also:

1-6  Getting Started 9020-7569, Rev. A

How the WalkAway Instrument Processes Panels

9020-7569, Rev. A Operating and Maintaining a WalkAway Instrument  2-1

Operating the WalkAway Instrument

Status Display and Control Panel Buttons

2-2  Operating and Maintaining a WalkAway Instrument 9020-7569, Rev. A